- 2018

Faculty of Business and Economics
Undergraduate - Units

ACB1100 - Introduction to financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mahendra Goyal

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ACB1002, AFF1121, ACF1121, AFG1002, ACG1002, AFC1030, AFW1002, ACW1002, ACC1100, ACF1100, ACP1100, ACW1100

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an introduction to financial accounting guided by the Conceptual Framework and Accounting Standards. Emphasis is placed on accounting processes, practices and policies that enable the financial statements to be prepared. Students will integrate theoretical and technical knowledge learned and exercise judgement to explore accounting issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse measurement systems and their relationship with the accounting Conceptual Framework
  2. apply the principles of double-entry and accrual accounting
  3. describe and apply definitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, incomes and expenses as specified in the Conceptual Framework
  4. apply principles of selected Accounting Standards and prepare financial statements for business entities including service and retail organisations
  5. develop the ability to work effectively in a team; and demonstrate the development of skills in research, judgement and oral communication.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACB1200 - Accounting for managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Jon Phillips

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ACB1000, ACC1000, ACF1000, ACP1000, ACG1000, ACW1000, ACB1100, ACC1100, ACF1100, ACP1100, ACW1100, ACC1200, ACF1200, ACP1200

Synopsis

This unit introduces basic accounting concepts to non-accountants. The information requirements of two main groups of information users are examined - external users such as current and potential investors and internal users such as managers. This unit provides an introduction to the structure, meaning, analysis and interpretation of financial statements, in addition to exploring financial issues confronting managers, such as cost and performance measurement and budgeting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of various forms of business organisations
  2. apply financial and management accounting principles in the preparation of financial statements
  3. measure and interpret information relating to financial performance, financial position, liquidity and risk indicators of businesses
  4. measure and interpret financial and non-financial information for managers to use in planning, decision making and control
  5. develop the ability to work effectively in a team and demonstrate the development of judgement, and skills in problem solving, critical thinking and analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACB2020 - Cost information for decision making

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Prabanga Thoradeniya

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACB1100 or equivalent.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B2007.

Prohibitions

ACC2131, ACF2391, ACG2020, ACW2020Not offered in 2018, AFC2131, AFF2391, AFG2020, AFW2020

Synopsis

Introduction to management accounting. Topics include: basic terms and concepts, classification and behaviour of costs, recording product cost transactions for manufacturing firms, joint and by-product spoilage and waste, apportioning joint costs for multiple products, activity-based costing and information for management decisions.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe cost behaviour under different assumptions
  2. compare systems designed to provide relevant and timely information to managers for resource management and allocation decisions
  3. apply conventional and contemporary cost management techniques used in manufacturing and service industries
  4. explain the benefits and limitations of contemporary cost management techniques
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with cost information for decision making and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACB2020.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACB2491 - Company reporting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lisa Powell

Coordinator(s)

Dr Lisa Powell

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACB1100 or equivalent.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B2007.

Prohibitions

ACC2120, ACF2491, ACG2491, ACG2491, AFC2120, AFF2491, AFG2491

Synopsis

This unit examines the current Australian reporting and regulatory framework applicable to reporting entities including an analysis of significant accounting standards, professional reporting requirements and legal and stock exchange requirements. Accounting for corporate groups and issues in financial reporting are also explored.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the nature and regulation of companies in Australia
  2. apply accounting standards and the framework in the preparation and presentation of financial statements for both single and consolidated entities
  3. demonstrate accounting knowledge in areas such as company operations, taxation, property, plant and equipment (acquisition and impairment), and group accounting
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with company reporting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACB2491.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACB2851 - Accounting information systems and financial modelling

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Krueger

Coordinator(s)

Mr Peter Krueger

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACB1100 or equivalent.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B2007.

Prohibitions

ACC2851, ACF2851, ACG2851, ACP2851, ACW2851, AFC2160, AFC2851, AFF2051, AFF2851, AFG2851, AFP2851, AFW2051, BUS1060, BUS3030

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is two-fold. First, the unit provides students with a broad introduction to accounting information systems and the role technology plays in accounting. The focus will be on an introduction to: enterprise systems; database management; documentation methods; internal controls; and the core business processes found in organisations. Second, the unit focuses on corporate modelling theory; models as decision support tools; types and uses of models; benefits and limitations of models; effective spreadsheet design; auditing spreadsheet models and development of various models using an industry standard spreadsheet.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role of accounting information systems in analysing and providing decision support to managers
  2. explain the design of accounting information systems and financial models
  3. develop financial models to assist in decision making
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with accounting information systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACB2851.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACB3021 - Performance measurement and control

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Paul Yap

Coordinator(s)

Mr Paul Yap

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACB2020 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACC3131, ACF3431, ACG3021, ACW3021Not offered in 2018, AFG3021, AFW3021, AFC3131, AFF3431

Synopsis

Topics include the budget planning process including master budget preparation, budgeting standard costs and variance analysis, responsibility accounting, management by objectives and non-financial performance measurement, divisional performance, transfer pricing issues, program budgeting and other approaches, capital budgeting, strategic planning and control.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply traditional and contemporary performance measurement and control techniques to enable managers to measure and enhance organisational performance
  2. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of performance measurement and control systems
  3. explain how behavioural implications are crucial for the effective design of performance measurement and control systems
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with performance measurement and control and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACB3021.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACB3041 - Auditing and assurance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lisa Powell

Coordinator(s)

Dr Lisa Powell

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACB2491 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACW3041, AFG3041, ACG3041, AFC3160, ACC3160, AFF3631, ACF3631

Synopsis

This unit examines the auditor's legal liabilities, audit process and evidence, the concepts of materiality and risks, study and evaluation of internal control, EDP auditing, audit sampling techniques, the test of transactions cycles and the verification of account balances, auditors reports, and internal and operational auditing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role, limitations and demand for audits in modern corporate society including the auditor's professional, ethical and legal obligations
  2. explain the auditor's role in corporate governance with particular emphasis on the detection and reporting of fraud and error
  3. describe the assurance framework, planning process and evidence gathering procedures used by auditors to form an audit opinion
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with auditing and assurance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACB3041.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACB3050 - Advanced financial accounting theory and issues

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mahendra Goyal

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACB2491 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC3120, ACC3120, AFF3491, ACF3491, AFW3050, ACW3050Not offered in 2018, ACG3050 and AFG3050

Synopsis

Financial accounting topics covered by this unit include: Australian accounting standards, institutional setting and the conceptual framework; accounting for leases; accounting for employee benefits; accounting for financial instruments; cash flow reporting; segment reporting; accounting for EPS; accounting for extractive industries; accounting for agriculture; financial reporting in the public sector; foreign currency translation; and social and environmental reporting.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire advanced knowledge of the conceptual framework and disclosure requirements in accordance with the accounting standards and the statutory laws
  2. develop an improved understanding of how professional policies are formulated in preparation of accounting for various financial accounting issues with particular reference to current practice
  3. develop critical skills in written communication and problem analysis through the completion of comprehensive assignment exercise and /or essays
  4. develop an ability to work independently and to participate in group discussions with participants from diverse backgrounds
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACB3050.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACC1100 - Introduction to financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Alan Serry

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ACB1002, AFF1121, ACF1121, AFG1002, ACG1002, AFC1030, AFW1002, ACW1002, ACF1100, ACP1100.

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an introduction to financial accounting guided by the Conceptual Framework and Accounting Standards. Emphasis is placed on accounting processes, practices and policies that enable financial statements to be prepared. Students will integrate theoretical and technical knowledge learned and exercise judgement to explore accounting issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse measurement systems and their relationship with the accounting Conceptual Framework
  2. apply the principles of double-entry and accrual accounting
  3. describe and apply definitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, incomes and expenses as specified in the Conceptual Framework
  4. apply principles of selected Accounting Standards and prepare financial statements for business entities including service and retail organisations
  5. develop the ability to work effectively in a team; and demonstrate the development of skills in research, judgement and oral communication.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACC1200 - Accounting for managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Tirukumar Thiagarajah (First semester)
Ms Ellinor Allen (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ACB1000, ACC1000, ACF1000, ACG1000, ACP1000, ACW1000, ACF1200, ACP1200, ACC1100, ACB1100, ACF1100, ACP1100 and ACW1100.

Synopsis

This unit introduces basic accounting concepts to non-accountants. The information requirements of two main groups of information users are examined - external users such as current and potential investors and internal users such as managers. This unit provides an introduction to the structure, meaning, analysis and interpretation of financial statements, in addition to exploring financial issues confronting managers, such as cost and performance measurement and budgeting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of various forms of business organisation
  2. apply financial and management accounting principles in the preparation of financial statements
  3. measure and interpret information relating to financial performance, financial position, liquidity and risk indicators of businesses
  4. measure and interpret financial and non-financial information for managers to use in planning, decision making and control
  5. develop the ability to work effectively in a team and demonstrate the development of judgement, and skills in problem solving, critical thinking and analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACC2100 - Financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sunyoung Kim (First semester)
Dr Dharmendra Naidu (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sunyoung Kim (First semester)
Dr Dharmendra Naidu (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACC1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACF2100, ACB2491, AFF2491, ACF2491, AFG2491, ACG2491, AFW2491, ACW2491, ACC2120, AFC2120.

Synopsis

This unit examines financial accounting issues associated with the operation of corporate structures. Topics include financial reporting requirements, financing company operations, business combinations, the nature of corporate groups, the preparation of consolidated financial statements and financial statement analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the regulation of companies and the content of company financial reports
  2. critically examine current issues and disclosure requirements in financial reporting
  3. apply accounting standards and the conceptual framework in the preparation and presentation of financial reports for consolidated entities
  4. demonstrate accounting knowledge in areas such as company operations, taxation, property, plant and equipment, acquisitions, group accounting and financial statement analysis
  5. apply critical thinking, research, problem solving, and written and oral communication skills to demonstrate the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACC2200 - Introduction to management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Prabanga Thoradeniya (First semester)
Dr Aleksandra Pop-Vasileva (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Prabanga Thoradeniya

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACC1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACB2020, AFC2131, ACC2131, AFG2020, ACG2020, AFW2020, ACW2020Not offered in 2018, AFF2391, ACF2391, ACF2200.

Synopsis

This introductory management accounting unit focuses on the types of cost information that can be produced to assist managers and other employees within organisations in planning and control, and in decision-making. Topics include: costs and cost behaviour, product costing, cost allocation techniques, cost-volume-profit analysis, and the use of cost information for management decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. classify costs dependent on the context and purpose of related decisions
  2. analyse cost behaviour and estimate costs
  3. design, use and evaluate costing systems
  4. analyse and use cost information relevant to decision-making
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills to individual and/or group activities to demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACC2400 - Accounting information systems

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Edward Tello

Coordinator(s)

Dr Edward Tello

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACC1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACF2400, ACB2851, ACC2851, ACF2851, ACG2851, ACP2851, ACW2851, BUS1060, BUS3030, AFF2851, AFC2851, AFW2851, AFP2851.

Synopsis

At the core of Accounting Information Systems is the idea that accountants must understand the core business processes that underpin the business activities in an organisation and generate transaction data. Thus, the objective of this unit is to provide students with a broad introduction to the core business processes. Further, given the role technology plays in accounting, with many accounting systems being computerised, other topics covered include: how hardware, software and human processes turn data into useful financial and non-financial information for decision making, methods for documenting and analysing business processes, principles of effective spreadsheet design, systems development and maintenance, and the need to understand internal controls in order to ensure (information and other) resources remain secure from losses through both inadvertent and malicious actions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role of business processes and the use of accounting information systems in capturing and managing information that support the needs of stakeholders
  2. analyse and evaluate the design of business processes and accounting information systems
  3. explain the importance of internal controls and recommend internal controls that cover key business processes and support the achievement of goals
  4. synthesise design principles to develop financial models that assist in decision making
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills to analyse, evaluate and interpret business processes and the accounting data that is generated.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACC2888 - Industry-based learning period A

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Carla Wilkin

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 48 credit points, including AFC1030 or ACC1030.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B2000, B2001, B2003 or associated double degree program.

Prohibitions

AFC2888

Synopsis

Over the 14 week period of full-time employment, students will be required to complete one or more specified projects. The projects will be determined by the course coordinator in consultation with the sponsor and the student undergoing the industry-based learning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. perform business tasks effectively and efficiently, both as an individual and as a team member
  2. apply technical and theoretical knowledge and skills to business tasks
  3. demonstrate an understanding of the nuances and practicalities of working within an organisation
  4. communicate perceptively and effectively with subordinates, peers and superiors
  5. apply critical thinking and compose a set of high quality reports for submission to management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACC3100 - Advanced financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Patty McNicholas (First semester)
Dr Richard Pucci (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Patty McNicholas (First semester)
Dr Richard Pucci (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACC2100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACB3050, AFF3491, ACF3491, AFG3040, ACG3040, AFC3120, ACC3120, AFG3050, ACG3050, AFW3040, ACW3040Not offered in 2018, AFW3050, ACW3050Not offered in 2018, ACF3200.

Synopsis

This unit explores advanced financial accounting issues, building on knowledge and skills gained in earlier units in financial accounting. A range of theories used to assess accounting decisions, reporting practices and regulation are examined. The unit focuses on a number of contemporary accounting issues including: measurement, intangible assets, financial instruments, foreign currency transactions and integrated reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine contemporary financial accounting issues
  2. apply a range of theories of accounting to explain accounting practices and appreciate the judgements, estimations and assumptions influencing accounting numbers
  3. critically assess and appreciate changing influences in standard setting and regulatory requirements
  4. apply judgement, communication and problem solving skills to deal with advanced financial accounting issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACC3200 - Management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ahmad Sujan (First semester)
Dr Carly Moulang (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACC2200 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACC3131, AFC3131, ACF3431, AFF3431, ACB3021, AFW3021, ACW3021Not offered in 2018, AFG3021, ACG3021, ACF3200

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the provision and use of management accounting information for management planning and control in organisations. Technical and behavioural issues related to budgeting, variance analysis, performance measurement, and value chain management are considered.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply management accounting techniques to enable managers to measure and enhance organisational performance
  2. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of management accounting systems
  3. critically evaluate management accounting systems in terms of their behavioural implications
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills to indivudual and/or group activities to demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit.
  5. enhance your ability to work effectively in a group.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACC3600 - Auditing and assurance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Soon-Yeow Phang (First semester)
Dr Ashna Prasad (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Soon Yeow Phang (First semester)
Dr Ashna Prasad (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACC2100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACF3631, AFF2631, ACC3160, AFC3160, ACB3041, AFW3041, ACW3041, AFG3041, ACG3041, ACF3600, AFF3631.

Synopsis

This unit encompasses the nature and purpose of audit and assurance services, and the regulatory and professional environment in which they operate. Students apply professional, ethical and legal requirements stemming from the assurance framework and applicable auditing pronouncements to 'real world' scenarios.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the demand for and the limitations of audit and assurance services
  2. explain the regulatory ethical and professional requirements applicable to assurance services
  3. understand the assurance framework and apply judgement to determine audit strategy and procedures, appropriateness of evidence gathered and conclusions reached
  4. analyse the auditor's role in corporate governance with emphasis on the detection and reporting of frauds and errors
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills to resolve ethical dilemmas and professional issues faced by audit practitioners.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACC3888 - Industry-based learning period B

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Keryn Chalmers

Coordinator(s)

Professor Keryn Chalmers

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 72 credit points, including AFC2120 or ACC2120.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B2000, B2001, B2003 or associated double degree program.

Prohibitions

AFC3888

Synopsis

Over the 12 week period of full-time employment, students will be required to complete one or more specified projects. The projects will be determined by the course coordinator in consultation with the sponsor and the student undergoing the industry-based learning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. perform business tasks effectively and efficiently, both as an individual and as a team member
  2. apply technical and theoretical knowledge and skills to business tasks
  3. demonstrate an understanding of the nuances and practicalities of working within an organisation
  4. communicate perceptively and effectively with subordinates, peers and superiors
  5. apply critical thinking and compose a set of high quality reports for submission to management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF1100 - Introduction to financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Alan Serry (Caulfield)
Dr Chris Adrian (Trimester A)
Mr John Gerrand (Trimester B and C)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Alan Serry (Caulfield)
Dr Amid Khosa (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ACB1002, AFF1121, ACF1121, AFG1002, ACG1002, AFC1030, AFW1002, ACW1002, ACC1100, ACP1100.

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an introduction to financial accounting guided by the Conceptual Framework and Accounting Standards. Emphasis is placed on accounting processes, practices and policies that enable the financial statements to be prepared. Students will integrate theoretical and technical knowledge learned and exercise judgement to explore accounting issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse measurement systems and their relationship with the Accounting Conceptual Framework
  2. apply the principles of double-entry and accrual accounting
  3. describe and apply definitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, incomes and expenses as specified in the Conceptual Framework
  4. apply principles of selected Accounting Standards and prepare financial statements for business entities including service and retail organisations
  5. develop the ability to work effectively in a team and demonstrate the development of skills in research, judgement and oral communication.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF1200 - Accounting for managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Tirukumar Thiagarajah (First semester)
Ms Ellinor Allen (Second semester)
Ms Tao Tao (City)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Tirukumar Thiagarajah (First semester)
Ms Ellinor Allen (Second semester)
Mr Jim Fang (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

Students enrolled in the Bachelor of Business specialist (B20031 Bachelor of Accounting)

ACB1000, ACC1000, ACF1000, ACP1000, ACG1000, ACW1000, ACC1200, ACP1200, ACB1100, ACC1100, ACF1100, ACP1100 and ACW1100

Synopsis

This unit introduces basic accounting concepts to non-accountants. The information requirements of two main groups of information users are examined - external users such as current and potential investors and internal users such as managers. This unit provides an introduction to the structure, meaning, analysis and interpretation of financial statements, in addition to exploring financial issues confronting managers, such as cost and performance measurement and budgeting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of various forms of business organisation
  2. apply financial and management accounting principles in the preparation of financial statements
  3. measure and interpret information relating to financial performance, financial position, liquidity and risk indicators of businesses
  4. measure and interpret financial and non-financial information for managers to use in planning, decision making and control
  5. develop the ability to work effectively in a team and demonstrate the development of judgement, and skills in problem solving, critical thinking and analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF2100 - Financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sunyoung Kim (First semester)
Dr Dharmendra Naidu (Second semester)
Dr Lisa Powell (City)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sunyoung Kim (First semester)
Dr Dharmendra Naidu (Second semester)
Mr Steven Burch (Trimester A and B)
Mrs Robyn Dyt (Trimester C)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACB2491, AFF2491, ACF2491, AFG2491, ACG2491, AFW2491, ACW2491, ACC2120, AFC2120, ACC2100.

Synopsis

This unit examines financial accounting issues associated with the operation of corporate structures. Topics include financial reporting requirements, financing company operations, business combinations, the nature of corporate groups, the preparation of consolidated financial statements and financial statement analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the regulation of companies and the content of company financial reports
  2. critically examine current issues and disclosure requirements in financial reporting
  3. apply accounting standards and the conceptual framework in the preparation and presentation of financial reports for consolidated entities
  4. demonstrate accounting knowledge in areas such as company operations, taxation, property, plant and equipment, acquisitions, group accounting and financial statement analysis
  5. apply critical thinking, research, problem solving and written and oral communication skills to demonstrate the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF2200 - Introduction to management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Prabanga Thoradeniya (First semester, Trimester A)
Dr Aleksandra Pop-Vasileva (Second semester, Trimester B)
Ms Chenlan Song (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Prabanga Thoradeniya (First semester)
Dr Aleksandra Pop-Vasileva (Second semester)
Dr Amid Khosa (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACB2020, AFC2131, ACC2131, AFG2020, ACG2020, AFW2020, ACW2020Not offered in 2018, AFF2391, ACF2391, ACC2200.

Synopsis

This introductory management accounting unit focuses on the types of cost information that can be produced to assist managers and other employees within organisations in planning and control, and in decision-making. Topics include: costs and cost behaviour, product costing, cost allocation techniques, cost-volume-profit analysis, and the use of cost information for management decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. classify costs dependent on the context and purpose of related decisions
  2. analyse cost behaviour and estimate costs
  3. design, use and evaluate costing systems
  4. analyse and use cost information relevant to decision-making
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills to individual and/or group activities to demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF2400 - Accounting information systems

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Edward Tello (Caulfield)
Dr Kristian Rotaru (Trimester A)
Dr Daisy Seng (Trimester B)
Dr Andrzej Ceglowski (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Edward Tello (Caulfield)
Mrs Merideth Guy (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACB2851, ACC2851, ACF2851, ACG2851, ACP2851, ACW2851, BUS1060, BUS3030, AFF2851, AFC2851, AFW2851, AFP2851, ACC2400.

Synopsis

At the core of Accounting Information Systems is the idea that accountants must understand the core business processes that underpin the business activities in an organisation and generate transaction data. Thus, the objective of this unit is to provide students with a broad introduction to the core business processes.

Further, given the role technology plays in accounting, with many accounting systems being computerised, other topics covered include: how hardware, software and human processes turn data into useful financial and non-financial information for decision making, methods for documenting and analysing business processes, principles of effective spreadsheet design, systems development and maintenance, and the need to understand internal controls in order to ensure (information and other) resources remain secure from losses through both inadvertent and malicious actions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role of business processes and the use accounting information systems have in capturing and managing information which supports the needs of stakeholders
  2. analyse and evaluate the design of business processes and accounting information systems
  3. explain the importance of internal controls and recommend internal controls that cover key business processes and which support the achievement of goals
  4. synthesise design principles to develop financial models that assist in decision making
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills to analyse, evaluate and interpret business processes and the accounting data that is generated.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF3100 - Advanced financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Patty McNicholas (First semester)
Mr Richard Pucci (Second semester)
Dr Lisa Powell (Trimester A)
Ms Chenlan Song (Trimester B and C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Patty McNicholas (First semester)
Mr Richard Pucci (Second semester)
Mr Steven Burch (Trimester A and B)
Dr Amid Khosa (Trimester C)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF2100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACB3050, AFF3491, ACF3491, AFG3040, ACG3040, AFC3120, ACC3120, AFG3050, ACG3050, AFW3040, ACW3040Not offered in 2018, AFW3050, ACW3050Not offered in 2018, ACC3200

Synopsis

This unit explores advanced financial accounting issues, building on knowledge and skills gained in earlier units in financial accounting. A range of theories used to assess accounting decisions, reporting practices and regulation are examined. The unit focuses on a number of contemporary accounting issues including: measurement, intangible assets, financial instruments, foreign currency transactions and integrated reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine contemporary financial accounting issues
  2. apply a range of theories of accounting to explain accounting practices and appreciate the judgements, estimation and assumptions influencing accounting numbers
  3. critically assess and appreciate changing influences in standard setting and regulatory requirements
  4. apply judgement, communication and problem solving skills to deal with advanced financial accounting issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF3200 - Management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ahmad Sujan (First semester, Trimester A)
Dr Carly Moulang (Second semester)
Ms Chenlan Song (Trimester B and C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ahmad Sujan (First semester)
Dr Carly Moulang (Second semester)
Mrs Robyn Dyt (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF2200 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACC3131, AFC3131, ACF3431, AFF3431, ACB3021, AFW3021, ACW3021Not offered in 2018, AFG3021, ACG3021, ACC3200

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the provision and use of management accounting information for management planning and control in organisations. Technical and behavioural issues related to budgeting, variance analysis, performance measurement, and value chain management are considered.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply management accounting techniques to enable managers to measure and enhance organisational performance
  2. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of management accounting systems
  3. critically evaluate management accounting systems in terms of their behavioural implications
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills to individual and/or group activities to demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit
  5. enhance your ability to work effectively in a group.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF3600 - Auditing and assurance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Soon-Yeow Phang (First semester)
Dr Ashna Prasad (Second semester)
Dr Lisa Powell (City)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Soon-Yeow Phang (First semester)
Dr Ashna Prasad (Second semester)
Mrs Robyn Dyt (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF2100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACF3631, AFF2631, ACC3160, AFC3160, ACB3041, AFW3041, ACW3041, AFG3041, ACG3041, ACC3600

Synopsis

This unit encompasses the nature and purpose of audit and assurance services, and the regulatory and professional environment in which they operate. Students apply professional, ethical and legal requirements stemming from the assurance framework and applicable auditing pronouncements to 'real world' scenarios.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the demand for and the limitations of audit and assurance services
  2. explain the regulatory ethical and professional requirements applicable to assurance services
  3. understand the assurance framework and apply judgement to determine audit strategy and procedures, appropriateness of evidence gathered and conclusions reached
  4. analyse the auditor's role in corporate governance with emphasis on the detection and reporting of frauds and errors
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills to resolve ethical dilemmas and professional issues faced by audit practitioners.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACF3900 - Global issues in accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Nicholas McGuigan

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Nicholas McGuigan

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF1100, ACF2100, ACF2200, ACF2400 and ACF3200.

Co-requisites

ACF3100 and ACF3600

Synopsis

This capstone unit integrates prior learning gained throughout the Bachelor of Accounting course and prepares students for transition to a professional career and for undertaking postgraduate studies. Students will be required to analyse, synthesise, critically evaluate, and apply knowledge and skills acquired over the course of their studies to real-world scenarios. Students will also be required to reflect on the role of accounting in organisations and society more generally, and will develop professional judgement, as well as the key skills that are expected of accountants.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse, synthesise and critically evaluate the effect of accounting policies, regulatory requirements and other external factors on organisational performance
  2. analyse business models and evaluate the drivers of competitive advantage and value creation in various organisational settings, including their impact on various stakeholders
  3. appraise the role of accounting and accountants in strategy formulation and implementation, as well as in decision-making
  4. demonstrate the ability to report, interpret and communicate effectively accounting advice and ideas, through written reports and oral presentations, at a level required for a career in accounting and business
  5. demonstrate a capacity to work independently, to self-manage, and lead and participate in teams.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS1000 - Principles of accounting and finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Adel du Plessis (First semester)
Ms Karen Odendaal (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

AFC1000, ACB1000, ACC1000, ACW1000, AFC1021, AFC1022, AFF1000, ACF1000, AFF1110, AFG1000, ACG1000, AFP1000, ACP1000, AFW1001, AFW1000.

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to basic concepts in accounting and finance and the application of these concepts for decision-making by a wide range of potential users (e.g. shareholders, investment analysts, lenders, managers etc.). This unit should benefit students who wish to specialise in accounting and finance, and will also be of value to students whose primary interest lies elsewhere in the field of business. On completion, students should have a clear understanding of the accounting process and the language of accounting to enable communication with an accounting professional, understand the relevance of accounting information for informed decision-making by a wide range of potential users, and have the ability to analyse and interpret accounting information.

Topics covered include the accounting equation, general purpose financial statements, cash and accrual accounting, balance day adjustments, financial statement analysis, interpreting information for managers to use in planning, decision making and control, and an introduction to finance, financial mathematics and investments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the elements of financial statements, apply double entry recording and prepare basic financial statements
  2. analyse and interpret financial statements and explain their use for decision making
  3. prepare and interpret information (financial and non-financial) for managers to use in planning, decision making and control
  4. describe basic finance concepts and apply financial mathematics to investment decisions
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with introductory accounting and finance principles and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in ACS1000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS1002 - Introduction to financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Adel du Plessis (First semester)
Ms Karen Odendaal (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Term 1 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACS1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC1030, ACC1030, AFF1121, ACF1121, ACB1002, AFG1002, ACG1002, ACW1002, AFW1002.

Synopsis

This unit will cover various aspects of financial accounting and builds on the principles introduced in AFS1000/AFW1000/ACW1000. Aspects associated with transaction reporting and the preparation of financial statements investigated include: the recording of inventory in a retail context, the use of control accounts, the role of specialised journals, a range of balance day-adjustments, reversing entries and account reconstruction. The unit also focuses on internal control procedures. The definition, recognition and disclosure criteria of financial statement elements are explored, as well as the cost and fair value measurement of various financial statement elements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. account for the recording and reporting of inventory, applying the periodic and perpetual method as per issues raised in AASB 102/IAS 102. Prepare and complete balance day adjustments, closing entries and internal control systems to allow all final statements and bank reconciliations to be completed
  2. apply the principles of double entry according to the reconstruction of accounts
  3. demonstrate how the regulatory environment effects accounting statements in the context of a range of organisational forms
  4. apply the definition and recognition criteria for elements of financial statements as per the Framework and specific international financial reporting standards, and consider accounting and accountability issues that arise from different measurement methods
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACS1002.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS2700 - Business ethics, corporate governance and professional conduct

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Michelle Vermeulen (First semester)
Ms Adel du Plessis (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACS1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW2700

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to ethical issues in business, with a specific focus on the accounting profession. The unit addresses four areas of ethics and business: an introduction to ethical theories and applied ethics, including the nature of ethics and ethical decision-making; an overview of business ethics and its relationship with corporate governance and social responsibility; an understanding of how ethics affects businesses, organisations and professions; The Code of Professional Conduct in the accountancy profession.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the ethical dimension of individual and social life in the context of cultural diversity
  2. define and explain selected ethical theories and their relevance to business and professional ethical issues
  3. apply an ethical and corporate governance perspective to organisational and management issues
  4. explain the nature of professionalism
  5. be able to use ethical knowledge and theory to make decisions in relation to case studies
  6. describe the purpose, structure and contents of selected codes of conduct from business and professions, particularly the accounting profession and apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with ethics in business and the accounting profession and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACS2700.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS2730 - Financial accounting A

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Adrian Pilley

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACS1002 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW2710, ACW2710, AFS2730

Synopsis

This unit covers various aspects of financial accounting and builds on the principles introduced in AFW1002/ACW1002. The unit reviews and further analyses the Conceptual Framework and Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements, with a focus on its application to specific IFRS. This unit introduces IFRS topics, such as revenue recognition; provisions and contingent liabilities/assets; events after the reporting period; accounting policies, estimates and errors; and borrowing costs. The unit further explores the recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements for various categories of assets including accounting for: inventories; property, plant and equipment; impairment of assets; intangible assets; investment property; and non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and understand the requirements of the financial reporting and regulatory environment, including the internationalisation of accounting practices and the underlying theory supporting the accounting treatment in the application of the IFRS requirements
  2. discuss the key aspects of the Conceptual Framework relating to the definitions and recognition criteria of the elements, as applied to the various spectrum of accounting topics
  3. apply IFRS requirements to the accounting for revenue recognition, provisions and contingent liabilities/assets, events after the reporting period, accounting policies, estimates and errors and borrowing costs
  4. apply IFRS recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements to the accounting for various asset topics including inventories; property, plant and equipment; impairment of assets; intangible assets; investment property; and non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACS2730.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS2740 - Financial accounting B

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Adrian Pilley

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

ACS2730 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW2042, AFW2720, AFW3004, AFS2740

Synopsis

The unit covers various aspects of financial accounting and builds on the principles introduced in prior financial accounting units. It provides a detailed examination of applying IFRS with the focus on accounting for income taxes, earnings per share and the preparation and presentation of the statement of cash flows. The unit also introduces accounting principles governing group accounts and the preparation of group statements. Students are also exposed to using commercial accounting software to prepare accounting records in accordance with the IFRS covered in this and prior units.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and evaluate how entities apply the IFRS topics dealt with in this unit in their annual financial reporting, including the recognition, measurement, disclosure and presentation of these topics
  2. evaluate and apply the IFRS on earnings per share and accounting for income taxes
  3. prepare a statement of cash flows in conformity with IFRS
  4. explain and apply the basic principles of accounting for group transactions, including business combinations and intracompany transactions, and the preparation of group financial statements
  5. demonstrate proficiency in the use of a commercial accounting software package to enter and process accounting data according to selected IFRS and to analyse and interpret the resulting accounting information
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACS2740.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS2760 - Auditing A

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Michelle Vermeulen (First semester)
Ms Adel du Plessis (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACS1000, ACS1002 and ACS2700 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit introduces auditing covering the responsibilities, functions and qualities of the auditor. The unit reviews the audit process from planning to the completion of the audit and includes the going concern concept; fraud and error; audit evidence; engagement and planning; internal controls and substantive procedures; completion of the audit and special audit investigations. The tests of control and substantive tests performed on the following business cycles are also included: revenue and receipts; acquisitions and payments; inventory and production; payroll and personnel.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the general principles of auditing, the responsibilities, functions and qualities of the auditor and illustrate knowledge of a proper background to auditing in a simulated practical scenario
  2. explain and describe the audit process from planning to the completion of the audit, assess audit risk and determine materiality
  3. describe all the relevant issues regarding the going concern concept and reliance on other parties, and apply this knowledge to various simulated practical situations/in various audits
  4. describe and examine internal controls in the context of external auditing, and apply this knowledge to simulated practical situations and to make recommendations in that regard
  5. apply tests of control and substantive testing to the business cycles
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with auditing and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment ask the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in ACS2760.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS2770 - Cost and management accounting A

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Magda Odendaal

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACS1002 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW2020, ACW2020Not offered in 2018 or AFS2770

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to cost and management accounting. Topics include basic terms and concepts, classification and behaviour of costs, recording product cost transactions for manufacturing firms, process costing, overhead costs, cost-volume-profit analysis, standard costing, spoilage and waste, apportioning joint costs for multiple products, activity-based costing, pricing and product mix decisions, risk and uncertainty and information for management decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe cost behaviour under different assumptions
  2. compare systems designed to provide relevant and timely information to managers for resource management and allocation decisions
  3. apply conventional and contemporary cost management techniques used in manufacturing and service industries
  4. explain the benefits and limitations of contemporary cost management techniques
  5. identify aspects broader than only financial aspects (such as environmental, social, economic and governance) in decision making
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with cost information for decision making and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACS2770.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS3730 - Financial accounting C

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Karen Odendaal

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACS2740 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW2042, AFW3004, AFW3730, AFS3730

Synopsis

The unit covers various aspects of financial accounting and builds on the principles introduced in prior financial accounting units. It provides a detailed examination and/or more detailed exploration (than AFS2730/ACS2730 or AFS2740/ACS2740) of applying reporting standards (IFRS) in a financial reporting environment, with the focus on conceptual framework; preparation and presentation of financial statements; provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets; revenue recognition; income taxes (including deferred tax); leases, non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations; the effects of changes in foreign exchange rates and hedging; employee benefits; share-based payments; financial instruments; and earnings per share.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the conceptual framework with regards to the objective of general purpose financial reporting; the specific information needs of users, as well as the general information needs of other users; the qualitative characteristics and underlying assumption of useful financial information; the appropriate definitions of elements and their recognition criteria
  2. discuss the key aspects of the conceptual framework (as described in objective 1) as applied to the preparation and presentation of financial statements, as well as the various spectrum of accounting topics dealt with in this unit
  3. discuss, apply, calculate and explain the detailed requirements relating to various IFRS topics, including recognition, measurement, disclosure and presentation of these topics: provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets; revenue recognition; income taxes (including deferred tax); leases, non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations; the effects of changes in foreign exchange rates and hedging; employee benefits; share-based payments; financial instruments; and earnings per share
  4. identify, discuss and apply the detailed requirements of the various IFRS topics included in this unit to integrated accounting case studies and practical scenarios, in order to identify and solve all the related issues regarding a variety of IFRS problems included in one scenario
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial according and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACS3730.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS3740 - Financial accounting D

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Karen Odendaal

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

ACS3730 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW3740, AFS3740, AFW3006

Synopsis

The unit focuses on the preparation and presentation of group financial statements in accordance with the requirements of IFRS and the regulatory environment. In doing so, it builds on the principles of group accounting introduced in AFS2740/ACS2740. The unit explores: factors to be considered when assessing control of one entity by another; accounting for business combinations, acquisition of equity interests in another entity, wholly or partly, at acquisition and subsequent to acquisition; accounting for intragroup transactions and dividends, at-acquisition fair value adjustments, preference shares and impairment of goodwill. Consolidation is also applied to accounting for complex groups and interim acquisitions. The unit also covers the application of IFRS to accounting for associates and joint arrangements. In preparation of group accounts, the unit requires the appropriate application of IFRS topics (as covered in AFS3730/ACS3730) in the group financial statements.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss and apply the practical application of IFRS topics, as covered in prior financial accounting units, to the financial reporting of entities, both in individual and group financial statements
  2. discuss the theory and background to group structures and preparing group financial statements
  3. prepare and assess group financial statements for wholly-owned and partly-owned subsidiaries, taking into account the effects of intragroup transactions, dividends, preferences shares, interim acquisitions and complex groups
  4. discuss and apply the principles of accounting for associates and joint arrangements
  5. discuss and apply the basic principles of changes in ownership interests of group entities
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with group statements and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACS3740.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS3750 - Cost and management accounting B

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Magda Odendaal

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACS2770 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW3750, AFS3750, AFW3007

Synopsis

This unit builds upon the understanding, knowledge and skills developed in AFS2770/ACS2770 (Cost and management accounting A). The unit covers the theory, background and application of managerial decision making in respect of the following different types of decision making techniques: advanced cost-volume-profit analysis and sensitivity analysis, measuring relevant cost and revenues for decision making, complex activity based costing and management, advanced pricing decisions and profitability analysis, budgeting, advanced standard costing variance calculations, analysis and interpretation, performance management, cost estimation and cost behaviour and scarce resources.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain and discuss the role that management accounting information plays in organisations
  2. review critically, analyse, consolidate and synthesise knowledge of advanced quantification techniques to provide information for management decision-making and give advice
  3. demonstrate proficiency in applying the management accounting related instruments, techniques and procedures covered to theoretical and practical applications and interpret the results and advice accordingly
  4. identify, evaluate and critically review aspects broader than only financial aspects (such as environmental, social, economic and governance) in management decision making
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with management information and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACS3750.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS3765 - Auditing C

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Michelle Vermeulan

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACS2700, ACS2760, ACS3770, BTS2201 and FIT1003 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit focuses on computer information systems (CIS) and business cycles. The unit introduces the management of computer information systems (CIS) with a particular focus on the internal controls that should be present in a CIS environment and would be of interest to the external auditor. The important concepts and procedures to use and audit financial databases and CIS are addressed. The download of financial data and its manipulation in order to verify and audit it, as well as the performance of computer assisted auditing techniques (CAATs) on this data are examined in this unit. The influence of the internet and e-commerce on the business and auditing environments, as well as applicable legislation are also covered. In addition, this unit contains demonstrations of using spreadsheets and selected audit software often used by accountants and auditors in practice. The unit further covers business activities namely revenue and receipts, bank and cash, purchases and payments, inventory and production, payroll and personnel, and finance and investment. The unit concludes by addressing going concern, and reliance on other parties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe computer security and controls (general and application), and apply that knowledge in order to assess the relevant audit risks and to make recommendations, as an external auditor, for the improvement of security and controls in simulated simple and advanced CIS environments and networks
  2. design audit procedures (both tests of control and substantive) including the use of computer assisted audit techniques (CAATs) in response to the risk assessment in simulated practical scenarios for all business processes.
  3. explain the influence of the internet and e-commerce on the business and auditing environments, including relevant legislation
  4. explain the use of the computer practically as a business, accounting and auditing tool with reference to spreadsheet analysis software, CAATs software and automated audit working papers in selected case studies
  5. describe how auditors identify and assess going concern problems
  6. describe the transaction flow within a cycle, including a reference to the documents and people involved
  7. identify the instances where an auditor will find it effective and efficient to engage other parties to gather evidence and describe the procedures the auditor needs to perform on the work of the other parties.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACS3770 - Auditing B

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Michelle Vermeulen

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACS2700, ACS2760 and BTS2201 or equivalent.

Synopsis

The application of South African regulations on the audit profession and the external auditor, including corporate governance, is dealt with extensively in this unit. In addition to exploring the regulations applicable to external auditors the unit also covers professional conduct in terms of the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct. The unit addresses the audit process (preliminary engagement activities, planning, responding to assessed risk and reporting). The International Standards on Auditing (ISAs) are also covered.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate compliance with the regulations applicable to external auditors to identify violations and to make relevant recommendations
  2. assess corporate governance and recommend improvements towards best practices
  3. evaluate compliance with the SAICA Code of Professional Conduct applicable to external auditors to identify violations and make relevant recommendations
  4. describe the procedures within the audit process, for preliminary engagement activities, planning, responding to assessed risk and evaluating, concluding and reporting
  5. apply the International Standards on Auditing (ISAs) in simulated practical scenarios
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with auditing and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACS3770.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW1100 - Introduction to financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lee Mei Yee

Coordinator(s)

Dr Lee Mei Yee

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ACF1000, ACB1002, AFG1002, ACG1002, ACW1002, AFW1002, AFC1030, ACC1100, ACP1100, ACF1121, AFF1121

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an introduction to financial accounting guided by the Conceptual Framework and Accounting Standards. Emphasis is placed on accounting processes, practices and policies that enable the financial statements to be prepared. Students will integrate theoretical and technical knowledge learned and exercise judgement to explore accounting issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse measurement systems and their relationship with the accounting Conceptual Framework
  2. apply the principles of double-entry and accrual accounting
  3. describe and apply definitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, incomes and expenses as specified in the Conceptual Framework
  4. apply principles of selected Accounting Standards and prepare financial statements for business entities including service and retail organisations
  5. develop the ability to work effectively in a team; and demonstrate the development of skills in research, judgement and oral communication.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW1200 - Accounting for managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sa'Adiah Hj. Munir

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sa'Adiah Hj. Munir

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ACB1000, ACC1000, ACF1000, ACG1000, ACP1000, ACW1000, ACC1200, ACF1200, ACP1200

Synopsis

This unit introduces basic accounting concepts to non-accountants. The information requirements of two main groups of information users are examined. External users such as current and potential investors and internal users such as managers. This unit provides an introduction to the structure, meaning, analysis and interpretation of financial statements, in addition to exploring financial issues confronting managers, such as cost and performance measurement and budgeting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of various forms of business organisation
  2. apply financial and management accounting principles in the preparation of financial statements
  3. measure and interpret information relating to financial performance, financial position, liquidity and risk indicators of businesses
  4. measure and interpret financial and non-financial information for managers to use in planning, decision making and control
  5. develop the ability to work effectively in a team and demonstrate the development of judgement, and skills in problem solving, critical thinking and analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW2020 - Cost information for decision making

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Siew Eu-Gene

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units: ACW1100, ACW1002 or AFW1002 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ACC2131, AFC2131, ACF2391, AFF2391, ACB2020, ACG2020, AFG2020, AFW2020, AFS2770, ACC2200, ACF2200

Synopsis

Introduction to management accounting. Topics include: basic terms and concepts, classification and behaviour of costs, recording product cost transactions for manufacturing firms, joint and by-product spoilage and waste, apportioning joint costs for multiple products, activity-based costing and information for management decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe cost behaviour under different assumptions
  2. compare systems designed to provide relevant and timely information to managers for resource management and allocation decisions
  3. apply conventional and contemporary cost management techniques used in manufacturing and service industries
  4. explain the benefits and limitations of contemporary cost management techniques
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with cost information for decision making and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACW2020.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW2391 - Introduction to management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Puspavathy Rassiah (First semester)
Ms Aniza Zainol (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Puspavathy Rassiah (First semester)
Ms Aniza Zainol (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACW1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC2131, ACC2131, AFF2391, ACF2391, ACB2020, AFG2020, ACG2020, AFW2020, AFS2770, ACC2200, ACF2200

Synopsis

This introductory management accounting unit focuses on the types of cost information that can be produced to assist managers and other employees within organisations in planning and control, and in decision-making. Topics include: costs and cost behaviour, product costing, cost allocation techniques, cost-volume-profit analysis, and the use of cost information for management decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. classify costs dependent on the context and purpose of related decisions
  2. analyse cost behaviour and estimate costs
  3. design, use and evaluate costing systems
  4. analyse and use cost information relevant to decision-making
  5. develop written communication skills; and apply critical thinking and problem solving skills to demonstrate the acquisition of a comprehensive knowledge of the topics covered in ACW2391.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW2491 - Financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Foo Yee Boon (First semester)
Dr Norita Mohd Nasir (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Foo Yee Boon (First semester)
Dr Norita Mohd Nasir (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACW1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACC2120, AFC2120, ACF2491, AFF2491, AFG2491, ACG2491, AFW2491, ACC2100, ACF2100

Synopsis

This unit covers International Financial Reporting Standards applicable to reporting entities including an analysis of significant accounting standards, professional reporting requirements and stock exchange requirements. Accounting for corporate groups and issues in financial reporting are also explored.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit, students should be able to:

  1. explain the nature and regulation of companies
  2. apply accounting standards and the framework in the preparation and presentation of financial statements for both single and consolidated entities
  3. demonstrate accounting knowledge in areas such as company operations, taxation, property, plant and equipment (acquisition and impairment), and group accounting
  4. examine contemporary financial accounting issues
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with company reporting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACW2491.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW2522 - Accounting for Islamic financial institutions

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have completed: ACW1000 or AFW1000 or ACW1100 or ACW1200 AND AFW1310 or BFW1310

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the accounting framework, practices and standards of Islamic banks and Islamic financial institutions. The accounting treatment, measurement and disclosures of various financing transactions are explained. Related areas such as Zakat for Islamic banks will also be discussed. The unit will make references to Accounting and Auditing Organization of Islamic Financial Institutions (AAOIFI) standards and to Malaysian Accounting Standards Board (MASB) standards for Islamic financial institutions.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of, and analyse and interpret the annual reports of Islamic banks and differentiate that from conventional banks' annual reports
  2. understand the functions and roles of standard setters such as AAOIFI, the Central Bank (BNM) and MASB
  3. demonstrate an understanding of the need for and rationale of Islamic accounting and accounting for Islamic banks
  4. compare and contrast differences between Islamic accounting and conventional accounting
  5. identify the objectives, reports and disclosure requirements in accounting for Islamic financial institutions
  6. demonstrate the application of accounting principles in the recording, classification, analysis and reporting of various Islamic financial transactions based on the relevant standards
  7. critically appraise accounting and reporting practices of local and international Islamic banks.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30% + Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW2851 - Accounting information systems and financial modelling

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Siew Eu-Gene

Coordinator(s)

Dr Siew Eu-Gene

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACW1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC2160, AFF2051, AFW2051, AFC2851, ACC2851, AFF2851, ACF2851, AFG2851, ACG2851, AFP2851, ACP2851, AFW2851, ACC2400, ACF2400, BUS1060, BUS3030

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is two-fold. First, the unit provides students with a broad introduction to accounting information systems and the role technology plays in accounting. The focus will be on an introduction to: enterprise systems; database management; documentation methods; internal controls; and the core business processes found in organisations. Second, the unit focuses on corporate modelling theory; models as decision support tools; types and uses of models; benefits and limitations of models; effective spreadsheet design; auditing spreadsheet models and development of various models using an industry standard spreadsheet.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role of accounting information systems in analysing and providing decision support to managers
  2. explain the design of accounting information systems and financial models
  3. develop financial models to assist in decision making
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with accounting information systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACW2851.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW3021 - Performance measurement and control

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Pak Mei Sen

Coordinator(s)

Ms Pak Mei Sen

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units: ACW2020Not offered in 2018 or AFW2020 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ACC3131, AFC3131, ACF3431, AFF3431, ACB3021, AFG3021, ACG3021, AFW3021, ACC3200, ACF3200

Synopsis

Topics include the budget planning process including master budget preparation, budgeting standard costs and variance analysis, responsibility accounting, management by objectives and non-financial performance measurement, divisional performance, transfer pricing issues, program budgeting and other approaches, capital budgeting, strategic planning and control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply traditional and contemporary performance measurement and control techniques to enable managers to measure and enhance organisational performance
  2. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of performance measurement and control systems
  3. explain how behavioural implications are crucial for the effective design of performance measurement and control systems
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with performance measurement and control and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACW3021.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW3040 - Accounting theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ananda Samudhram

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFG2491, ACG2491, ACW2491, or AFW2491 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3120, ACC3120, AFF3491, ACF3491, AFG3040, ACG3040, AFW3040

Synopsis

Topics include the nature of theory and scientific method by considering two basic methods of enquiry: induction and deduction; the emergence of general descriptive and prescriptive accounting theories; the application of measurement theories; the regulation of financial accounting and the development of international accounting as they relate to the conceptual framework; and summarising and identifying the assumptions underlying accounting concepts by critiquing the financial statements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply a range of accounting theories and concepts to explain financial accounting and reporting practices
  2. critically review conventional accounting practice
  3. compare and contrast alternative accounting models
  4. analyse ethical principles and demonstrate their application in the field of business
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with accounting theory and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACW3040.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30% + Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW3041 - Auditing and assurance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Shyamala Dhoraisingham Samuel

Coordinator(s)

Ms Shyamala Dhoraisingham Samuel

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACW2491 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC3160, ACC3160, AFF3631, ACF3631, ACB3041, AFG3041, ACG3041, AFW3041, ACC3600, ACF3600

Synopsis

Overview of auditing, the auditor's legal liabilities, audit process and evidence, the concepts of materiality and risks, study and evaluation of internal control, EDP auditing, audit sampling techniques, the test of transactions cycles and the verification of account balances, auditors reports, and internal and operational auditing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the role, limitations and demand for audits in modern corporate society including the auditor's professional, ethical and legal obligations
  2. examine the auditor's role in corporate governance with particular emphasis on the detection and reporting of fraud and error
  3. describe the assurance framework, and apply planning processes and evidence gathering procedures that are used by auditors to form an audit opinion
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with auditing and assurance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACW3041.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW3050 - Advanced financial accounting theory and issues

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Jeyanthi Selvarajah

Coordinator(s)

Ms Jeyanthi Selvarajah

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed either ACW2491 or AFW2491 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3120, ACC3120, AFF3491, ACF3491, AFG3050, ACG3050, AFW3050, ACB3050, ACC3100, ACF3100

Synopsis

Topics covered by this unit include: Australian accounting environment, theories of financial accounting, accounting for leases; accounting for employee benefits; accounting for financial instruments; cash flow reporting; public sector and agriculture accounting, segment reporting; accounting for EPS; accounting for extractive industries; foreign currency translation; and social and environmental reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse how standard setting procedures and theories of regulation are formulated and their contribution to financial reporting nationally and globally
  2. apply accounting standards and the conceptual framework in the preparation and presentation of financial statements
  3. develop critical skills in written communication and problem analysis through the completion of a comprehensive assignment exercise and/or essay(s)
  4. develop an ability to work independently and to participate in group discussions with participants from diverse backgrounds
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACW3050.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW3431 - Management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Pak Mei Sen (First semester)
Dr Puspavathy Rassiah (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Pak Mei Sen (First semester)
Dr Puspavathy Rassiah (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACW2391 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC3131, ACC3131, AFF3431, ACF3431, ACB3021, AFG3021, ACG3021, AFW3021, ACC3200, ACF3200

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the provision and use of management accounting information for management planning and control in organisations. Technical and behavioural issues related to budgeting, variance analysis, performance measurement, and value chain management are considered.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply management accounting techniques to enable managers to measure and enhance organisational performance
  2. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of management accounting systems
  3. evaluate management accounting systems in terms of their behavioural implications
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills to demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in ACW3431.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACW3491 - Advanced financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Selvarajah Jeyanthi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Selvarajah Jeyanthi

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACW2491 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC3120, ACC3120, AFF3491, AFG3491, AFG3050, ACG3050, AFW3050, ACB3050, ACC3100, ACF3100

Synopsis

This unit covers advanced practical accounting issues and the recommended accounting treatment prescribed by the underlying theories and conceptual framework of accounting. The extended knowledge of the regulatory bodies and the views of the accounting profession are blended into the contents of the unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse how standard setting procedures and theories of regulation are formulated and their contribution to financial reporting globally
  2. apply the definition and recognition criteria for elements of financial statements and examine the associated issues
  3. apply accounting standards and the conceptual framework in the preparation and presentation of financial statements and the capital market
  4. examine contemporary financial accounting issues
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in dealing with advanced reporting issues and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACW3491.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX2900 - Accounting for sustainability

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Nicholas McGuigan

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Nicholas McGuigan

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACC1200 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Business is facing increased scrutiny with respect to the sustainability implications of its operations. Against this setting, companies are exploring ways in which enhancing sustainability performance creates organisational value. This unit focuses on the ways in which sustainability impacts on the core functions performed by professionals in accounting and business. It considers both external and internal reporting aspects of corporate social and environmental sustainability, and the ways in which such information can be incorporated into decisions made within the entity. The implications of such information for the assurance function are also explored.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the most common reporting frameworks used by organisations to report the sustainability implications of their operations
  2. critically evaluate the implications of government policy relating to the reporting of sustainability implications of corporate operations
  3. evaluate the factors effecting sustainability reporting by diverse organisations
  4. demonstrate an understanding of Environmental Management Systems and their implications for environmental performance measurement
  5. evaluate the factors effecting assurance of sustainability reports.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX3150 - Financial analysis and valuation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anthony Ng (First semester)
Mr Brett Lombardi (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Anthony Ng (First semester)
Mr Brett Lombardi (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC2140 and ACC2100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC3230, AFC3234, ACC3230.

Synopsis

This unit explores a range of techniques used to analyse corporate financial performance and valuation of entities. These include: application and use of financial ratios and forecasting techniques, accounting-based and cash flow-based share valuation, credit analysis and financial distress prediction, equity security analysis, and analysis relating to mergers and takeovers. Both Australian and international case studies are used to provide a real-world context.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. access and extract financial information from published financial reports and databases
  2. calculate and interpret relevant financial ratios concerned with the profitability, financial structure and solvency of listed public companies
  3. apply and critically assess approaches to valuation including discounted cash flow and residual income methods
  4. apply valuation methods to contexts such as security valuation, mergers and acquisitions and credit analysis
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial analysis and valuation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX3250 - Advanced management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Carly Moulang

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACF3200 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ACF3511, AFF3511, ACC3141, AFC3141.

Synopsis

The unit aims to provide an advanced understanding of how management accounting supports organisational strategy. It extends prior management accounting knowledge, provides overarching frameworks for understanding performance management and covers topics relating to a variety of organisational settings.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate how management accounting systems can be designed to support strategy
  2. apply management accounting techniques to strategic business decisions
  3. critically assess strategic management accounting concepts and techniques
  4. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of strategic management accounting systems
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and communication skills to individual and/or group activities to demonstrate a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX3500 - International study program in accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wei Lu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Wei Lu

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students who have not passed ACF2100 or equivalent must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX3871, BFX3871, AFX3551, ACX3551.

Synopsis

This unit centres on both a conceptual and practical approach to international accounting issues with emphasis on international standard setting and compliance as viewed by regulatory and private sector preparers of accounts. Students gain a practical understanding of these issues in an international context through the overseas visitation program which forms an integral part of this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast accounting standard setting in various countries and discuss the convergence of accounting standards through an international study program
  2. develop a practical understanding and appreciation of culture in the development of national accounting regulations
  3. evaluate academic and professional papers in international accounting
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with international accounting.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4000 - Research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Matthew Hall

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6002.

Prohibitions

AFX4000

Synopsis

Introduction to a broad range of research methodology and testing procedures used in accounting research. This unit comprises an analysis of the science of research, an examination of the key elements of research in accounting, general research methodology, data issues, ethical issues, the development of research questions, hypothesis development, and the design and application of a variety of different research methods used in accounting research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the major steps in the development of a research project in accounting
  2. illustrate the key strengths and weaknesses of different accounting research designs and methods
  3. design and apply qualitative and quantitative data analysis techniques and interpret the output
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4018 - Honours research thesis

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dean Hanlon

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

AFX4000 or ACX4000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Prohibitions

AFX4018

Synopsis

Students conduct a critical review of the literature relevant to their study; derive appropriate hypotheses for testing; devise an empirical test of the hypotheses showing regard to practical problems of conducting research, ethical considerations, and principles of scientific method; conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising in the data collection; select and conduct an appropriate analysis of the data; and write a report on the project, showing due regard to relevant stylistic conventions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. implement a research proposal
  2. recognise practical problems of conducting scientific research and propose solutions
  3. complete a research dissertation
  4. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research dissertation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 432 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average seven/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4040 - Issues in accounting information systems

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Carla Wilkin

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6002.

Prohibitions

AFX4040

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to provide students with a broad introduction to the contemporary themes in research into Accounting Information Systems. The unit covers issues of research and practice in the following areas: frameworks and ontologies in information systems; decision making; process modelling; behavioural aspects concerned with the design and implementation of systems; and data management issues. Upon completion of this unit, students are expected to be able to evaluate critically the design and conduct of research, and to design their own research into issues of relevance to the accounting information systems field.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of key philosophical issues in Accounting Information Systems research, particularly the ontological foundations of the discipline
  2. articulate solutions to significant research problems using key paradigms in the Accounting Information Systems discipline
  3. critique research relating to the design and use of accounting and business information systems
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in accounting information systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4040.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4050 - Issues in auditing and assurance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Robyn Moroney

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6002.

Prohibitions

AFX4050

Synopsis

This unit considers both theoretical and professional issues relevant to the various participants to the audit process. The unit provides students with an overview of the nature of assurance and regulation of the audit profession, the economics of auditing, and the behavioural dimensions of auditing. Topics also include future directions for assurance services, fraud, internal control and corporate governance issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate and contrast research paradigms in auditing and assurance research
  2. describe and evaluate the range of methods of decision making in auditing
  3. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in auditing and assurance including audit quality, internal control, fraud and corporate governance
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in auditing and assurance and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4050.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4070 - Issues in financial accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dean Hanlon

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dean Hanlon

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6002.

Prohibitions

AFX4070

Synopsis

This unit provides an overview of research in financial accounting, including consideration of the major theoretical foundations of the financial accounting discipline and the variety of research methods employed to investigate financial accounting topics. Research related to a variety of contemporary issues in financial accounting research is examined, including the determinants and consequences of accounting policy choice and financial reporting quality.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate and contrast research paradigms and relevant theories in financial accounting research
  2. evaluate and contrast different research methods used in financial accounting research
  3. critically evaluate empirical research and develop an ability to identify major research questions in financial accounting research
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in financial accounting research and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks, acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4070.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4090 - Issues in management accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Matthew Hall

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6002.

Prohibitions

AFX4090

Synopsis

The unit provides an overview of research in management accounting, including consideration of the major theoretical foundations of the management accounting discipline and the variety of research methods employed to investigate management accounting topics. Research related to a variety of management accounting practices is examined including budgeting, performance measurement, incentives, and formal and informal methods of control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss research paradigms and relevant theories as they relate to management accounting research
  2. evaluate and contrast research paradigms and different research methods used in management accounting research
  3. critically evaluate empirical research and develop an ability to identify major research questions in management accounting research
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in management accounting research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4150 - Empirical research in analysis of financial statements

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Vic Naiker (Semester 1)
Professor Farshid Navissi (Semester 2)

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Prohibitions

AFX4150

Synopsis

This unit examines the association between financial reporting information and capital markets. Specific areas of focus include accounting-based valuation models, discussions of pricing of information risk in the context of the capital asset pricing models, expected cost of equity capital, implied cost of equity capital, cost of debt, and application of cost of capital to auditing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe accounting-based valuation methods and apply these methods to listed companies
  2. critically evaluate the role of information risk in securities pricing
  3. critically evaluate empirical research in cost of equity capital
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with the analysis of financial statements.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ACX4190 - Behavioural research in accounting

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Accounting

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Robyn Moroney

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Prohibitions

AFX4190

Synopsis

This unit considers both theoretical and professional issues relevant to the various subdisciplines of accounting. The unit provides students with an overview of behavioural research in each of the following areas: management accounting and accounting information systems, financial accounting and auditing. Students are also provided with an appreciation of some of the issues involved in the most commonly applied research methods in behavioural accounting research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in behavioural research in accounting
  2. critically evaluate recent developments in behavioural research and implications for accounting researchers/practitioners
  3. illustrate the key strengths and weaknesses in commonly applied research methods in behavioural research
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in behavioural accounting and demonstrate in individual assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by ACX4190.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEH1001 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH1002 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH1003 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH1004 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH2001 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH2002 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH2003 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH2004 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH3001 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Peking

Sri Lanka

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH3002 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Peking

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH3003 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Peking

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH3004 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Peking

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH3005 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH3006 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH4001 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH4002 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH4003 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BEH4004 - Business and economics exchange unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Unit guides

Offered

Overseas

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


BES3120 - Perspectives on global business issues

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Frances Scholtz

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed the six compulsory core units (or equivalent), four 2nd level units and two 3rd level units.

Prohibitions

BEX3120Not offered in 2018, MGS3650Not offered in 2018 and MGX3650Not offered in 2018.

Synopsis

This is an interdisciplinary capstone unit for the Bachelor of Business Science program. It aims to help students integrate the diverse discipline knowledge and skills they acquired in prior studies and apply their learning to solve business problems. Students will identify innovative solutions to problems in a simulated experiential environment from a total organisation perspective. In the unit students are expected to bring together all the essential elements of running a business including strategic planning, leadership, ethical decision making, teamwork, cause and effect relationships between functional areas (research and development, marketing, production and finance), satisfying customer demands, and competitive analysis in a simulated learning environment. More specifically, students will learn the value of 'focusing' on the strategic implementation process, understand how decisions in one part of the business impacts other parts of the business, practice decision-making as a team across all key areas of a business, use the information from balance sheets, income statements and cash flow statements to improve business decision making, analyse competitors' performance and market positioning and build core competencies within the business to take a differentiation or low cost position in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate prior knowledge gained from the degree to make business decisions
  2. critically evaluate the interrelationship of various functional areas of business taking into consideration the diversity of possible influences on the areas
  3. formulate and apply a framework for ethical decision making when dealing with an ethical dilemma in business
  4. demonstrate appropriate communication, collaboration, cooperation and related skills required to work effectively in team environments.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BES4000 - Research methodology 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mazanai Musara

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4414.

Prohibitions

BEW4000

Synopsis

This unit aims to develop students' understanding of qualitative research, with specific focus on qualitative research philosophy, qualitative research design and qualitative research methods. This unit explores topics such as: paradigmatic approaches to research; research design; negotiation of access to research sites/participants; researcher ethics; methods of qualitative data collection such as observation, interviews, focus groups and non-intrusive data collection; methods of data analysis; issues of qualitative research validity; and qualitative writing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the characteristics and usefulness of qualitative research
  2. develop a sound research design
  3. understand various matters associated with the conduct of qualitative research such as gaining access and managing ethical issues
  4. differentiate between qualitative methods of data collection and determine when each is most appropriate
  5. analyse qualitative data using a number of different analytical techniques
  6. develop an understanding of different ways in which qualitative data can be written, as well as practical skills in qualitative writing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BES4010 - Research methodology 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Alain Kaninda (First semester)
Dr Moremi Labeodan (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4414.

Prohibitions

ETW2111, ETX2111, ETX2121Not offered in 2018, BEW4010

Synopsis

An in-depth introduction to quantitative research methods. This subject is one of two that together supply the research methodology skills and knowledge necessary for students to complete an independent research project at the honours level. It provides a comprehensive coverage of quantitative research methodologies. Topics include: survey studies/correlational field studies; forms of regression; analysis of variances; discriminant analysis; factor analysis; non-parametric statistics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain comprehensive business-related research skills, including an extensive grounding in a range of quantitative research methodologies
  2. gain the necessary quantitative skills to undertake independent research
  3. develop effective report writing and communication skills
  4. have the ability to comment critically on research publications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BES4020 - Directed studies 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor HB Klopper

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4414.

Prohibitions

BEW4020

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business and commerce as a foundation to the completion of an honours project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the literature in order to develop subject matter expertise beyond the specific focus of the Honours project
  2. synthesise the literature to inform the student's research topic of choice
  3. critically evaluate academic literature and present in written and/or oral form key arguments related to the research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BES4030 - Directed studies 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Jennifer Nzonzo (First semester)
Mr Mazanai Musara (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4414.

Prohibitions

BEW4030

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business and commerce, as a foundation for the completion of an honours research project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. to analyse the literature to determine the research methodology appropriate for the chosen research project
  2. to synthesise the literature to inform the students' research method design and implementation
  3. to critically evaluate the literature and present in written and/or oral form key arguments related to the selection of methods for the research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BES4100 - Research project and report

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mazanai Musara

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BES4000 or equivalent.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 4414.

Prohibitions

BEW4100

Synopsis

Students work under the guidance of a supervisor to plan, carry out and report on an original research project that addresses significant issues in business. This research project is likely to have substantial practical outcomes or implications, and it is therefore hoped that students and supervisors will publish the work in an appropriate journal.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 576 hours per semester.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW3100 - Work placement program

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Puspavathy Rassiah

Coordinator(s)

Dr Puspavathy Rassiah

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Enrolment in this unit is not available via WES. Course director approval is required prior to enrolment and approval will be dependent upon completion of 96 credit points (including appropriate units for the area of work placement) with an overall average of 65% for all units undertaken.

Synopsis

Students will undertake approved projects for an employer, which will contribute to the organisation and facilitate the development of work place skills and application of knowledge to a practical situation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply conceptual and theoretical knowledge to practical work situations
  2. communicate effectively and appropriately with peers and superiors both verbally and in writing
  3. work effectively as part of a team
  4. undertake applied research projects in the areas of accounting, economics, management, marketing, or any area of business.

Assessment

Employer assessment: 30%, Work placement / Project report: 70%.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW3555 - Integrative business practices

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Chew Yin Teng

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Chew Yin Teng

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Successful completion of 96 credit points, inclusive of: ACW1000, BTW1042, ECW1101 or ETW1000, MGW1010 and MKW1120.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course B2026, 2224, 1941 or 3863.

Prohibitions

BEX3555Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This is an interdisciplinary capstone unit for the Bachelor of Business and Commerce program. It aims to help students integrate the diverse discipline knowledge they acquired in prior studies, deepen their understanding of topical issues related to regional or global business, and apply their learning to solve real business problems. Students will identify innovative solutions to those problems from a total organisation perspective. In the process, they will learn how to synthesise principles and theories from different business disciplines, and apply a variety of skills including critical inquiry, problem solving, communication and teamwork.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate real-life business practices and issues by integrating multiple perspectives and approaches, and identify innovative solutions to the associated business problems
  2. synthesise knowledge from multiple disciplines and identify solutions to a range of business problems
  3. articulate and present their ideas in a succinct and convincing manner.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW4000 - Research methodology 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vimala Kunchamboo (First semester)
Ms Juliana French (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vimala Kunchamboo (First semester)
Ms Juliana French (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3702, B5003 or 4414.

Synopsis

This unit aims to develop students' understanding of qualitative research, with specific focus on qualitative research philosophy, qualitative research design and qualitative research methods. This unit explores topics such as: paradigmatic approaches to research; research design; negotiation of access to research sites/participants; researcher ethics; methods of qualitative data collection such as observation, interviews, focus groups and non-intrusive data collection; methods of data analysis; issues of qualitative research validity; and qualitative writing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the characteristics and usefulness of qualitative research
  2. develop a sounds research design
  3. understand various matters associated with the conduct of qualitative research such as gaining access and managing ethical issues
  4. differentiate between qualitative methods of data collection and determine when each is most appropriate
  5. analyse qualitative data using a number of different analytical techniques
  6. develop an understanding of different ways in which qualitative data can be written, as well as practical skills in qualitative writing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW4010 - Research methodology 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Prabahkaran Narayanan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Prabahkaran Narayanan

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3702, B5003 or 4414.

Prohibitions

ETW2111, ETX2111, ETX2121Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

An in-depth introduction to quantitative research methods. This subject is one of two that together supply the research methodology skills and knowledge necessary for students to complete an independent research project at the honours level. It provides a comprehensive coverage of quantitative research methodologies. Topics include: survey studies/correlational field studies; forms of regression; analysis of variances; discriminant analysis; factor analysis; non-parametric statistics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain comprehensive business-related research skills, including an extensive grounding in a range of quantitative research methodologies
  2. gain the necessary quantitative skills to undertake independent research
  3. develop effective report writing and communication skills
  4. have the ability to comment critically on research publications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW4020 - Directed studies 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3702, B5003 or 4414.

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business and commerce as a foundation to the completion of an honours project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the literature in order to develop subject matter expertise beyond the specific focus of the Honours project
  2. synthesise the literature to inform the student's research topic of choice
  3. critically evaluate academic literature and present in written and/or oral form key arguments related to the research project.

Assessment

Assessment will be through a combination of assignments, examinations, and written reports appropriate to the selected area of study and associated activities.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW4030 - Directed studies 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3702, B5003 or 4414.

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business and commerce as a foundation to the completion of an honours research project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. to analyse the literature to determine the research methodology appropriate for the chosen research project
  2. to synthesise the literature to inform the students' research method design and implementation
  3. to critically evaluate the literature and present in written and/or oral form key arguments related to the selection of methods for the research project.

Assessment

Assignments, examinations and written reports appropriate to the selected area of study and associated activities

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEW4100 - Research project and report

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BEW4000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3702, B5003 or 4414.

Synopsis

Students work under the guidance of a supervisor to plan, carry out, and report on an original research project that addresses a significant issues in business; this research project is likely to have substantial practical outcomes or implications; as well, it is hoped that students and supervisors will publish the work in an appropriate journal.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a business or economics-related issue in the research literature which has either not been adequately researched previously or which requires replication
  2. critically review relevant academic and business research which relates to the identified issue
  3. develop a specific research proposal which has a potential contribution to the business, professional and public policy communities
  4. conduct, analyse, discuss and communicate research outcomes in written and oral form in a professional manner.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information


BEX2010 - Intermediate macroeconomics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Qingyuan Du (First semester)
Dr Siew-Ling Yew (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Qingyuan Du (First semester)
Dr Siew-Ling Yew (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis


BEX2410 - Introductory econometrics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid-Araghi

Coordinator(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid-Araghi

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the empirical analysis of relationships between economic variables. The approach is based on linear regression theory, and emphasises 'hands on' data analysis. Topics studied will include properties of least squares estimators, hypothesis testing, the choice of appropriate functional form, the use of dummy variables, issues around modelling survey data and the problems of serial correlation, heteroscedasticity and multicollinearity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and derive the properties of ordinary least squares in summation and matrix notation
  2. interpret, evaluate and apply inferential methods to multiple linear regression
  3. understand the use and implications of data scaling, functional form and dummy variables in regression modelling
  4. identify the presence of heteroscedasticity, adjust OLS standard errors and perform feasible GLS in regression models
  5. understand issues related to modelling with time-series data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX2440 - Mathematics for economics and business

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr John Stapleton

Coordinator(s)

Mr John Stapleton

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ETF2700, ECC2440.

Synopsis

This unit introduces mathematical techniques that are invaluable tools for econometrics, economics, finance, and business. Topics covered include matrix algebra, linear simultaneous equations and the LU decomposition, eigenvalues and the Schur decomposition, random vectors; optimisation, including the Lagrange multiplier method, partial differentiation, multiple integration, difference and differential equations. Some emphasis will be given to the use of computer programs for performing matrix calculations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide a practical training in basic mathematics needed for the study of econometrics
  2. examine the calculus of many variables and its application in econometrics and business statistics
  3. introduce matrix algebra
  4. provide a training in the use of mathematical software.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%


BEX2520 - Probability and statistical inference for economics and business

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Donald Poskitt

Coordinator(s)

Professor Donald Poskitt

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

An introduction to probability and statistical inference for use in economics and business. Topics covered include random variables, moments and cumulants generating function, discrete and continuous distributions, independence, jointly distributed random variables, conditional random variables, the central limit theorem, sampling distribution, properties of estimators, confidence intervals, tests of hypotheses.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand concepts of probability, statistical inference, generating functions and cumulants
  2. derive and use generating functions to evaluate moments and establish the distribution of linear combinations of independent random variables
  3. understand and apply the main methods of estimation and the main properties of estimators
  4. construct confidence intervals for unknown parameters and test hypotheses
  5. develop written, presentational and group work skills through a series of assessed essays, assignments and tutorial work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3000 - Current issues in business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Dr Kelly Benati (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Kelly Benati (Caulfield)
Ms Jacqueline O'Toole (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 96 credit points.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses: 0312, 0314, 0315, 0316, 0391, 0517, 0550, 0553, 0555, 0556, 0816, 1197, 1333, 1334, 1337, 1339, 2601, 2902, 3154, 3158, 3806, 3819, 3829, 4098, 4426 or 4503

Synopsis

This unit is the capstone unit for the Bachelor of Business and as such draws together the learning and experiences gained from previous business units. The unit provides students the opportunity to demonstrate being critical and creative scholars and responsible and effective global citizens, and gain an understanding of multi-disciplinary decision-making in organisations. The opportunity is via a complex project-based programme in which cultural and ethical perspectives are also assessed. Students will develop and demonstrate their career-readiness in this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. synthesize and evaluate cultural and ethical perspectives to guide international organisation decision-making
  2. research, synthesize, analyse, evaluate and communicate how innovative multi-disciplinary decision-making occurs in organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3006 - Industry placement

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Dr Ross Booth (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Giovanni Di Lieto (City)
Dr Ross Booth (all other teaching periods)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3012 - Industry placement

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Dr Ross Booth (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Giovanni Di Lieto (City)
Dr Ross Booth (all other teaching periods)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3024 - Industry placement

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Dr Ross Booth (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Giovanni Di Lieto (City)
Dr Ross Booth (all other teaching periods)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3106 - Industry placement

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Booth

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ross Booth

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3112 - Industry placement

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Booth

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ross Booth

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3120 - Perspectives on global business issues

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Shanthy Rachagan

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Shanthy Rachagan

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have completed the six compulsory core units (or equivalent), four 2nd level units and two 3rd level units.

Synopsis

In an increasingly globalised world the ability to recognise and reflect on how various global issues affect businesses is of considerable importance. Similarly, cooperation and teamwork skills that involve people from different locations and backgrounds are of particular use to many organisations. This unit focuses on developing these abilities and skills, addressing various global issues and how they affect business, as well as aspects of global citizenship, cultural sensitivity and effective teamwork. The unit includes extensive supervised teamwork in which students complete tasks by working in teams across Monash campuses.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise global issues and assess their impact on business
  2. critically reflect on how an individual's cultural context influences his/her perspective of an identified global business issue
  3. develop communication skills while working cooperatively and collaboratively with students in other global locations
  4. propose creative solutions to business issues integrating prior knowledge gained in the degree.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3150 - Sustainability practice and organisations

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Gitanjali Bedi

Coordinator(s)

Ms Gitanjali Bedi

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 72 credit points.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B2000, B2001, B2007 or associated double degree program.

Synopsis

Organisations are increasingly required to take into consideration and effectively manage the environmental, social and ethical (sustainability) impacts of their business. Through the integration of sustainability business practice, organisations are better prepared to manage risk and costs, engage stakeholders, attract and retain personnel, enhance brand value and trust, and create innovative solutions. Opportunities to positively impact an organisation's sustainability journey reside at every level of an organisation and often require multi-disciplinary, collaborative approaches to problem solve and innovate.

This unit provides students with the opportunity to demonstrate a broad knowledge of global sustainable development challenges and understand the role organisations play in contributing to innovation solutions. Students will demonstrate an understanding of organisational drivers and collaboratively apply practical skills and approaches to support organisational change towards sustainability. Students will develop and demonstrate their career-readiness through the application to real world challenges, knowledge and skills such as; undertaking an environmental and social impact assessment on an organisation, communicating the business case for sustainability, stakeholder engagement, researching and identifying sustainability innovations, cross cultural awareness and teamwork.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a broad knowledge of global sustainable development challenges
  2. acquire practical skills and knowledge for supporting change within an organisation towards sustainable practice
  3. apply a sustainability impact assessment framework with an organisation and evaluate the findings
  4. critically reflect on the role of organisations in contributing to sustainable development solutions
  5. research and identify innovative solutions to sustainable development challenges
  6. evaluate personal learning and personal development in contributing to the sustainability practice and organisational change process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3350 - Industry project

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kelly Benati

Coordinator(s)

Dr Kelly Benati

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed at least 72 Monash credit points of study prior to enrolling in this unit.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to enable students undertaking undergraduate degrees in business and economics to undertake an individual research project in the general area of business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an ability to apply a broad range of knowledge and understanding of key business theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a practical context
  2. investigate, describe, consider and evaluate a specific business issue
  3. develop higher level business conceptualisations and understandings about the topic under investigation
  4. to report on the outcomes of the project
  5. to reflect and report on the personal learning derived from the project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3351 - Industry project

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kelly Benati

Coordinator(s)

Dr Kelly Benati

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed at least 72 Monash credit points of study prior to enrolling in this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in a Faculty of Business and Economics undergraduate program.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to enable students undertaking undergraduate degrees in business and economics to undertake an individual research project in the general area of business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an ability to apply a broad range of knowledge and understanding of key business theories, concepts, tools and techniques in a practical context
  2. investigate, describe, consider and evaluate a specific business issue
  3. develop higher level business conceptualisations and understandings about the topic under investigation
  4. to report on the outcomes of the project
  5. to reflect and report on the personal learning derived from the project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3400 - Principles of econometrics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Coordinator(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis


BEX3410 - Applied econometrics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jun Sung Kim

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jun Sung Kim

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in modern applied econometrics. Emphasis is placed on models that address the special problems that arise when analysing microeconomic data, that is, data at the level of individual consumers, households and firms. The topics covered include modelling discrete dependent variables, modelling data sets that have both a cross-section and a time-series dimension and conducting inference in models in which the dependent variable is jointly determined with one or more of the regressors. The models taught in this unit are widely used in empirical work in economics, finance and marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a binary dependent variable
  2. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with one or more endogenous explanatory variables
  3. conduct statistical inference in a system of simultaneous equations
  4. conduct statistical inference on data that has both a time series and a cross section dimension.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3411 - Entrepreneurship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Professor Buzz Palmer (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Bruce Johnstone (Trimester A)
Dr Wade Halvorson (Trimester B and C)
Professor Buzz Palmer (all other teaching periods)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed at least 72 credit points in an undergraduate degree or double degree.

Prohibitions

FIT3134

Synopsis

As the world of complex technology expands with innovation requiring global foundations, the need for dynamic entrepreneurs grows. The framework of this unit will provide students with the practical knowledge, skills and tools to utilise entrepreneurship to quickly and efficiently evaluate entrepreneurial ideas to provide solutions for a market opportunity. This unit will empower students to become the business leaders of the future utilising practical and logical approaches to bring together entrepreneurship and innovation within a global context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concepts of innovation and entrepreneurship
  2. demonstrate entrepreneurial creativity
  3. apply the concepts of intellectual property and venture funding to projects
  4. conduct basic market research and analyse the results
  5. create and evaluate a value proposition
  6. formulate, review and defend a business case
  7. devise a pitch and demonstrate pitching competency.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 12 hours per week typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires four hours of timetabled activities per week including a 2-hour workshop, and two hours of seminar, teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3450 - Industry project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Dr Kelly Benati (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Giovanni Di Lieto (City)
Dr Kelly Benati (all other teaching periods)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 96 credit points and achieved a credit average before completing this unit.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to enable students undertaking undergraduate degrees in business and economics to undertake an individual research project in the general area of business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. develop insight into how they have managed their role and fitted into the organisation
  5. analyse complex business problems
  6. prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester comprising an industry based formal placement. The formal placement may include independent study and associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3451 - Industry project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Dr Kelly Benati (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Giovanni Di Lieto (Trimester C)
Dr Kelly Benati (all other teaching periods)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 96 credit points and have a credit average

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in a Faculty of Business and Economics undergraduate program.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to enable students undertaking undergraduate degrees in business and economics to undertake an individual research project in the general area of business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. develop insight into how they have managed their role and fitted into the organisation
  5. analyse complex business problems
  6. prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester comprising an industry based formal placement. The formal placement may include independent study and associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3460 - Financial econometrics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr David Frazier

Coordinator(s)

Dr David Frazier

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

The specification, estimation and testing of asset pricing models, including the capital asset pricing model and extensions; the statistical characteristics of financial data emphasising skewness, kurtosis and volatility aspects; volatility models such as ARCH models of financial time series, with applications to stock prices, derivatives, and exchange rates including the forecast performance of these models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3500 - Current issues in commerce

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Karen Medica

Coordinator(s)

Dr Karen Medica

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 96 credit points.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in B2001,B2006, B2008, B20141, B20142, B20143, B2020, B2021, B2008,B2006, B2025, B2022, B2023, D30031, D30032, E3005, L3005.

Synopsis

This unit is the capstone unit for the Bachelor of Commerce and as such draws together the learning and experiences gained from previous Commerce units. The unit provides students the opportunity to demonstrate being critical and creative scholars and responsible and effective global citizens, and to analyse and provide multidisciplinary solutions to a current issue in commerce via a team-based approach.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of this unit it is expected that BCom graduates will:

  1. be critical and creative scholars who:
    • produce innovative solutions to problems
    • apply research skills to business challenges
    • communicate effectively and perceptively
  2. be responsible and effective global citizens who:
    • engage in an internationalised world
    • exhibit cross cultural competence
    • demonstrate ethical values
  3. have comprehensive understanding of their discipline and be able to provide discipline based solutions relevant to the business, professional and public policy communities that we serve
  4. be able to construct conceptual frameworks and use these to analyse complex issues in the corporate sector, government and the professions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3510 - Modelling in finance and insurance

0 points, SCA Band 2, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Fima Klebaner

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis


BEX3550 - Industry project

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kelly Benati

Coordinator(s)

Dr Kelly Benati

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Permission required.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 576 hours per semester typically comprising independent study under industry and academic supervision.

See also Unit timetable information

Off-campus attendance requirements

As agreed with industry and/or academic supervisor.


BEX3555 - Integrative business practices

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chew Yin Teng

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chew Yin Teng

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Successful completion of 96 credit points, inclusive of: ACW1000, BTW1042, ECW1101, ETW1102 or ETW1000, MGW1010 and MKW1120.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course B2026, 2224, 1941, 3863.

Synopsis

This is an interdisciplinary capstone unit for the Bachelor of Business and Commerce program. It aims to help students integrate the diverse discipline knowledge they acquired in prior studies, deepen their understanding of topical issues related to regional or global business, and apply their learning to solve real business problems. Students will identify innovative solutions to those problems from a total organisation perspective. In the process, they will learn how to synthesise principles and theories from different business disciplines, and apply a variety of skills including critical inquiry, problem solving, communication and teamwork.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate real-life business practices and issues by integrating multiple perspectives and approaches, and identify innovative solutions to the associated business problems
  2. synthesise knowledge from multiple disciplines and identify solutions to a range of business problems
  3. articulate and present their ideas in a succinct and convincing manner.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3600 - Current issues in business administration

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Pieter Van Dijk

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Pieter Van Dijk

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 96 credit points.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in B2007

Synopsis

This unit is a pilot for the capstone unit for the Bachelor of Business Administration and, as such, draws together the learning and experiences gained from previous BBA units. The unit provides students the opportunity to demonstrate being critical and creative scholars and responsible and effective global citizens, and to analyse and provide and communicate multidisciplinary solutions to a current issue in business administration via a team-based approach.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3622 - Issues in global business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Nell Kimberley

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Nell Kimberley

Unit guides

Offered

Prato

  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed at least 48 Monash credit points of study prior to enrolling in this unit.

Synopsis

This unit requires students to examine a broad range of social-cultural, political-legal and macro business environmental issues that can impact enterprises operating in a global environment. Through the use of readings, case studies and an analysis of current events, students are confronted with specific challenges of conducting business in a global context. These challenges may include but are not limited to: environmental sustainability; crime and corruption; cross-cultural relationship; technological innovation; political and economic risk. The unit encourages an awareness and appreciation of the complexity surrounding these issues in the development of strategic business responses.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define globalisation and the globalisation process, including its causes and effects
  2. argue both the contributions and criticisms associated with globalisation
  3. identify and explore major contextual issues encountered in global business, including social-cultural, political-legal contexts, along with business environmental contexts
  4. analyse the impact of major contextual issues on a variety of product and service industries
  5. develop strategic responses to specific issues affecting businesses operating in a global context
  6. demonstrate competence in critical and reflective thinking
  7. acquire and demonstrate team skills including team leadership, collaboration, problem-solving, decision-making, communication and presentation skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3710 - Labour economics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Claudio Labanca

Coordinator(s)

Dr Claudio Labanca

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC3710

Synopsis


BEX3722 - Engaging with international business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Dr Ross Booth (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Michaela Rankin

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)

Sri Lanka

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

United States of America

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed at least 96 Monash credit points of study prior to enrolling in this unit.

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course code: 4098, 0550, 0553, 0556,0542, 0170, 4097, 4417, 3806, 0315, 1333, 1334, 0312, 3154, 1337, 0314, 4407, 3819, 0179, 2015, 3830, 1319, B2006, 1469, 4419, 4428, 0023, 4426, 4425, 1185, 4641, 4635, 4430, D3003, 4645, L3005, B2000, B2001, B20031, B20032, B20033, B20041, B20042, B20043, B2019, B20131, B20132, B20133, B2017, B20121

B20122, B20123, B20181, B20182, B20183, B2020, B2021, B20141, B20142, B20143, B2008, B2025, B2022, B2023, B20241, B20242, B20243, B20091, B20092, B20093, B20151, B20152, B20153, B20161, B20162, B20163, F20041, F20042, D30071, D30072, D30031, D30032, E3005, E3003, F20071.

Synopsis

This unit requires students to examine a broad range of social, cultural, legal and political issues that can impact on the strategy and operations of businesses operating in a global business environment. Through the use of readings, case studies, and an analysis of current events students are confronted with some specific challenges of doing business in a global context. This unit focuses on developing skills, addressing various global issues and how they affect business, as well as aspects of global citizenship, cultural sensitivity and effective teamwork.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise issues affecting businesses operating in a global context
  2. develop and present strategic responses to specific issues affecting businesses operating in a global context with due consideration to sustainable, responsible and ethical business practices
  3. acquire team skills including team leadership, collaboration, problem-solving, decision-making, communication and presentation skills
  4. develop reflective practice skills in relation to individual learning.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX3724 - Engaging with international business

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Michaela Rankin

Coordinator(s)

Professor Michaela Rankin

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have completed at least 96 Monash credit points of study prior to enrolling in this unit.

Co-requisites

Permission required. Students must be participating in an approved program of advanced study.

Synopsis

This unit requires students to examine a broad range of social, cultural, legal and political issues that can impact on the strategy and operations of businesses operating in a global business environment. Through the use of readings, case studies, and an analysis of current events students are confronted with some specific challenges of doing business in a global context. This unit focuses on developing skills, addressing various global issues and how they affect business, as well as aspects of global citizenship, cultural sensitivity and effective teamwork.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise issues affecting businesses operating in a global context
  2. develop and present strategic responses to specific issues affecting businesses operating in a global context with due consideration to sustainable, responsible and ethical business practices
  3. acquire team skills including team leadership, collaboration, problem-solving, decision-making, communication and presentation skills
  4. develop reflective practice skills in relation to individual learning.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX4120 - Actuarial practice II

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mike Callan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mike Callan

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss and apply the process of product design
  2. select an appropriate model to solve client problems
  3. recognise the importance of capital
  4. apply relevant approaches and techniques to the valuation of liabilities
  5. apply appropriate techniques to the pricing of products and contracts
  6. measure, report and manage solvency
  7. measure and report emerging profits and/or costs
  8. monitor and assess experience
  9. manage the business and respond to the experience.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX4130 - Asset liability management

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

To be advised.

Coordinator(s)

To be advised.

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Unit BEX4130 covers the subject material required for Actuaries Institute subject Part IIB Investment and Asset Modelling. The unit gives an introduction into the investment background for Australian financial institutions, especially those offering insurance and related financial products. It then addresses issues in asset liability management. The student is introduced to the characteristics and behaviour of various investment types and the understanding of the relationship between risk and return. Valuation methods for investment types are addressed. Economic and financial theories relevant to investment are studied. The techniques of setting investment objectives for different investment funds are covered. More detailed issues in relation to asset liability management are then addressed, including how investment policy for assets may assist in managing liabilities for financial institutions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to describe and critically discuss the characteristics and behaviour of different Investment types under different economic conditions, understanding the relationship between risk and return and recognising risk factors which includes issuer default, counterparty failure, systemic liquidity, the collapse of speculative bubbles, shocks to the economic system and cyclical/structural changes
  2. develop an understanding of the methods used for valuation of the common forms of debt, equity, property and derivative securities. In particular students should be aware of the valuation methods and principles, data requirements and sources and the implicit assumptions and limitations of these models
  3. develop an understanding of the application and limitations of the major economic and financial theories relevant to investment, and be able to critically evaluate these theories including the efficient market hypothesis, the capital asset pricing model, multi-factor pricing models and theories from behavioural finance
  4. define appropriate investment objectives based on the liability profile of a fund
  5. specify appropriate investment constraints, based on the liability profile of a fund
  6. identify the characteristics of different types of asset models
  7. critically evaluate the appropriateness of an asset model for a given context
  8. derive consistent asset assumptions for asset models, taking into account historical data, prevailing industry expectations, contemporary investment literature, and other practical considerations such as tax
  9. apply asset assumptions, and the linkages contained within asset models, to real world situations
  10. describe and critically evaluate different approaches to asset allocation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BEX4650 - Microeconomics

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Chongwoo Choe

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis


BEX4670 - Economic development

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Coordinator(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis


BEX4690 - International trade

0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Topics include the gains and costs of trading internationally; static and dynamic welfare effects of protection; the political economy of international trade policy; optimum policies in the presence of market power, uncertainty, and other market imperfections; trade policy instruments; strategies for trade liberalisation including regional trade agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to analyse the effects of international trade on real income and its distribution in various market structures
  2. have a sound understanding of the allocation and welfare effects of commercial policies
  3. possess the skills necessary to evaluate critically contemporary innovations in Australia's trade policies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFB1001 - Foundations of finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Simon Yap

Coordinator(s)

Dr Abey Gunasekarage

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

AFC1100, AFC2000, AFC2100, AFG1300, AFW1300, BFB1300, BFC2000, BFF1300, BFG1300, BFW1300,BFC1001, BFF1001, BFP1001, BFW1001

Synopsis

As a foundation, this unit introduces students to the concepts of finance, financial mathematics, investment analysis, the financial system, risk management and the relationship of finances to other commercial disciplines.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit students will be able to:

  1. demonstrate an introductory understanding to the concepts of finance in preparation for additional study in the discipline
  2. describe the foundation concepts of finance
  3. relate the concepts of finance to other commercial disciplines.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFB2140 - Corporate finance 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Simon Yap

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECB1101 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF2631, BFF2631, BFG2631, BFP2631, BFW2631, AFF2140, BFC2140, BFF2140, BFW2140.

Synopsis

The aim of the unit is to introduce students to the theory and application of why and how value enhancing corporate financial decisions are made and implemented. With the emphasis on publicly listed companies, topics covered include; the corporate objective of management; investment evaluation models; valuation of equity and debt instruments; sources and types of funding; issues in risk and return; portfolio theory; asset pricing models; issues in capital structure and dividend policy; and the efficiency of capital markets. The unit is designed to ensure students gain the necessary skill set for making value-changing financial decisions to maximise firm value.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate investment options and value of equity and debt instruments
  2. explain portfolio theory and show how the theory can be extended to price risky assets
  3. estimate the appropriate cost of capital for investment appraisal purposes
  4. analyse issues determining capital structure and dividend policy
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with corporate finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task, the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFB2140.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning, online engagement and integrating relevant active learning initiatives.

See also Unit timetable information


BFB3121 - Investments and portfolio management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Abey Gunasekarage

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFB2140 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF3121, BFF3121, AFG3121, BFG3121, AFW3121, BFW3121, AFW3046

Synopsis

On completion of this subject students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the conceptual foundations of modern portfolio theory, using pricing models and other techniques in the valuation of securities; appreciate the effect of market efficiency on the valuation process; measure portfolio risk and determine performance benchmarks; and be able to take an applied perspective on investment management and analysis in the Australian environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate financial market information to measure risk and return
  2. describe modern portfolio theory
  3. apply asset pricing models and valuation techniques to the valuation of assets
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with investments and portfolio management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFB3121.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC2140 - Corporate finance 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Emma Zhang (First semester)
Dr Thanh Huynh (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Ms Emma Zhang (First semester)
Dr Thanh Huynh (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF2631, BFF2631, AFG2631, BFG2631, AFW2631, BFB2631, BFP2631, BFW2631, AFW3044, AFC2140, BFB2140, BFF2140, BFP2140, BFW2140.

Synopsis

The aim of the unit is to introduce students to the theory and application of why and how value enhancing corporate financial decisions are made and implemented. With the emphasis on publicly listed companies, topics covered include; the corporate objective of management, investment evaluation models, valuation of equity and debt instruments, sources and types of funding, issues in risk and return, portfolio theory, asset pricing models, issues in capital structure and dividend policy and the efficiency of capital markets. The unit is designed to ensure students with the necessary skill set for making value-changing financial decisions to maximise firm value.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate investment options and value of equity and debt instruments
  2. explain portfolio theory and show how the theory can be extended to price risky assets
  3. estimate the appropriate cost of capital for investment appraisal purposes
  4. analyse issues determining capital structure and dividend policy
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with corporate finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC2140.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC2340 - Debt markets and fixed income securities

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Philip Gharghori (First semester)
Dr Zhongyan Zhu (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Philip Gharghori (First semester)
Dr Zhongyan Zhu (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC2140 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC2340

Synopsis

Topics covered in this unit include an overview of debt markets, bond pricing, factors affecting bond prices and yields including bond price volatility and the term structure of interest rates, different types of debt instruments including government, corporate and international bonds, credit risk modelling, bond portfolio construction and management, and finally, bond performance measurement and evaluation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe conventions used in debt markets and explain the implications for pricing of products in these markets
  2. apply quantitative skills required for pricing and risk management associated with debt market instruments
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with debt markets and fixed income securities and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC2340.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC2751 - Derivatives 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Lajbcygier (First semester)
Dr Huu Nhan Duong (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Paul Lajbcygier (First semester)
Dr Huu Nhan Duong (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC2140 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF3751, BFF3751

Synopsis

This unit examines the institutional features of futures and options markets, the use of futures, options and other derivatives in arbitraging, trading and hedging, and prices of these instruments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the operations of derivatives markets
  2. evaluate the options and futures markets for hedging and trading purposes
  3. demonstrate how to price and value standards futures and options contracts and other derivatives
  4. implement trading strategies and measure positions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC3140 - Corporate finance 2

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Ying Dou

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC2140 and BFC2751 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC3140

Synopsis

This unit extends corporate finance concepts introduced in BFC2140. Topics include equity financing, asset pricing and cost of capital, risk management, real options, capital structure, mergers and acquisitions, corporate governance and international corporate finance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate investment and financing decisions
  2. apply analytical techniques to a variety of problems in domestic corporate financial management
  3. describe the institutional environment in which financial decisions are made including identifying the sources of financial risk and their relevance in financial management
  4. critically evaluate finance theories, concepts, assumptions, limitations and arguments
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced corporate finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC3140.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC3170 - Management of financial intermediaries

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kym Brown

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC2140 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF2401, BFF2401, AFW2401, BFW2401, AFC3170

Synopsis

Major issues involved in the financial management of banks and other deposit-taking financial institutions. Topics include performance measurement; asset/liability management for liquidity risk, credit risk, interest rate risk; and regulation of depository institutions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. outline the major risks and related prudential requirements faced by banks and to assess factors to consider in managing these risks
  2. evaluate the various mathematical techniques available to manage interest rate risk including the maturity model, the duration model and the repricing model
  3. evaluate mathematical models in relation to managing credit risk for individual loans and to the loan portfolio
  4. identify suitable qualitative and quantitative indicators of financial institutions' performance
  5. distinguish the various sources of commercial and retail debt funding including liability management, and analyse how the current Australian banking system provides access to such funds
  6. sequence the Basel framework as used in Australia, but emanating from the Basel Committee at the global level
  7. be able to clearly and effectively communicate solutions, applying the knowledge in above areas, in a distinctly logical manner in relation to activities dealing with the management of financial institutions and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC3170.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC3240 - International finance

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Ali Sheikhbahaei

Coordinator(s)

Mr Ali Sheikhbahaei

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC2140 and BFC2751 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW2341, BFW2341, BFF2341,AFC3240

Synopsis

Topics covered in this unit include the international financial system and the various types of exchange rate systems that exist around the world. Also included is the theory of the determination of exchange rates, as well as an analysis of the extent to which these theories hold in practice. A major topic area is the measurement and management of firms' foreign exchange rate risk, including theory relating to the importance of hedging against exchange risks, and the complexities involved in assessing and managing exchange rate risks in a globally connected world. In discussing the management of foreign currency transactions, the use of hedging tools such as currency futures, options and swaps is covered. The final topic is international portfolio management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. analyse and evaluate the benefits and disadvantages of the various exchange rate systems
  2. critically appraise the extent to which the theories of exchange rate determination explain exchange rate movements in today's globalised economy
  3. explain the various tools and approaches for firms in hedging transaction exchange exposure, and recommend the most appropriate approach to hedging in a variety of economic and firm-specific circumstances
  4. analyse the extent to which firms are exposed to economic or operating exchange risk, evaluate their systems in place to manage it, and recommend alternative approaches
  5. appraise the benefits of international portfolio investment vis-a-vis domestic-only diversification
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with international finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC3240.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC3241 - Equities and investment analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Huu Nhan Duong (First semester)
Dr Paul Docherty (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Huu Nhan Duong (First semester)
Dr Paul Docherty (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC2140 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC2240, ACC3230, BFC2240

Synopsis

Topics include asset classes and returns, portfolio theory, asset pricing models, security valuation processes and techniques, market efficiency and behavioural finance, portfolio performance evaluations, hedge funds and the CFA Institute code of ethics and standards of professional conduct.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the nature of different asset classes and the ways in which professional managers incorporate and manage asset classes
  2. apply various techniques to analyse and select equities in equity investment
  3. understand the skills and techniques used by professionals who are involved in funds management, and wealth creation
  4. understand the importance of professional investment in wealth creation
  5. understand the importance of ethical practices by investment professionals and the CFA Institute code of ethics and standards of professional conduct
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with equities and investment analysis and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC3241.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC3340 - Derivatives 2

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Binh Do

Coordinator(s)

Dr Binh Do

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC2751 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF3751, BFF3751, AFC3340

Synopsis

This unit provides a more technical treatment of derivative analysis with focus on implementation issues. Topics include stochastic calculus concepts that underpin continuous time option pricing models, alternatives to the Black-Scholes-Merton model, numerical approaches to option pricing, valuation of interest rate derivatives, exotic options, credit derivatives, Value-at-Risk and estimation of volatilities.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of Wiener processes and Ito's Lemma as the basic building blocks for continuous time option pricing models. Derive the Black-Scholes-Merton differential equations
  2. apply models of option pricing beyond the Black-Scholes-Merton model
  3. apply numerical procedures to price options especially exotic options
  4. analyse interest rate derivatives and apply term structure models
  5. implement pricing models using technical programing languages.
  6. demonstrate how risk can be quantified using different approaches
  7. analyse and value swaps, credit default swaps and other derivatives and demonstrate how they can be used for risk management and speculation
  8. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with derivative instruments and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC3340.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC3440 - Pension and financial planning

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christine Brown

Coordinator(s)

Mr Tony Cusack

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC3241 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF3111, BFF3111, AFC3440, BFG3210

Synopsis

Topics covered include superannuation economics and demographics, industry structure and regulation, products available from fund managers, life offices and superannuation trusts, actuarial mathematics, the mortality table, factors affecting selection, endowments, assurances, single, joint and longest life annuities, application to comparative evaluation of commercial retirement products, financial planners and the financial planning function, accreditation, responsibilities and duties, determination of client objectives and risk profiles, and strategies for superannuation and social security.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe financial planning activities, and legal compliance requirements for financial planners
  2. demonstrate specialist skills required for interaction with financial planning clients
  3. demonstrate generic knowledge of the Australian and global investment environments, together with specialist knowledge in the areas of superannuation, financial planning, securities and managed investments
  4. prepare financial plans for clients with different financial objectives
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with pension and financial planning and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFC3440.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC3540 - Modelling in finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Lajbcygier

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFC2140 and BFC2751 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC3540

Synopsis

Topics include the development and application of financial spreadsheets, Excel and Visual Basic programming in financial modelling, modelling company financial statements, fixed income securities analysis, asset allocation and portfolio analysis, optimization using Solver, technical analysis of financial markets, Interest rate models, option pricing models, numerical methods and risk management models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply knowledge and skills in the use of Excel and Visual Basic
  2. develop skills in the design and implementation of efficient and robust financial models such as option pricing, portfolio and interest rate models
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced modelling in finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFC3540.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFC3999 - Finance and society

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Abu Zafar Shahriar

Coordinator(s)

Dr Abu Zafar Shahriar

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 102 credit points and passed BFC2140 and BFC2751 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit is intended to contextualise students' acquired knowledge for solving problems in real world domestic and global situations. As a capstone unit, it should be studied in the final semester of the finance major as it draws upon and integrates learning from previous units studied. The unit encourages students to recognise that finance is a powerful tool for solving our common problems, and increasing the general wellbeing, but may give rise to ethical dilemmas. Students will be exposed to choices and conflicts requiring judgement and thus appreciate that finance can play an important role in helping society achieve its goals.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate the role of finance in shaping society
  2. hypothesise concepts surrounding finance and apply these to a variety of domestic and international situations
  3. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group
  4. demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents relating to finance and society
  5. evaluate and weigh evidence, arguments and ethics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF1001 - Foundations of finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tze Choo (Caulfield)
Dr Amale Scally (Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tze Choo (Caulfield)
Mr Steven Burch (Trimester A and B)
Dr Nafisa Ovi (Trimester C)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

AFC1100, AFC2000, AFC2100, AFG1300, AFW1300, BFB1300, BFC2000, BFF1300, BFG1300, BFW1300,BFC1001, BFB1001, BFP1001, BFW1001

Synopsis

As a foundation, this unit introduces students to the concepts of finance, financial mathematics, investment analysis, the financial system, risk management and the relationship of finances to other commercial disciplines.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit students will be able to:

  1. demonstrate an introductory understanding to the concepts of finance in preparation for additional study in the discipline
  2. describe the foundation concepts of finance
  3. relate the concepts of finance to other commercial disciplines.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF2140 - Corporate finance 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Joshua Shemesh (Caulfield and Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Joshua Shemesh (Caulfield and Trimester A)
Dr Nafisa Ovi (Trimester B and C)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Prerequisites

ECF1100 and ETF1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF2631, BFF2631, BFG2631, BFP2631, BFW2631, AFF2140, BFB2140, BFC2140, BFW2140.

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to introduce students to the theory and application of why and how value enhancing corporate financial decisions are made and implemented. With the emphasis on publicly listed companies, topics covered include; the corporate objective of management; investment evaluation models; valuation of equity and debt instruments; sources and types of funding; issues in risk and return; portfolio theory; asset pricing models; issues in capital structure and dividend policy; and the efficiency of capital markets. The unit is designed to ensure students gain the necessary skill set for making value-changing financial decisions to maximise firm value.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate investment options and value of equity and debt instruments
  2. explain portfolio theory and show how the theory can be extended to price risky assets
  3. estimate the appropriate cost of capital for investment appraisal purposes
  4. analyse issues determining capital structure and dividend policy
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with corporate finance, and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF2140.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF2341 - International financial management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Abey Gunasakerage (Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Abey Gunasakerage (Trimester A)
Dr Nafisa Ovi (Trimester B and C)

Unit guides

Offered

City (Melbourne)

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

AFC3240, BFC3240, AFF3331, BFF3331, AFW2341, BFW2341, AFW3331, BFW3331, AFF2341

Synopsis

Topics covered include multinational firms and globalisation; foreign direct investment; political risk; foreign exchange markets; currency derivatives (currency options and forward contracts); measuring and managing transaction exposure; cost of capital and capital structure for multinational firms; fundamentals of capital budgeting; international capital budgeting and exchange rate effects; international cash management; transfer pricing and international tax strategies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the international financial environment and the importance of foreign exchange risk management
  2. discuss important financial management issues and their application to financial management of multinational firms
  3. discuss foreign exchange market mechanisms and explain how markets can be used to hedge foreign currency transaction exposure
  4. apply capital budgeting techniques in the context of a multinational firm
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual activities dealing with international financial management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF2341.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF2401 - Commercial banking and finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tram Vu (First semester)
Dr Hannah Nguyen (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tram Vu (First semester)
Dr Hannah Nguyen (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF1001 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC3170, BFC3170, AFW2401, BFW2401, AFF2401

Synopsis

This unit examines the major risks and issues faced by Australian financial institutions within the context of the global environment. Topics include an introduction to the Australian banking environment, bank performance, management of bank risks including credit, capital, liquidity and interest rate risk, loan pricing, liability management, investment management and capital adequacy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the main risks and related prudential requirements faced by banks and to assess factors to consider in managing these risks
  2. appraise suitable qualitative and quantitative data or characteristics to assess bank performance
  3. understand asset and liability management of a financial institution
  4. understand non-market related and derivative contracts used by financial institutions
  5. be able to sequence the Basel prudential framework as instigated within the Australian context, but emanating from the Basel Committee at the global level
  6. be able to clearly and effectively communicate solutions, applying the knowledge in above areas, in a distinctly logical manner in relation to activities dealing with the commercial banking and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF2401.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF2701 - Equity markets

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Imon Palit

Coordinator(s)

Dr Imon Palit

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF1001 and ETF1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF2701

Synopsis

An overview of the role of equity markets. Topics cover types of equity instruments; the role of broker and market maker; trading conventions and listing requirements of the ASX; the structure and operation of major overseas stock exchanges; an introduction to market micro structure theory; the enterprise market; other markets of the ASX; current issues related to Australia's equity markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the importance of the equity market for the economy and for a corporation
  2. apply different techniques to evaluate trading costs
  3. appraise equity trading principles and strategies
  4. undertake a trading simulation exercise and complete a stock report
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with equity markets and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF2701.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF2751 - Derivatives 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Philip Gray

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Yulia Veld-Merkoulova

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF1001 and BFF2140 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF3751, BFF3751

Synopsis

This unit examines the institutional features of futures and options markets, the use of futures, options and other derivatives in arbitraging, trading and hedging, and prices of these instruments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the operations of derivatives markets
  2. evaluate the options and futures markets for hedging and trading purposes
  3. demonstrate how to price and value standards futures and options contracts and other derivatives
  4. implement trading strategies and measure positions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF3111 - Personal financial planning

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jimmy Feng

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF2140 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC3440, BFC3440, AFF3111

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to financial planning. Coverage includes: the legislative and economic environment; the role of financial service advisers; licensing and disclosure; investment strategies, products, and related taxation implications, with particular reference to securities and managed investments; social security; superannuation, pensions and other retirement issues; estate planning; and the financial planning process.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe financial planning activities and legal compliance requirements for financial planners
  2. demonstrate specialist skills required for interaction with financial planning clients
  3. demonstrate generic knowledge of the Australian and global investment environments, together with specialist knowledge in the areas of superannuation, financial planning, securities and managed investments
  4. prepare detailed information necessary to complete a limited Statement of Advice (SoA)
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with personal financial planning and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF3111.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF3121 - Investments and portfolio management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Manapon Limkriangkrai

Coordinator(s)

Dr Manapon Limkriangkrai

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF2140 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW3046, AFW3121, BFW3121, AFG3121, BFG3121, AFF3121

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the conceptual foundations of modern portfolio theory, using pricing models and other techniques in the valuation of securities; appreciate the effect of market efficiency on the valuation process; measure portfolio risk and determine performance benchmarks; and be able to take an applied perspective on investment management and analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate financial market information to measure risk and return
  2. describe modern portfolio theory
  3. apply asset pricing models and valuation techniques to the valuation of assets
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with investments and portfolio management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF3121.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF3301 - Treasury and financial markets

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Wayne Huf

Coordinator(s)

Mr Wayne Huf

Quota applies

Enrolment quota of 156 per semester

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFF2401, BFF2401 or equivalent before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF3301

Synopsis

This unit will combine classroom teaching and direct experiential learning in financial markets covering topics that may include market participants, treasury operations, market structures, dealer markets, liquidity and price formation. This unit is taught in the simulated trading and research laboratory (STARLab). It is a specialist, practically oriented unit where attendance is compulsory as assessment is based on classroom activities. An understanding of financial prices, returns and volatility is required.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. formulate portfolio management decisions
  2. compare and contrast differences between various market structures
  3. acquire an in-depth understanding of economic concepts such as market efficiency, performance evaluation and market structure regulation
  4. plan, verify and settle transactions completed in STARLab
  5. develop, implement, analyse and manage strategies in financial markets
  6. plan, organise and report on all activities involved in STARLab
  7. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with treasury and financial markets.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF3331 - International banking and finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Michael Skully (First semester)
Dr Kym Brown (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Michael Skully (First semester)
Dr Kym Brown (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF2401 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW3331, BFW3331, AFX3871, BFX3871, AFF3331

Synopsis

When firms operate internationally they are exposed to not only asset risk but also exchange rate risk. We therefore build on an expected base finance knowledge by considering topics such as determination of exchange rates, the international monetary system, international parity conditions, foreign exchange markets, country risk analysis, fund raising via Euromarkets, Eurocurrency and international stock markets. Also, managing economic exposure, international portfolio investment, international trade finance, and international banking.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. understand how exchange rates are determined and the related parity theories
  2. evaluate arbitrage opportunities in exchange rates
  3. evaluate country risk for multi-national firms
  4. analyse the extent to which firms are exposed to economic exchange risk, evaluate their systems in place to manage it, and recommend alternative approaches
  5. appraise the benefits of international portfolio investment vis-a-vis domestic-only diversification
  6. consider alternative international trade finance options
  7. examine derivatives related to foreign exchange
  8. analyse structural issues in the current and likely future of international banking
  9. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with international finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF3331.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF3351 - Investment banking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christine Brown

Coordinator(s)

Ms Fiona McNabb

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF2140 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF3351

Synopsis

This unit will examine the development of investment/merchant banking in Australia and overseas; specialised financial services in project finance, structured finance and infrastructure finance; venture capital; initial public offering activities; financial advisory work including mergers and acquisitions; investment funds management activities; privatisation and corporatisation; and future directions of investment banking.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the key operations of investment banks
  2. apply valuation models to companies
  3. explain regulations related to equity issues, mergers and acquisitions and share buybacks
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with investment banking.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF3651 - Treasury management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr John Watson (First semester)
Dr Zhe An (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr John Watson (First semester)
Dr Zhe An (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF2401 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW3651, BFW3651, AFF3651

Synopsis

The role of treasury, coordination and management of the treasury operation, quantitative and qualitative risk analysis, risk management process and hedging techniques, role and mechanics of derivative products, performance measurement and evaluation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role of treasury operations in an international or a local bank
  2. describe how risk management processes work
  3. demonstrate the application of hedging techniques used in banks' treasury operations
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with treasury management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF3651.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF3841 - Credit analysis and lending management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jean-Pierre Fenech (First semester)
Dr Tram Vu (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jean-Pierre Fenech (First semester)
Dr Tram Vu (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFF2401 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW3841, BFW3841, AFF3841

Synopsis

Lending environment; decision making and organisation of lending, lending policies and controls; behavioural aspects of decision making and decision makers; retail, commercial and corporate lending; business expansions; off balance sheet lending; loan management and problem loans.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the major types of lending products and match these products to customer needs
  2. analyse the risk return characteristics and pricing of a loan application
  3. discuss the behavioural aspects associated with lending decisions
  4. apply statistical techniques used in decision making at the approval, monitoring and termination stages of lending
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with lending decisions and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFF3841.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFF3999 - Financial institutions and society

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Abu Zafar Shahriar

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 102 credit points and passed BFB3121 or BBF3121 or BFF3331 or BFF3651 or BFF3841 and BFB2140 or BFC2140 or BFP2140 or BFW2140 and BFC2751 or BFF2751.

Synopsis

This unit is intended to contextualise student's acquired knowledge for solving problems in real world domestic and global situations in banking and finance. As a capstone unit, it should be studied in the final semester of the Bachelor of Banking and Finance, as it draws upon and integrates learning from previous units studied. Students will be exposed to choices and conflicts requiring judgement and thus appreciate the role of the banking and finance industry within society.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit students will be able to:

  1. evaluate the role of the banking and finance industry in shaping the economy and society
  2. hypothesise concepts surrounding banking and finance and apply these to a variety of domestic and international situations
  3. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group
  4. demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality business documents relating to finance and society
  5. evaluate and weigh evidence, arguments and ethics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFS2780 - Corporate finance A

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Gladman Moyana

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ACS1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW2780, AFW3005, AFS2780

Synopsis

This unit introduces the principles of financial management, strategy and risk management. The unit addresses the following fundamental areas: Development, evaluation and management of strategy, risk management, introduction to corporate finance and financial management; an introduction to working with financial statements; the principles of time value of money and valuation of future cash flows; interest rates and bond valuations, share valuations, net present value and investment criteria; an introduction to capital budgeting principles and its relationship with the future cash flow valuation.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the purpose of financial management and corporate finance
  2. apply analysis techniques to financial information and interpret the results
  3. explain and apply the principles of time value of money to rank investment projects and value stocks and bonds
  4. explain and apply, at an introductory level, valuation techniques relating to equity instruments
  5. explain and apply techniques in capital investment decisions
  6. identify aspects broader than only financial aspects (such as environmental, social, economic and governance) in decision making
  7. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to activities dealing with corporate finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFS2780.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFS3790 - Corporate finance B

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Gladman Moyana

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFS2780 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFW3005, AFW3790, AFS3790

Synopsis

This unit builds upon the understanding, knowledge and skills developed in AFS2780/BFS2780 (Corporate finance A). The unit provides a detailed examination of selected topics in corporate finance. These topics include: capital market history, risk and return, cost of capital, raising capital, financial leverage and capital structure, dividend policy, short-term finance and planning, current asset management, advanced capital budgeting, mergers, leasing, analysis and interpretation and valuations.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain and apply the key concepts that are relevant for each topic and interpret results
  2. apply complex quantitative techniques to practical examples and case studies in corporate finance and give advice
  3. demonstrate an understanding of how these topics relate to contemporary corporate activity
  4. identify and evaluate aspects broader than only financial aspects (such as environmental, social, economic and governance) in decision making
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with corporate finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFS3790.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW1001 - Foundations of finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Tee Chwee Ming

Coordinator(s)

Mr Tee Chwee Ming

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

AFC1100, AFC2000, AFC2100, AFG1300, AFW1300, BFB1300, BFC2000, BFF1300, BFG1300, BFW1300, BFC1001, BFF1001, BFP1001, BFB1001

Synopsis

As a foundation, this unit introduces students to the concepts of finance, financial mathematics, investment analysis, the financial system, risk management and the relationship of finances to other commercial disciplines.

Outcomes

At the end of this unit students will be able to:

  1. demonstrate an introductory understanding to the concepts of finance in preparation for additional study in the discipline
  2. describe the foundation concepts of finance
  3. relate the concepts of finance to other commercial disciplines.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW1310 - Introduction to Islamic banking and finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mohammed Shaiban

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

AFW1310

Synopsis

Topics covered include: Shariah and rationale for Islamic banking; history of Islamic banking; deposit, financing and other banking facilities; Islamic financial markets; Islamic finance in selected countries; and contemporary issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the need, structure and operations of Islamic banking and finance
  2. explain the concept of shariah, its sources and applicability to Islamic banking and finance
  3. identify the types of Islamic banking facilities
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with Islamic banking and finance
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFW1310.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW2140 - Corporate finance 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tran Vuong Thao

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tran Vuong Thao

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECW1101 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF2631, BFF2631, BFG2631, BFP2631, BFW2631, AFF2140, BFB2140, BFC2140, BFF2140, BFP2140.

Synopsis

The aim of the unit is to introduce students to the theory and application of why and how value enhancing corporate financial decisions are made and implemented. With the emphasis on publicly listed companies, topics covered include; the corporate objective of management; investment evaluation models; valuation of equity and debt instruments; sources and types of funding; issues in risk and return; portfolio theory; asset pricing models; issues in capital structure and dividend policy; and the efficiency of capital markets. The unit is designed to ensure students gain the necessary skill set for making value-changing financial decisions to maximise firm value.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate investment options and value of equity and debt instruments
  2. explain portfolio theory and show how the theory can be extended to price risky assets
  3. estimate the appropriate cost of capital for investment appraisal purposes
  4. analyse issues determining capital structure and dividend policy
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with corporate finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFW2140.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW2341 - International financial management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yessy Arnold

Coordinator(s)

Dr Yessy Arnold

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

AFC3240, BFC3240, AFW3331, BFW3331, AFW2341

Synopsis

Topics covered include multinational firms and globalisation; foreign direct investment; political risk; foreign exchange markets; currency derivatives (currency options and forward contracts); measuring and managing transaction exposure; cost of capital and capital structure for multinational firms; fundamentals of capital budgeting; international capital budgeting and exchange rate effects; international cash management; transfer pricing and international tax strategies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the international financial environment and the importance of foreign exchange risk management
  2. discuss important financial management issues and their application to financial management of multinational firms
  3. discuss foreign exchange market mechanisms and explain how markets can be used to hedge foreign currency transaction exposure
  4. apply capital budgeting techniques in the context of a multinational firm
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual activities dealing with international financial management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFW2341.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW2401 - Commercial banking and finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mohammed Shaiban

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mohammed Shaiban

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFW1300 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFC3170, BFC3170, AFF2401, BFF2401, AFW2401

Synopsis

This unit examines the major risks and issues faced by financial institutions within the context of the global environment. Topics include an introduction to the banking environment, bank performance, management of bank risks including credit, capital, liquidity and interest rate risk, loan pricing, liability management, investment management and capital adequacy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the main risks and related prudential requirements faced by banks and to assess factors to consider in managing these risks
  2. appraise suitable qualitative and quantitative data or characteristics to assess bank performance
  3. understand asset and liability management of a financial institution
  4. contrast various security portfolio strategies available to the bank, and explain optimal strategies when interest rates change
  5. understand non-market related and derivative contracts used by financial institutions
  6. be able to sequence the Basel prudential framework as instigated within the Australian context, but emanating from the Basel Committee at the global level
  7. be able to clearly and effectively communicate solutions, applying the knowledge in above areas, in a distinctly logical manner in relation to activities dealing with the commercial banking and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFW2401.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW2751 - Derivatives 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dinh Phan (First semester)
Associate Professor Jothee Sinnakkannu (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dinh Phan (First semester)
Associate Professor Jothee Sinnakkannu (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFW1001 and BFW2140 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BFC3340, AFC3340, AFF3751, BFF3751

Synopsis

This unit examines the institutional features of futures and options markets, the use of futures, options and other derivatives in arbitraging, trading and hedging, and prices of these instruments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the operations of derivatives markets
  2. evaluate the options and futures markets for hedging and trading purposes
  3. demonstrate how to price and value standards futures and options contracts and other derivatives
  4. implement trading strategies and measure positions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW3121 - Investments and portfolio management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Liang Zhang

Coordinator(s)

Dr Liang Zhang

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFW2631 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF3121, BFF3121, AFG3121, AFW3121, BFG3121, BFB3121, AFW3046

Synopsis

On completion of this subject students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the conceptual foundations of modern portfolio theory, using pricing models and other techniques in the valuation of securities; appreciate the effect of market efficiency on the valuation process; measure portfolio risk and determine performance benchmarks; and be able to take an applied perspective on investment management and analysis in the Australian environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate financial market information to measure risk and return
  2. describe modern portfolio theory
  3. apply asset pricing models and valuation techniques to the valuation of assets
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with investments and portfolio management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFW3121.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW3331 - International banking and finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yessy Arnold

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFW2401 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF3331, BFF3331, AFX3871, BFX3871, AFW3331

Synopsis

The international monetary system, debt and country risk, the foreign exchange market, international financing strategies and techniques, the Euro-markets, and multinational banking.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the parity principles and the concept of arbitrage in international financial markets
  2. explain how currency derivative contracts such as forwards, futures, options and swaps can be used to hedge in the foreign exchange markets
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation banking and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFW3331.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW3540 - Modelling in finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Keshab Man Shrestha

Coordinator(s)

Professor Keshab Man Shrestha

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Topics include the development and application of financial spreadsheets, Excel and Visual Basic programming in financial modelling, modelling company financial statements, fixed income securities analysis, asset allocation and portfolio analysis, optimization using Solver, Interest rate models, option pricing models, numerical methods and risk management models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are:

  1. apply knowledge and skills in the use of Excel and Visual Basic
  2. develop skills in the design and implementation of efficient and robust financial models such as option pricing, portfolio and interest rate models
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced modelling in finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFW3540.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW3651 - Treasury management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sockalingam Ramasamy

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFW2401 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF3651, BFF3651, AFW3651

Synopsis

Treasury functions; risk assessment evaluation; strategy formulation and implementation; liquidity and cash management; audit and control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role of treasury operations in an international or a local bank
  2. describe how risk management processes work
  3. demonstrate the application of hedging techniques used in banks'' treasury operations
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with treasury management and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFW3651.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW3652 - Corporate treasury and credit management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Teh Chee Ghee

Coordinator(s)

Dr Teh Chee Ghee

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFW1001 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit explores the roles, responsibilities and organisation of the treasury and credit control functions in non-financial firms, best practices and approaches to managing such functions, the performance measurement thereof, and the finance principles applying to corporate treasury and credit management.

Areas covered include the theory and practice of financial risk management, cash and liquidity management for non-financial institutions, capital markets and funding, formulation of credit extension policy, credit evaluation, monitoring and control, debt collections, behavioural finance aspects of combating late payment of receivables, debts recovery, and using internet technology and tapping into the capital markets, credit rating agencies and other market intelligence, to make informed cash and credit management decisions in today's borderless, fast-paced and challenging business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and describe the scope of corporate treasury and credit management and how effective cash and credit management can support and add-value to the corporation
  2. understand the roles and responsibilities of the corporate treasurer and the credit controller and identify approaches to managing a corporate treasury and credit control department within the organisation and within the department itself
  3. apply financial knowledge and skills to identify and implement appropriate strategies to manage key corporate treasury and credit risks
  4. develop financial and behavioural skills in the implementation and application of efficient cash and cash flow management, credit control strategies to optimise the cash flow of the businesses
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with corporate treasury and credit management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFW3652.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW3841 - Credit analysis and lending management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sockalingam Ramasamy

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFW2401 and BFW2631 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

AFF3841, BFF3841, AFW3841

Synopsis

Lending environment; decision making and organisation of lending, lending policies and controls; behavioural aspects of decision making and decision-makers; retail, commercial and corporate lending; business expansions; off balance sheet lending; loan management and problem loans.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply appropriate analysis techniques to particular loan facilities
  2. analyse the risk return characteristics (and pricing) of a loan application
  3. examine the major types of lending products and gain the ability to match these products to customer needs
  4. investigate the behavioural aspects of decision making and decision makers
  5. describe statistical techniques used in decision making at the approval, monitoring and termination stages of lending
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with lending decisions and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFW3841.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFW3851 - Behavioural finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gary Rangel

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

BFC2140, BFW2631, BFC2000 or BFW1300

Synopsis

Historically, investment and finance decisions have been made with the assumption that financial markets are informationally efficient. This unit will explore the notion that market efficiency assumptions are idealistic by bringing in the concepts of psychology, sociology, and behavioural economics and how the investor mind works in a broader societal setting. This will allow for better understanding of the investor's mind, resulting in intelligent investment practices. This unit is interdisciplinary, encompassing areas such as financial economics and cognitive sciences with both experimental and theoretical components.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the conventional assumptions learned from mainstream finance theories and demonstrate the extent to which these assumptions do not hold when examined in a behavioural context
  2. understand how cognitive biases can predictably and consistently affect investment decision and how they can contradict the notion of investor rationality
  3. understanding how these behavioural biases will help develop more effective financial decision making for different market participants
  4. critically evaluate the linkage between the theoretical and empirical evidence related to behavioural finance
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with behavioural finance and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BFW3851.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX3355 - Property investment

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tze Choo

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units: AFC2140, BFB2140, BFC2140, BFF2140, BFP2140, BFW2140, BFF2631 or AFF2631 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX3355

Synopsis

This unit considers characteristics of property investment, valuation of real estate assets, real estate market analysis, the role of equilibrium asset pricing models, real estate and portfolio theory, measurement of risk and return, indices and pricing models, the effect of leverage and taxation, real estate in mixed asset portfolios, listed and unlisted property trusts, property management and development projects.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse investments in asset classes with particular emphasis on property
  2. critically examine the different types of property, characteristics of property markets, the role of professional investors and managers and the nature of investment vehicles employed
  3. explain property cycles and the role of property in investment portfolios
  4. evaluate property based on risk of cash flows
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with property investment and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX3355.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX3871 - International study program in banking and finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Zoltan Murgulov

Coordinator(s)

Dr Zoltan Murgulov

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit: AFC2140, BFB2140, BFC2140, BFF2140, BFP2140, BFW2140, AFF2401, BFF2401, AFF2631, BFF2631, AFG2631, BFG2631, AFW2401, BFW2401, BFW2631 or AFW2631

Prohibitions

AFX3551, ACX3551, AFX3871

Synopsis

The unit is designed to provide students with the conceptual foundations of the functions and institutions of the international financial system. To impart an understanding and appreciation of the current issues underlying the international area of finance, and to develop a practical understanding of the markets and financial techniques used by international banks and multinational organisations. To develop a practical understanding and appreciation of cultural differences within the area of international banking and finance through an overseas visitation program.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast the structure of banking and financial markets internationally through an international study program
  2. explain parity theories and their application to foreign exchange markets
  3. develop a practical understanding and appreciation of culture in the development of national banking and finance activities
  4. evaluate academic and professional papers in international banking and finance
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with international banking and finance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4000 - Research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Philip Gray

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Synopsis

Students will be introduced to research methodologies used in finance and will prepare a research proposal. The primary focus is on understanding the process of scientific research, which includes topic identification, literature review, hypothesis development, data requirements and appropriate empirical methodologies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. prepare a research proposal in finance
  2. prepare a literature review that demonstrates knowledge of essential literature
  3. develop research questions and testable hypotheses
  4. devise empirical methodologies appropriate for testing the research hypotheses
  5. develop technical and computing skills that facilitate research
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with research methods and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 75% + Examination: 25%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4018 - Honours research thesis

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Huu Nhan Duong

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BFX4000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Synopsis

Students conduct a critical review of the literature relevant to their study; derive appropriate hypotheses for testing; devise an empirical test of the hypotheses showing regard to practical problems of conducting research, ethical considerations, and principles of scientific method; conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising in the data collection; select and conduct an appropriate analysis of the data; and write a report on the project, showing due regard to relevant stylistic conventions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. implement a research proposal
  2. recognise practical problems of conducting scientific research and propose solutions
  3. complete a research dissertation
  4. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research dissertation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 432 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average seven/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4030 - Advanced modelling in finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Daniel Chai

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181, 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4030

Synopsis

This unit has two key components. The first half covers aspects of theoretical and empirical financial modelling, including modelling the stock price behaviour, consumption-based asset pricing models, multifactor models, two beta, ICAPM, intertemporal asset pricing models, mean-variance frontier and beta representations, bayesian alphas and mutual fund persistence, a bayesian and bootstrap analysis, performance measures of the hedge fund returns. The second half covers technical skills in building Excel models to solve problems in Finance. The aim is to bridge the gap between financial theory and practice. To achieve this, students will learn modelling skills in Excel and be introduced to VBA programming concepts and techniques.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply advanced knowledge and skills in the use of Excel and Visual Basic
  2. develop advanced skills in the design and implementation of efficient and robust financial models such as option pricing, portfolio and interest rate models
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced modelling in finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4030.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4060 - Issues in corporate finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Yulia Veld-Merkoulova

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181, 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4060

Synopsis

The objective of this course is to develop critical economic reasoning and understanding of important empirical regularities in corporate finance. This unit builds on introductory corporate finance studies and analyses a variety of issues by introducing a study of recent empirical literature. There is a strong focus on research with a selective and critical examination of theoretical and empirical research in corporate finance. The advanced topics covered include market efficiency and event studies, security offerings, corporate takeovers, and capital structure, dividend policy, corporate governance and financial tunnelling.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire knowledge of empirical findings in corporate finance
  2. develop an ability to conceptualise and analyse issues in corporate finance at a sound level of understanding and be in a position to make a significant contribution in setting firm financial policy
  3. critically evaluate underlying theories, concepts, assumptions, limitations and arguments in corporate financial theory
  4. develop analytical skills via understanding the intuition and logic behind recent academic research and the possible extension to the recent research
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4060.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4080 - Issues in banking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Barry Williams

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181, 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4080

Synopsis

This unit draws on the academic literature to provide a study of a range of topics relating to banking and finance. It presents a basis for students intending to undertake research into banking and related finance questions. Topics covered include theory of financial intermediation, risk management, efficiency assessment, competition modelling and bank regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss existing theory in the field of banking and its evolution
  2. critically assess the usefulness and limitations of this theory in the field of banking
  3. apply this theory to relevant current policy issues
  4. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in banking
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in banking and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4080.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BFX4120 - Issues in investments

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Banking and Finance

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Philip Gharghori

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX4120

Synopsis

This unit will examine empirical research in asset pricing and investments. It will develop students knowledge and ability to apply empirical techniques to conduct research in asset pricing and investments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse research papers examining current issues in asset pricing and investments
  2. critically evaluate research methodologies applicable to empirical finance research
  3. demonstrate an ability to conduct research in asset pricing and investments
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in investment and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BFX4120.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTB1010 - Commercial law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Christopher Coney

Coordinator(s)

Mr Christopher Coney

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students enrolled in course code 0816 must be granted permission to undertake this unit.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B2007 or B2026.

Prohibitions

BTC1110, BTG1200, BTW1200, BTF1010, BTP1010

Synopsis

Liability for defective products; liability for misleading advice or information; contract law; agency law; partnership law; introduction to company law; company officers' duties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine common commercial law scenarios relating to: the supply of defective goods and services; contract disputes; misrepresentations; agency relationships; partnership law; and company law
  2. identify legal problems and risks which arise in those scenarios
  3. describe the laws relevant to those scenarios
  4. analyse and apply the laws to predict possible legal outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTB2220 - Corporations law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Christopher Coney

Coordinator(s)

Mr Christopher Coney

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTB1010 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTC2210, BTF2220, BTG2220, BTW2220Not offered in 2018, BTC2213, BTW2213.

Synopsis

Topics include the Corporations Act scheme; the role and functions of the Australian Securities and Investments Commission; the concept of limited liability; the effect of registration; the corporate constitution; the company's relationship with outsiders; share and loan capital; regulation of public fund raising; duties of directors, officers and promoters; rights of members and minority shareholder protection; forms of corporate insolvency administrations, particularly as they affect creditors, officers and shareholders.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the important elements in the internal and external regulation of companies and how they may be used
  2. explain the nature of trusts, the way they operate, and the rights and obligations of people involved in or dealing with trusts
  3. analyse hypothetical case studies and formulate a legal argument by the application of statute and case law
  4. critically evaluate the effectiveness of aspects of corporate law in the context of the changing needs of the community.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTB3221 - Taxation law and practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Jonathan Teoh

Coordinator(s)

Mr Jonathan Teoh

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTB1010 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTC3150, BTF3931, BTG3221, BTW3221Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to Australian income tax law and practice. Topics include: Australian tax jurisdictional issues, assessable income from personal exertion, property and business, capital gains tax and fringe benefits tax, exempt income, deductions, both general and specific, GST, individual offsets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the constitutional and administrative framework in which the federal taxation system operates
  2. describe fundamental tax concepts, such as the concepts of income, capital, deductible expenses, residence of the taxpayer, source of income and derivation of income
  3. critically analyse the fundamental distinctions between receipts of income and capital, and deductible and non-deductible outgoings
  4. calculate the taxable value of various fringe benefits
  5. describe the major elements of both the GST and CGT regimes
  6. analyse, and apply, legislative provisions and court decisions relating to taxation matters.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTB3281 - Marketing law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Paul Sugden

Coordinator(s)

Mr Paul Sugden

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTC3300, BTF3181, MKC3300Not offered in 2018, BTW3281

Synopsis

This unit involves a study of the legal framework which operates in relation to marketing decisions and practice. It examines the impact of common law, legislation and self-regulating codes of practice in the market place. Particular topics covered include intellectual property rights, product development and promotion, product safety and quality, the regulation of unfair and anti-competitive conduct and electronic marketing and the law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse, and apply the laws protecting intellectual property to the development and marketing of a range of new products and ideas
  2. analyse and apply the consumer protection laws to a range of marketing and advertising strategies
  3. analyse and apply the laws regulating a range of marketing practices including pricing and distribution
  4. formulate the legal protection of a product or idea using the intellectual property, marketing and consumer protection laws.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTB3350 - Business taxation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: BTB1010, BTC1110, BTF1010, BTG1200, BTP1010, BTW1042 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTG3242, BTC3350Not offered in 2018, BTX3350

Synopsis

Topics covered include taxation of business entities, tax planning issues on acquisition and disposal of a business, retirement (superannuation) and estate planning, tax administration and anti-avoidance and tax agent ethics covering the obligations under the Tax Agents Services Act 2009.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  • describe the taxation issues associated with specific business regimes including the Small Business Tax System
  • analyse the tax frameworks that apply when conducting a business through Companies, Trusts, Partnerships or Sole Proprietors
  • analyse business transactions in the tax administration and anti-avoidance rules
  • apply the appropriate taxation rules that govern purchases and sales of a business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTC1110 - Commercial law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Roger Gamble (First semester)
Dr Aashish Srivastava (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Roger Gamble (First semester)
Dr Aashish Srivastava (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Student must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 0023, 0032, 0169, 0170, 0179, 0542, 0548, 1185, 1319, 1320, 1469, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2026, 2630, 3050, 3176, 3178, 3275, 3280, 3804, 3805, 3823, 3830, 3834, 4097, 4403, 4410, 4417, 4419, 4425, 4428, 4615 or 4097.

Prohibitions

BTB1010, BTF1010, BTP1010, BTG1200, BTW1200

Synopsis

An introduction to legal studies and to the legal system of Australia with special emphasis on commercial aspects. The laws of negligence as it affects business and the professional is introduced, and aspects of the law of contract, consumer law, agency, partnership, trusts and an introduction to companies of relevance to commerce.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the essential features of the Australian legal and political system and compare and contrast the two principal law-making institutions--the courts and the parliaments--and the laws they make
  2. describe and analyse some of the legal concepts that underpin commercial activity in Australia and describe the different conceptual bases of legal liability
  3. describe and analyse key areas of normative commercial law such as contract law, tort law, agency law and business organisations
  4. conduct basic legal research using basic primary and secondary sources
  5. critically analyse a hypothetical legal problem and clearly and coherently advise a hypothetical client on the relevant legal issues that are raised in that problem and support the advice by reference to primary sources.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTC2000 - Australian company law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vivien Chen (First semester)
Ms Anne O'Rourke (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vivien Chen (First semester)
Ms Anne O'Rourke (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTC1110 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTX2000, BTC2210, BTB2220, BTF2220, BTG2220, BTW2220Not offered in 2018.

Synopsis

Topics covered in this course include: the separate legal entity status of companies and the concept of limited liability; the effect of registration; the corporate constitution and Replaceable Rules; the company's relationship with outsiders; corporate management incorporating extensive consideration of directors duties; share capital; regulation of public fund raising; members remedies covering statutory and common law rights of action; members meetings; and forms of corporate insolvency administration.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the significance and functions of corporations as legal structures that facilitate the carrying on of business
  2. identify, explain and apply legislation and case law to the internal and external regulation of corporations
  3. develop skills in legal problem solving and analyse legal problems relating to corporations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTC3150 - Taxation law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ken Devos (First semester)
Mrs Nance Frawley (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ken Devos (First semester)
Mrs Nance Frawley (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTC1110 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTB3221, BTF3931, BTG3221, BTW3221Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

An introduction to Australian taxation. Topics include residence and source; assessable income; capital gains; GST; FBT; allowable deductions including repairs, deductions and substantiation; and individual offsets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and apply the appropriate taxation law for various income and capital receipts in given fact situations
  2. analyse and apply the appropriate taxation law for both general and specific deductions in given fact situations
  3. calculate the taxable value of various fringe benefits
  4. describe the major elements of both the GST and CGT

    To practice as a tax agent in Australia, an accountant is expected to be registered with the Commonwealth Government's Tax Practioner's Board. This unit has been designed to satisfy the requirements of one of two courses required for registration as a tax agent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTC3200 - Finance law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Robin Edwards

Coordinator(s)

Mr Robin Edwards

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

BTC1110 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Aspects of the legal and regulatory environment that affects financial decisions, transactions and relationships. Includes the laws regulating financial institutions and the banker/customer relationship; cheques; electronic payments; bills of exchange; bank lending, business finance and security; consumer credit; guarantees and bankruptcy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the legal and regulatory environment of the banking and finance sector
  2. analyse the legal and regulatory concepts underlying banking and financial transactions
  3. understand the legal rights and obligations of those involved in banking and finance
  4. have developed a legal perspective to assist in decision-making in areas involving banking and finance
  5. to provide the legal background for the resolution of business problems involving banking and finance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTC3300 - Marketing law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Paul Sugden

Coordinator(s)

Mr Paul Sugden

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTC1110 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTB3281, BTF3181, BTW3281, MKC3300Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The legal framework which operates in relation to marketing decisions and practice. The impact of common law, legislation and self-regulating codes of practice in the market place. Particular topics include intellectual property rights, product development and promotion, product safety and quality, the regulation of unfair and anti-competitive conduct, franchising and electronic marketing and the law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse the consumer protection laws and apply those laws to a range of marketing and advertising strategies
  2. identify and analyse the laws protecting intellectual property and apply those laws to the development and marketing of new products and ideas
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws regulating a range of competition practices including pricing and distribution
  4. develop an ability to research and critically evaluate developments in marketing law.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTC3350 - Business taxation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Jonathan Teoh

Coordinator(s)

Mr Jonathan Teoh

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: BTC1110, BTF1010, BTG1200, BTP1010, BTW1042 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTB3350Not offered in 2018, BTG3242, BTX3350

Synopsis

Topics covered include taxation of business entities, tax planning issues on acquisition and disposal of a business, retirement (superannuation) and estate planning, tax administration and anti-avoidance and tax agent ethics covering the obligations under the Tax Agents Services Act 2009.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the taxation issues associated with specific business regimes including the Small Business Tax System
  2. analyse the tax frameworks that apply when conducting a business through Companies, Trusts, Partnerships or Sole Proprietors
  3. analyse business transactions in the tax administration and anti- avoidance rules
  4. apply the appropriate taxation rules that govern purchases and sales of a business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF1010 - Business law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Benjamin Hayward (First semester)
Dr Andrew Moshirnia (Second semester)
Mr Mathews Thomas (Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Benjamin Hayward (First semester)
Dr Andrew Moshirnia (Second semester)
Miss Belinda Clarence (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students enrolled in course code 0816 must be granted permission to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

BTB1010, BTP1010, BTC1110, BTG1200, BTW1200

Synopsis

Liability for defective products; liability for misleading advice or information; contract law; agency law; partnership law; introduction to company law; company officers' duties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine common commercial law scenarios relating to: the supply of defective goods and services; contract disputes; misrepresentations; agency relationships; partnership law; and company law
  2. identify legal problems and risks which arise in those scenarios
  3. describe the laws relevant to those scenarios
  4. analyse and apply the laws to predict possible legal outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF2000 - Australian corporations law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jennifer O'Reilly (Caulfield)
Mr Gerald Williams (Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jennifer O'Reilly (Caulfield)
Miss Belinda Clarence (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTF1010 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTX2000, BTC2210, BTB2220, BTF2220, BTG2220, BTW2220Not offered in 2018.

Synopsis

Topics covered in this course include: the separate legal entity status of companies and the concept of limited liability; the effect of registration; the corporate constitution and Replaceable Rules; the company's relationship with outsiders; corporate management incorporating extensive consideration of directors duties; share capital; regulation of public fund raising; members remedies covering statutory and common law rights of action; members meetings; and forms of corporate insolvency administration.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the significance and functions of corporations as legal structures that facilitate the carrying on of business
  2. identify, explain and apply legislation and case law to the internal and external regulation of corporations
  3. develop skills in legal problem solving and analyse legal problems relating to corporations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF2223 - Corporate crime

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Shanthy Rachagan

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Shanthy Rachagan

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTF1010 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTW2223, BTG2223

Synopsis

This subject analyses and evaluates criminal conduct in the business world. It examines conduct within corporate entities which may lead to criminal (or other serious penalties) being imposed on corporations and/or individuals. Areas covered include industrial manslaughter, serious cartel conduct, liability for defective disclosure and insider trading. The subject considers the legal and practical difficulties which arise in detecting and prosecuting corporate crime.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and evaluate the nature of crime, corporate crime and white collar crime
  2. identify and explain various laws relevant to corporate criminality
  3. describe the criminal and other penalties which may be imposed on corporations and individuals
  4. identify and explain the mechanisms for preventing, detecting, investigating and prosecuting corporate crime, including where international co-operation is required
  5. consider the relationship between corporate crime and corporate social responsibility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF2601 - Banking law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Han-Wei Liu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Han-Wei Liu

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTF1010. No prerequisite for students enrolled in course B20032.

Synopsis

Banking Law examines key aspects of the legal regulation of banking in Australia. Topics covered in this lecture include:

  • the current system of banking regulation in Australia
  • the regulation of the "bank-customer" relationship
  • recent banking law reforms after the Global Financial Crisis
  • changes to lending regulation and the National Consumer Credit reforms
  • Australia's new personal property securities law and the Personal Properties Securities Act
  • negotiable instruments and cheques
  • electronic banking.

Outcomes

The learning outcomes for this unit are for students to:

  1. identify the interaction of different areas in the regulation of modern banking in Australia
  2. describe how the "business of banking" is shaped by the Global Financial Crisis, innovation and the public ownership of banks
  3. evaluate and apply key post-Global Financial Crisis banking law reforms in lending and personal property to the lending industry in Australia
  4. understand how the Banking Act 1958 (Cth) regulates liability of parties to a cheque
  5. examine the regulation of electronic banking in Australia in light of new electronic methods of payment through contactless cards like PayWave and PayPass and smart phone technology such as Kaching and Facebook payments.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF3181 - Marketing law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mark Bender

Coordinator(s)

Mr Mark Bender

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTB3281, BTC3300, BTW3281, MKC3300Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The legal framework which operates in relation to marketing decisions and practice. Topics discussed include unfair trading practices, intellectual property rights (patents, trade marks, copyright and designs), anti-competitive conduct and new marketing practices. The unit places the laws controlling unfair and anti-competitive practices within the wider economic context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse the consumer protection laws and apply those laws to a range of marketing and advertising strategies
  2. identify and analyse the laws protecting intellectual property and apply those laws to the development and marketing of new products and ideas
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws regulating a range of competition practices including pricing and distribution
  4. critically evaluate a contemporary marketing law development and write a research paper on the topic.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTF3931 - Taxation law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Nance Frawley (Caulfield)
Mr Jonathan Teoh (Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)

Coordinator(s)

Ms Nance Frawley (Caulfield)
Ms Carole Grey (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTF1010 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTB3221, BTC3150, BTG3221, BTW3221Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Assessable income and exempt income; deductions; capital gains tax; fringe benefits tax; goods and services tax; residence and source; individual offsets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify conceptual structures in the core income tax provisions and apply them in an ordered approach
  2. understand fundamental tax concepts to determine income and deductions, and together with appropriate judicial principles, apply them to personal, business and property scenarios
  3. calculate income tax, CGT and GST liabilities; and the taxable value of fringe benefits
  4. understand the operation of the taxation system; the interaction of GST with other taxes; and some tax accounting principles.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTS1201 - South Africa business law A

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Tinaye Chivizhe

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Term 2 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTW1201

Synopsis

An introduction to the South African legal system, its history, structure, and the sources of law. We examine the following areas of commercial law: the general law of contract as well as specialised areas of contract law including the law relating to sales, negotiable instruments, property law, agency law and credit law. We also introduce the various forms of business organisations and insolvency law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce the South African legal system with an emphasis on its history, structure and sources of law
  2. identify and analyse the law of torts and unjust enrichment
  3. identify and analyse the application of the law as it relates to general as well as specific contracts and negotiable instruments
  4. identify and discuss various forms of business organisations, including the law concerning corporate insolvency
  5. identify and discuss the various aspects of commercial law that are of particular relevance to accountants and auditors.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTS2201 - South African business law B

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Tshepo Mongalo

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTS1201 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTW2201

Synopsis

This unit examines business entities law at an advanced level, with emphasis on the law of partnership, company law, the law of close corporations and the law of business trusts. An examination will also be made of the relevant legal aspects relating to corporate governance with specific emphasis on the role and duties of directors. The law pertaining to auditors and their role in a business entity will be examined as will the law relating to financial reporting and the keeping of financial records by business entities.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and describe various forms of business enterprises in South Africa
  2. provide basic legal advice regarding the choice of business form
  3. discuss, analyse and give advice on the legal structure of the partnership, company, close corporation and business trust
  4. explain and give advice on the rights and duties of the different role-players in the partnership, company, close corporation and business trust
  5. read, analyse and explain the principles of business law from case law and relevant legislation law in terms of the various business forms
  6. explain the effect of recent court decisions regarding the various business forms
  7. analyse a given practical situation in terms of the statutes and common law regarding the various business forms
  8. identify legal problems and apply them to practical problems and provide legal solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTS2301 - South African taxation A

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Teresa Calvert-Pidduck (First semester)
Ms Sadiyya Moola (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTS1201 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTW2301

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the principles and practices of taxation in South Africa. Topics covered include: gross income; special inclusions; exempt income; allowable deductions; special deductions; capital allowances; capital gains tax; value added tax (VAT); and South African tax law. This unit is a requirement for students wanting to register as a Chartered Accountant with the South African Institute of Chartered Accountants (SAICA).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and explain various aspects of the South African taxation system
  2. determine what is included in gross income
  3. evaluate and determine what is exempt and specifically included in taxable income
  4. identify and calculate the special and general deductions/ allowances that are allowed against taxable income
  5. identify transactions that will be subject to capital gains tax and calculate the taxable amount in terms of the relevant provisions
  6. identify transactions that will be subject to Value Added Tax and describe the rules and calculate how they are taxed
  7. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with taxation and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BTS2301.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTS3201 - International trade law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Tinaye Chivizhe

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTS1201 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTW3201, BTC2190, BTF3201, BTG3201

Synopsis

The law affecting Australian enterprises engaged in international business. Topics include international trade conventions; import and export procedures; the sale of goods; carriage of goods by sea and air; bills of lading and the Hague-Visby rules; finance of international trade; payment and documentary credits; the use of negotiable instruments in international trade; international commercial arbitration and marine insurance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine and analyse the international legal framework in which trade between nations take place
  2. identify and analyse the legal issues in an international trade context
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws to solve legal problems that arise from international commercial transactions
  4. identify and analyse the laws relating to international contracts of sale, finance of international trading transactions, international carriage of goods, insurance in international trade and dispute resolution in international trade
  5. identify and analyse the form and nature of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange, documentary collections and letter of credits.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTS3301 - South African business law C

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Rufaro Gweshe

Coordinator(s)

Ms Rufaro Gweshe

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

BTS1201 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTW3301

Synopsis

In this unit we examine the following areas of commercial law: the law of insolvency, the law of insurance, intellectual property law, labour law (with particular attention to individual contracts of employment, collective bargaining and the right to take industrial action) and the laws that affect money laundering and asset forfeiture and confiscation. We also examine various types of alternative dispute resolution available to businesses seeking to settle disputes by means other than litigation. In all instances we examine the substantive law as well as the impact of these laws on business practices.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify, discuss and analyse the laws governing insolvency, insurance and intellectual property
  2. identify, discuss and analyse labour law, including that which pertains to individual contracts of employment, collective bargaining and the right to take industrial action
  3. identify and discuss alternative dispute resolution methods available to businesses by means other than litigation
  4. identify and discuss the laws governing money laundering and asset forfeiture.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30% + Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTS3302 - South African taxation B

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Teresa Calvert-Pidduck (First semester)
Ms Sadiyya Moola (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTW2301 or BTS2301

Synopsis

This unit introduces value added tax (VAT) and includes an examination of the taxation of residents, sole traders, close corporations and companies. It also includes an examination of the tax implications of company distributions and donations. This unit is a requirement for those students following the route to the qualification of Chartered Accountant (South Africa).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the rules and sections of the act regarding value added tax (VAT) and to apply them to calculate VAT in a variety of business transactions and practical scenarios
  2. calculate the tax payable on individuals and businesses
  3. differentiate between categories of business for tax purposes, such as sole traders, individuals, companies and close corporations
  4. explain and describe how donations are taxed and calculate the tax payable in a given set of circumstances
  5. explain provisions regarding dividends and apply the relevant principles in a given set of circumstances
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with taxation and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BTS3302.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTS3303 - South African taxation law C

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Teresa Calvert-Pidduck (First semester)
Ms Sadiyya Moola (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

BTS2301 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTW3303

Synopsis

This unit introduces the accounts of executives, liquidators and trustees and examines how estates are taxed. It also includes an examination of capital gains tax, fringe benefits, retirement benefits, employees' and provisional tax, tax avoidance and administrative procedures, including objection and appeals. This unit is a requirement for those students following the route to the qualification of Chartered Accountant (South Africa).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and explain the South African executors' accounts and prepare such accounts
  2. calculate the tax payable on estates
  3. describe and interpret the provisions regarding employees' tax and provisional tax
  4. describe and explain how the tax system is administered and the process of objection and appeal
  5. explain the difference between tax avoidance and tax evasion and apply the relevant principles in a particular given set of circumstances
  6. identify and describe the fringe and retirement benefits and calculate how they are taxed
  7. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with taxation and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in BTS3303.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW1042 - Malaysian business law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Adnan Trakic (First and Second semester)
Dr Abdul Majid Nabi Baksh (October intake)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Adnan Trakic (First and Second semester)
Dr Abdul Majid Nabi Baksh (October intake)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • October intake 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTB1010, BTC1110, BTF1010, BTP1010, BTW1200

Synopsis

This unit introduces the student to the salient features of the Malaysian legal system, the various dispute resolution techniques and examines the main areas of law that regulate the business environment in Malaysia. The focus of learning is on the law of contract, the law of misrepresentation, agency law, partnership law and aspects of company law. Comparative aspects of Australian laws will be highlighted where relevant.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. deliberate the salient features of the Malaysian legal system, with a focus on its law making institutions, the interpretation of statutes and the various dispute resolution techniques
  2. examine and apply the principles of contract law, misrepresentation and agency law to hypothetical legal problems
  3. examine the legal differences between partnerships and corporations
  4. conduct basic legal research using primary and secondary sources
  5. deliberate Common Law comparative aspects of the above topics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW2122 - South African taxation of businesses

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Coordinator(s)

Mr Keith Jordaan

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

BTW1201 and BTW2121

Synopsis

An introduction to the principles of the taxation of businesses, including an examination of: value-added tax (VAT); capital allowances; business income and expenses; sole traders; partnerships; companies and close corporations; credit agreements and township developers; trust income; capital gains tax; donations tax and administrative procedures.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the South African taxation system as it impacts on businesses
  2. develop the capacity to calculate the tax payable by businesses
  3. develop an understanding of how the tax system differentiates between categories of businesses, such as sole traders, partnerships, companies, close corporations and trusts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30% + Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW2213 - Malaysian company law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Loganathan Krishnan

Coordinator(s)

Dr. Loganathan Krishnan

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTW1042 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTC2213, BTC2210, BTW2220Not offered in 2018, BTF2220, BTG2220, LAW4171

Synopsis

The unit will focus on the law relating to corporate governance in Malaysia. It will begin with the need for good corporate governance in Malaysia and the factors that are involved in ensuring good corporate governance. It will focus on directors' duties and the need for the board to be independent of majority shareholders and their nominated directors and on the role that auditors and shareholders play in ensuring good corporate governance practices. The unit will also include the disclosure obligations of companies and how these rules are currently enforced. In all instances the essential elements of the law is examined, as are the implications of each law on business practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of companies as legal entities
  2. explain the significance of companies as entities for carrying on business in Malaysia
  3. identify and critically evaluate how Malaysian legislation and relevant case law affects the internal and external regulation of companies
  4. demonstrate an awareness of corporate legal theory and law reform.
  5. critically evaluate the effectiveness of aspects of corporate law in the context of the changing needs of the community
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with corporate law and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BTW2213.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW2220 - Corporations law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Abe Herzberg

Coordinator(s)

Mr Abe Herzberg

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

BTW1042 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTF2220, BTG2220, BTC2210, BTC2213, BTW2213.

Synopsis

Topics include the Corporations Act scheme; the role and functions of the Australian Securities and Investments Commission; the concept of limited liability; the effect of registration; the corporate constitution; the company's relationship with outsiders; share and loan capital; regulation of public fund raising; duties of directors, officers and promoters; rights of members and minority shareholder protection; forms of corporate insolvency administrations, particularly as they affect creditors, officers and shareholders.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the important elements in the internal and external regulation of companies and how they may be used
  2. explain the nature of trusts, the way they operate, and the rights and obligations of people involved in or dealing with trusts
  3. analyse hypothetical case studies and formulate a legal argument by the application of statute and case law
  4. critically evaluate the effectiveness of aspects of corporate law in the context of the changing needs of the community.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW2241 - Comparative workplace relations law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gan Joo Ee

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gan Joo Ee

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTW1042 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTC2720, BTF2991, BTG2241, BTG3241, BTW3241

Synopsis

The unit introduces students to the legal framework within which individual employment relations operate in Malaysia and Australia. Topics include important workplace relations issues like the rights and duties underpinning the contract of employment, unfair dismissal, constructive dismissal, discrimination and occupational health and safety law. Selected International Labour Organisation Conventions are analysed in relation to aspects of current employment protection law and policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the legal framework that regulates the relationship between employer and employee in Malaysia and Australia
  2. define and analyse the scope of the contract of employment
  3. evaluate the nature of rights and duties within the employment relationship
  4. discuss the various types of workplace dismissals
  5. explain the role and influence of the International Labour Organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW2313 - Malaysian corporate governance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Elsa Satkunasingam

Coordinator(s)

Ms Elsa Satkunasingam

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

The Unit will focus on the law relating to corporate governance in Malaysia. It will begin with the need for good corporate governance in Malaysia and the factors that are involved in ensuring good corporate governance. It will focus on directors duties and the need for the board to be independent of majority shareholders and their nominated directors and on the role that auditors and shareholders play in ensuring good corporate governance practices. The Unit will also include the disclosure obligations of companies and how these rules are currently enforced. In all instances the essential elements of the law is examined, as are the implications of each law on business practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the political, economic and social factors that contribute towards corporate governance in public listed and government linked companies in Malaysia
  2. describe and analyse the role that directors, auditors, creditors and shareholders as well as the public play in achieving high corporate governance standards
  3. demonstrate awareness of latest developments upholding good corporate governance in foreign jurisdictions
  4. critically analyse the impact if these latest developments are implemented in Malaysia.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW2320 - Current issues in corporate governance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Priya Sharma

Coordinator(s)

Ms Priya Sharma

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

The unit will explore current corporate governance issues in Malaysia and selected Asian developing countries and will involve a comparative study of how developed jurisdictions (Australia, UK, US and Singapore) have resolved these issues. The focus is on issues the role of the board of directors, auditors, shareholders and whistleblowers. The unit will highlight problems and resolutions to improve corporate governance in Malaysia.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce the role of the various stakeholders in upholding good corporate governance
  2. study the impact of regulations and codes in corporate governance and the viability of self-regulation in various jurisdictions
  3. address current issues faced by these stakeholders and the resolution to these issues
  4. propose checks and balances to improve corporate governance in developing countries.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW3153 - Malaysian income tax law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Jeyapalan Kasipillai

Coordinator(s)

Professor Jeyapalan Kasipillai

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTC3153

Synopsis

The topics are similar to those covered by the equivalent Australian income tax law unit BTC3150, but lectures and tutorials will concentrate on the legislation and case law which applies in Malaysia. Topics include background to the Malaysian legal and taxation systems; income for businesses, individuals, companies, partnerships and trusts; deductions; capital allowances (the Malaysian equivalent of depreciation); personal reliefs; tax incentives; the limited capital gains tax; tax administration and tax avoidance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the taxation concept of income
  2. critically assess the major income and deduction components comprising taxable income
  3. identify the main taxable entitles and calculate how they are taxed
  4. analyse and apply the main administrative aspects of income tax law
  5. demonstrate an awareness of current income tax developments in Malaysia.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW3201 - International trade law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Thaatchaayini Kananatu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Thaatchaayini Kananatu

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTW1042 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTC2190, BTF3201, BTG3201

Synopsis

The law affecting Australian enterprises engaged in international business. Topics include international trade conventions; import and export procedures; the sale of goods; carriage of goods by sea and air; bills of lading and the Hague-Visby rules; finance of international trade; payment and documentary credits; the use of negotiable instruments in international trade; international commercial arbitration and marine insurance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine and analyse the international legal framework in which trade between nations take place
  2. identify and analyse the legal issues in an international trade context
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws to solve legal problems that arise from international commercial transactions
  4. identify and analyse the laws relating to international contracts of sale, finance of international trading transactions, international carriage of goods, insurance in international trade and dispute resolution in international trade
  5. identify and analyse the form and nature of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange, documentary collections and letter of credits.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW3221 - Taxation law and practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Jonathan Teoh

Coordinator(s)

Mr Jonathan Teoh

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

BTW1042 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTC3150, BTB3221, BTG3221, BTF3931

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to Australian income tax law and practice. Topics include: Australian tax jurisdictional issues, assessable income from personal exertion, property and business, capital gains tax and fringe benefits tax, exempt income, deductions, both general and specific, GST, individual offsets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  • describe the constitutional and administrative framework in which the federal taxation system operates
  • describe fundamental tax concepts, such as the concepts of income, capital, deductible expenses, residence of the taxpayer, source of income and derivation of income
  • critically analyse the fundamental distinctions between receipts of income and capital, and deductible and non-deductible outgoings
  • calculate the taxable value of various fringe benefits
  • describe the major elements of both the GST and CGT regimes
  • analyse, and apply, legislative provisions and court decisions relating to taxation matters.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW3233 - Conventional and Islamic finance law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Adnan Trakic

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTW1042 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit covers the main areas of conventional and Islamic financial regulations. This includes aspects of the legal environment that affect financial decisions, transactions and relationships in both conventional and Islamic finance. Topics covered are chosen from the laws regulating the financing implications of different forms of business organisation; financial institutions and the financial institutions/customer relationship; cheques; the laws regulating business finance and security and guarantees.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse conventional and Islamic finance law problems with the necessary awareness to plan and structure an appropriate answer
  2. effectively apply problem solving strategies that includes clear presentment of a legal argument, and critical and creative thinking
  3. identify, evaluate and implement appropriate strategies for resolution of conventional and Islamic finance law problems
  4. be innovative in resolving conventional and Islamic finance law problems
  5. be able to reference sources of information in written work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW3243 - Finance law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Shanthy Rachagan

Coordinator(s)

Ms Shanthy Rachagan (Malaysia)

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200, BTW1200 or BTW1042 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC3200Not offered in 2018, BTC4320

Synopsis

Aspects of the legal environment that affects financial decisions, transactions and relationships. Topics covered are chosen from the laws regulating the financing implications of different forms of business organisation; financial institutions; cheques, banking and the banker-customer relationship; electronic funds transfer; other negotiable instruments; the laws regulating business finance and security; hire-purchase and consumer credit; guarantees; bankruptcy and insolvency law, and debt recovery.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the core legal principles underlying the banker customer contract
  2. discuss the legal nature and uses of cheques
  3. define the legal issues in taking security for a loan with reference to mortgages and company charges
  4. examine key aspects of corporate and personal insolvency and its consequences
  5. evaluate and apply this knowledge to real world, practical examples.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW3281 - Marketing law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Loganathan Krishnan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Loganathan Krishnan

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTB3281, BTC3300, BTF3181, MKC3300Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit involves a study of the legal framework which operates in relation to marketing decisions and practice. It examines the impact of common law, legislation and self-regulating codes of practice in the market place. Particular topics covered include intellectual property rights, product development and promotion, product safety and quality, the regulation of unfair and anti-competitive conduct and electronic marketing and the law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse, and apply the laws protecting intellectual property to the development and marketing of a range of new products and ideas
  2. analyse and apply the consumer protection laws to a range of marketing and advertising strategies
  3. analyse and apply the laws regulating a range of marketing practices including pricing and distribution
  4. formulate the legal protection of a product or idea using the intellectual property, marketing and consumer protection laws.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTW3300 - South African administration of deceased and insolvent estates

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Coordinator(s)

Ms Jeanne Nel
Ms Nazreen Shaik-Peremanov

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

BTW1201

Synopsis

An introduction to the principles of estate duty and planning. An examination of the administration of deceased estates and insolvent estates including the following: Principles of testate and intestate succession, role of the Master of the High Court, executor's role and the executor's account, application for sequestration and acts of insolvency, consequences of sequestration, role of the trustee, trustee's accounts, preferential creditors, encumbered assets, contribution, claim withdrawal, composition, insolvent deceased estates and partnerships, grounds for and methods of winding-up companies and close corporations, judicial management and rehabilitation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply principles of testate and intestate succession
  2. develop an understanding of the role of the Master of the High Court and the executors role over the executors account
  3. examine the laws applicable to encumbered assets, claim withdrawal and grounds for and methods of winding-up companies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30% + Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX3100 - Sustainability regulation for business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Wayne Gumley

Coordinator(s)

Mr Wayne Gumley

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTF3100, BTC3100

Synopsis

This unit examines regulatory responses to global ecological problems such as climate change, biodiversity loss and natural resource depletion, including consideration of legal principles adopted by international environmental agreements and their interactions with traditional property rights and common law regimes, industrial pollution and waste control legislation, and market based strategies, with particular focus upon the role of corporations and business managers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and understand the causes and impacts of global ecological problems
  2. understand how principles of international environmental law have been incorporated into national and local environmental regulation
  3. understand and analyse the legal risks and responsibilities of corporations and business managers in connection with both local and global environmental problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX3110 - International trade law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mathews Thomas (First semester, Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Mathews Thomas (First semester)
Dr Giovanni Di Lieto (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Prohibitions

BTF3201, BTG3201, BTW3201, BTC2190

Synopsis

International trade and commerce is increasingly central to business operations in Australia and around the world. This unit provides a comprehensive introduction to the legal framework governing international trade and commerce, with a particular focus on trade in goods. The unit begins by introducing the key principles of law that govern trade relations between nation states and addresses broader policy questions such as how these international laws have impacted the ability of nation states, such as Australia, to regulate trade for the purposes of protecting animal welfare and the environment and food and product safety.

The unit also introduces the fundamental contracts, documents and processes involved in international sales transactions. These include the international contract of sale, contracts of air and sea carriage, marine insurance and international payments. The unit focuses on the framework of laws, principles and other instruments within which business professionals operate when concluding and performing these contracts. The principal rights and obligations of the parties and the available remedies are analysed for the purpose of ensuring that traders are aware of and able to avoid the legal risks inherent in international commerce.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and analyse the key disciplines of international trade law governing the trade relations between nation states and their impact on domestic regulation, in particular domestic regulation for health and environmental protection
  2. understand the principal legal rights, obligations and remedies available to the parties in fundamental international commercial contracts, which include sales, carriage, marine insurance, payments and arbitration
  3. be able to identify, avoid and resolve the legal problems that arise in international commercial transactions by explaining and analysing the relevant rights, obligations and remedies available to the parties
  4. develop problem-solving, research and writing skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX3130 - Stock exchange and derivatives law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Andrew Serpell

Coordinator(s)

Dr Andrew Serpell

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BTF3091

Synopsis

Aspects of the legal and regulatory environment of the securities and futures industries, which derives from the interaction of statute law, case law, ASIC releases and ASX rules. Includes the regulation of financial services intermediaries by statute, case law and administration by ASIC and ASX; market regulation by ASIC and ASX; liability for misstatements and non-disclosure about financial products; licensing of brokers and investment advisers; the relationship of broker and client; conduct of securities and futures business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of the regulation of financial markets
  2. analyse the co-regulatory roles of ASIC and ASX
  3. describe the effect of misleading or deceptive conduct in financial markets
  4. evaluate the impact of co-regulation on the financial services industry
  5. critically analyse the regulation of market manipulation and insider trading.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX3350 - Business taxation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Diane Kraal

Coordinator(s)

Dr Diane Kraal

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: BTC1110, BTF1010, BTG1200, BTP1010, BTW1042 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTB3350Not offered in 2018, BTG3242, BTC3350Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Topics covered include taxation of business entities, tax planning issues on acquisition and disposal of a business, retirement (superannuation) and estate planning, tax administration and anti-avoidance and tax agent ethics covering the obligations under the Tax Agents Services Act 2009.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the taxation issues associated with specific business regimes including the Small Business Tax System
  2. analyse the tax frameworks that apply when conducting a business through Companies, Trusts, Partnerships or Sole Proprietors
  3. analyse business transactions in the tax administration and anti- avoidance rules
  4. apply the appropriate taxation rules that govern purchases and sales of a business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX3650 - Sports law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Matt Nichol

Coordinator(s)

Mr Matt Nichol

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

BTB1010 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BTP3650

Synopsis

Students will examine the role of law and regulation in the context of sport and policy. Topics include the regulation of labour, unions and collective bargaining, performance enhancing drugs and negligence in sport.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the key forms of legal and non-legal regulation in elite sport
  2. evaluate the role of internal and external regulation and regulatory actors in elite sport
  3. understand how legislation and common law regulates sports leagues, governing bodies in sport and the labour of athletes
  4. map the legal and non-legal regulation of major professional sports reviewed in the unit
  5. identify and describe contemporary legal issues in elite sport.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX3699 - Insolvency

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Michael Duffy

Coordinator(s)

Mr Michael Duffy

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTC1110 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an understanding of the general law of insolvency within an Australian context. The focus is on both personal insolvency through the bankruptcy process and corporate insolvency through liquidations, administrations and receiverships. The unit examines the role of insolvency administrators, the structure of such administrations, the effect on insolvents and the effect on creditors. There is also some discussion of the regulation of insolvency administrators.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the purposes of insolvency laws and how they operate in relation to individuals and corporations
  2. identify, explain and apply legislation and case law to the operation of insolvency administrations and situations
  3. develop skills in problem solving and analyse legal problems relating to insolvency situations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX3900 - Research project in business law or taxation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Nicola Charwat (First semester)
Dr Chenxia Shi (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Nicola Charwat (First semester)
Dr Chenxia Shi (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed 12 credit points from units owned by the Department of Business Law and Taxation.

Synopsis

This unit offers students an option to complete a unit by way of a research project. The project requires a student to undertake guided research on a topic taken from a business law and taxation unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse various methodological approaches to business law
  2. identify an area in the contemporary commercial environment that presents business law or taxation issues
  3. research, analyse and evaluate those issues using the methodologies previously studied
  4. construct a framework to discuss the results
  5. prepare and present a research paper.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX3991 - Employment law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ingrid Landau

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ingrid Landau

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

BTF1010 or equivalent

Prohibitions

BTF2991, BTC2720

Synopsis

This unit examines the legal implications of management-staff relationships, covering topics such as the contract of employment, recruitment law, discrimination law, terminations including unfair and wrongful dismissals, mutuality of legal rights and obligations, health and safety law in the workplace, vicarious liability, as well as industrial action and constitutional considerations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. extend knowledge and comprehension of the legal framework governing workplace relations in Australia
  2. evaluate the principles underlying employment laws and assess the law's impact on the employment relationship
  3. demonstrate a working knowledge of employment law issues through the application of legal principles to a range of hypothetical scenarios
  4. identify and analyse current issues involving legal regulation of the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


BTX4110 - Directed studies

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Michelle Welsh (First semester)
Dr Benjamin Hayward (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Michelle Welsh (First semester)
Dr Benjamin Hayward (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 and undertaking the Business Law and Taxation specialisation.

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this unit allows a student independently to gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business law and/or taxation as a foundation for the completion of an honours project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the literature in order to develop subject matter expertise beyond the specific focus of the Honours project
  2. synthesise the literature to inform the student's research topic of choice
  3. critically evaluate academic literature and present in written and oral form key arguments related to the research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Off-campus attendance requirements

On campus only


BTX4130 - Honours research thesis

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Anne O'Rourke (First semester)
Dr Benjamin Hayward (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Ms Anne O'Rourke (First semester)
Dr Benjamin Hayward (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Nil

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 and undertaking the Business Law and Taxation specialisation.

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business law and/or taxation as a foundation to the completion of an honours research project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the literature in order to develop subject matter expertise beyond the specific focus of the honours project
  2. synthesise the literature to inform the students research topic of choice
  3. critically evaluate academic literature and present in written and oral form key arguments related to the research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 432 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average seven/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information

Off-campus attendance requirements

On campus only.


BTX4900 - Research methods and proposal

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Business Law and Taxation

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Anne O'Rourke (First semester)
Dr Benjamin Hayward (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Ms Anne O'Rourke (First semester)
Dr Benjamin Hayward (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 and undertaking the Business Law and Taxation specialisation.

Prohibitions

BTF4900

Synopsis

This unit discusses the fundamental theoretical premises that can frame legal and regulatory research. It explores ways of formulating research question(s) and hypotheses, and identifies assumptions and theories that are relevant in the development of a conceptual framework for research. The topics discussed will cover principles of legal and social scientific methods, such as relational theory, comparative law, regulatory theory, social constructivism, systems theory and critical legal theory). Stress will be placed on developing argument analysis (e.g. avoiding fallacies in reasoning, evaluating and constructing sound arguments). These discussions will clarify the theoretical and practical underpinnings of research design, inform subsequent analyses of how to select different research methods (qualitative, quantitative, mixed), and illustrate key issues associated with the main arguments development in research work. The unit will also examine ways of presenting a compelling theoretical and practical case for legal and regulatory research. Finally, students will prepare a research proposal and report.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enhance students' awareness of the core theoretical and methodological perspectives that underpin research about law and regulation at the honours level
  2. increase students' understanding of the principles involved in producing sound complex arguments as required in writing an approved research project
  3. consider and evaluate material presented in the research and methodology seminar series
  4. apply theoretical and methodological knowledge in the preparation of a research proposal for a research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB1101 - Introductory microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Lionel Frost

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Lionel Frost

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECF1100, ECG1101, ECP1100, ECW1101, ECS1101

Synopsis

An introduction to the study of economics; consumer behaviour; demand and supply and the operation of markets; market efficiency and welfare; welfare effects of international trade; public sector economics; the behaviour of firms and the organisation of an industry; market structures - perfect competition and monopoly; economies of the labour market.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theoretical foundations of economics
  2. understand generic skills essential for progression to upper level units by applying rigorous thinking and understanding to analytical geometric models
  3. appreciate economics as an evolutionary science and its ability to address, in a microeconomic framework, the persistent social and economic problems confronted by society
  4. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB1102 - Introductory macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Lionel Frost

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Lionel Frost

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECG1102, ECW1102, ECS1102, ECF1200

Synopsis

An introduction to the study of economics from a macroeconomic perspective including the following areas of study: trade in a global village, GDP as National Income and Aggregate Expenditure, savings and investment, unemployment, money and the Australian monetary system, aggregate demand and supply in the short and long run, monetary and fiscal policy including the related debates and in particular Australia as an open economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an insight into the product, money, labour and foreign exchange markets
  2. develop skills in the application of economic principles to wider social issues
  3. gain knowledge and understanding of the Australian economy and its operation in an international environment
  4. acquire the basis for more advanced studies in economics
  5. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB2141 - Economics of labour markets

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Lionel Frost

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB1101 or ECG1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECG2141, ECS2141, ECW2141, ECG9170

Synopsis

Topics include the supply of and the demand for labour, education and training, the operation of labour markets, including the role of institutions in the labour market, wage relativities, disadvantaged groups in the labour market, and the role of trade unions. Also included is a study of the macroeconomic implications of wage changes and a consideration of wages policy. Special attention is given to the current labour market conditions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the operation of labour markets by drawing on basic economic principle
  2. think critically about the implications of labour market activity for society
  3. recognise the issues involved in labour market activities through a consideration of issues such as unemployment and labour market disadvantage
  4. apply analytical skills developed through an analysis of continuing change in the labour market and labour market policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB2330 - Macroeconomic policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anupama Sethi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Anupama Sethi

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECB1102 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECB2331Not offered in 2018, ECF2331, ECS2730, ECW2730.

Synopsis

This unit develops analytical skills and fundamental concepts that economists need in order to understand the overall macroeconomic policies. It will cover the cyclical behaviour of the economy; the determinants of the level of national income, money and inflation, interest rate, exchange rate, capital flows, international trade, and the natural rate of unemployment; the role of monetary, fiscal and exchange rate policies in influencing economic activities.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the measurement of income, prices, money and unemployment
  2. distinguish between the short-run and long-run impacts of macroeconomic policy
  3. understand the concepts of aggregate demand, aggregate supply and general equilibrium, and be able to use them for policy analysis
  4. understand the effect of macroeconomic policy on the trade balance, inflation, unemployment and income
  5. be able to critically assess macroeconomic policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB2331 - Macroeconomic and monetary policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anupama Sethi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Anupama Sethi

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECB1102 or ECF1200 or ECG1102 or ECS1102 or ECW1102

Prohibitions

ECF2331, ECS2730, ECW2730

Synopsis

This unit examines the scope for policy to improve macroeconomic performance. It will cover: the cyclical behaviour of the economy; the role of monetary, fiscal and exchange rate policies in influencing economic activities; the implementation and operation of monetary policy; the relationship of exchange rates to monetary policy; major factors determining movements in interest rates and exchange rates in both the intermediate and long terms.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the importance of distinguishing between the short-run and long run impacts of macroeconomic policy
  2. understand the importance of and the differences between monetary, fiscal, and exchange rate policies
  3. be able to critically assess macroeconomic policy
  4. understand the implementation and operation of monetary policy
  5. be familiar with economic factors which are of major interest to bankers and others operating in the finance industry.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB2721 - Trade finance and foreign exchange

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jaai Parasnis

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB1101, ECG1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECF2721, ECG2721, ECW2721

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the topics of international finance and trade. This includes the importance of international finance; the balance of payments accounts; the mechanisms for financing international trade; the effect of macroeconomic policies on trade balance; the determination of exchange rates; the operation of foreign exchange markets and alternative exchange rate systems; foreign investment; foreign exchange risk and operating exposure.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand payments among nations and macroeconomic policies to adjust balance of payments disequilibrium
  2. study the operation of foreign exchange markets and alternative exchange rate systems
  3. acquire essential skills for managing foreign exchange risk and operating exposure
  4. explain multinational corporations in international trade and the mechanisms for financing international trade
  5. demonstrate in the individual assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB2730 - Macroeconomic policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

To be advised

Coordinator(s)

To be advised

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB1102 or ECG1102 or ECW1102 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECG2730, ECW2730, ECB2331Not offered in 2018, ECF2331

Synopsis

This unit develops analytical skills and fundamental concepts that economists need in order to understand the overall macroeconomic policies. It will cover: the cyclical behaviour of the economy; the determinants of the level of national income, money and inflation, interest rate, exchange rate, capital flows, international trade, and the natural rate of unemployment; the role of monetary, fiscal and exchange rate policies in influencing economic activities.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the impact of monetary and government policies on an open economy
  2. explain the policy consequences of consumption and investment decisions
  3. explain how macroeconomic policies affect the trade balance and income.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB2731 - Managerial economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECB1101 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECF2931, ECG2731, ECF2731, ECS2731, ECW2731

Synopsis

This subject reviews the contemporary microeconomic principles in the context most relevant to business people. Market processes, demand patterns, cost structures, market conditions, pricing policies, and the impact of regulation on business decisions are discussed. Cases and problems from the prescribed text, Australian media, and online resources illustrate how economic concepts can be applied to specific industries. Analytical techniques and quantitative tools link the concepts to measurement and managerial decision-making.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how markets work
  2. understand how customers value products
  3. understand which production and cost measures are relevant for decision making
  4. understand how competition affects business decisions on investment, production, and pricing in different market structures
  5. understand how important managerial and marketing decisions are to changes in foreign exchange rates, technology, incomes, government regulations, sources of energy, the balance of payments.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB3121 - Economics of international trade and finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr James Bugden

Coordinator(s)

Dr James Bugden

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECB1102 and ECB2731 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC3690, ECF3121, ECG9121, ECS3121, ECW3121Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit develops an understanding of the theory of international trade. It explains how international trade creates gains for a nation and the effect this has on its economic outcomes, such as economic growth and income distribution. The unit discusses the role of trade policy; tariffs, quotas, subsidies and import discrimination on trade patterns. The unit also looks at the international finance and the foreign exchange markets, with emphasis on stability of the foreign exchange market, exchange rate determination, the balance of payments and the role of exchange rate policies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. draw upon skills developed in micro and macroeconomics to enable students to understand and critically evaluate contemporary policy debates in international trade and finance
  2. develop the ability to use powerful analytical tools to predict the impact of global economic, political and social policies on Australia as a small open economy
  3. recognise the positive welfare effects of worldwide unrestricted trade.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB3143 - Economics of money and banking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wenli Cheng

Coordinator(s)

Dr Wenli Cheng

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ECB1101, ECC1000, ECF1100, ECS1101, ECW1101 or ECP1100, AND one of the following: ECB2330, ECS2730, ECW2730, or ECF2331 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECG3143, ECF3143, ECS3143, ECW3143

Synopsis

This unit is designed to analyse the effect of money on key economic variables such as interest rates, inflation, output, and on the workings of the banking sector. In addition, the unit examines the roles played by the financial system, financial institutions, and central banks, in the process of money creation and the implementation of monetary policy. The unit provides a more detailed discussion of the key issues in the theory and practice of banking and monetary policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a knowledge of the theoretical structure of an open economy with particular emphasis on monetary policy formulation and implementation
  2. develop skills in analysis and prediction for the key economic variables when the economy is faced with internal and external market shocks
  3. be able to use an economic model that allows for competitive international capital markets and floating exchange rates to analyse policy measures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECB3830 - Business, competition and regulation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ECB2731, ECF2731, ECF2931, ECG2731, ECS2731 or ECW2731 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC3830, ECG3830, ECW3830, ECF3900, ECX3900, ECS3830

Synopsis

This unit considers market structures, conduct and performance from the business perspective; economic policy as it affects business, particularly in relation to its dealings with consumers; the variety of approaches to competition and regulation policies from the international perspective; analysis of policies with respect to prices, monopolies, oligopolies and mergers, exclusive dealing, consumer protection and licensing, deregulation and privatisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise differences in market structures and understand how those differences affect firms' competitive behaviour and performance
  2. understand how and why competition causes changes in market structures by way of mergers, acquisitions, vertical integration and diversification
  3. explain the economic rationale for competitive weapons utilised by business in contemporary competitive environment, such as barriers to entry, pricing and advertising strategies, product differentiation, and innovation
  4. explain the rationale for regulation and merits of different theories of regulation
  5. explain the arguments for and against privatisation
  6. understand the main features of national competition policies in the countries of particular interest to Monash University in Australia and overseas
  7. critically evaluate attempts to increase competition in particular industries, e.g. aviation, electricity and telecommunications, where there are ongoing reforms.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC1000 - Principles of microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr James Bugden (First semester)
Dr Wayne Geerling (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr James Bugden (First semester)
Dr Wayne Geerling (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 0023, 0169, 0170, 0179, 0542, 0546, 0548, 1185, 1319, 1320, 1469, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2026, 2630, 3050, 3176, 3178, 3804, 3805, 3823, 3830, 3834, 4097, 4403, 4410, 4417, 4419, 4425, 4428, 4615 or 4097.

Synopsis

The nature and scope of economics; different economic systems; economic policy analysis and evaluation; main bodies of economic thought; examples of household, business and government economic decision problems; consumer choice, product demand and factor supply; enterprise choice, product supply and factor demand; market analyses of contemporary issues; competitive market long run equilibrium; market power; market failure and concerns for efficiency and equity; government involvement in the Australian economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the 'economic way of thinking' about a broad range of individual, business and government choices and decisions
  2. apply economic principles to explain and analyse Australian economic institutions, economic decisions and performance
  3. make informed and critical assessment and criticism of the public debate on many economic policy issues
  4. proceed to the study of other economics units which have an introduction to microeconomics as a prerequisite.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC1100 - Principles of macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jaai Parasnis (First semester)
Dr Anupama Sethi (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jaai Parasnis (First semester)
Dr Anupama Sethi (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000 is recommended

Prohibitions

ECF1200, ECG1102, ECS1102, ECW1102

Synopsis

The scope of macroeconomics and its microeconomic underpinnings; aggregation problems; partial equilibrium and general equilibrium analysis; the circular flow of income as a general equilibrium model; the mutual dependence of financial flows and flows of goods and services; sectoral composition of aggregate demand; business and investment behaviour; government spending and taxation; external balance and determination of current and capital accounts; labour market and aggregate supply; money, credit, and the conduct of monetary policy; inflation and unemployment; macroeconomic effects of deregulation in Australia.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret recent movements in key economic indicators of the Australian and other economies and appreciate some of the definitional and measurement problems associated with the available data
  2. understand the importance of distinguishing between the short-run and long-run impacts of macroeconomic policy
  3. apply economic analysis appropriate to achieving an understanding of the working of the macroeconomy
  4. recognise the significance of Australia's economy in relation to the rest of the world and the implications of this interdependence for the balance of payments and exchange rate.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2000 - Intermediate microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erte Xiao (First semester)
Dr Xiaodong Fan (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Erte Xiao (First semester)
Dr Xiaodong Fan (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students who have not passed ECC1000 must be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC5900, ECX9000

Synopsis

Theory of consumer choice, including applications to income-leisure choice and intertemporal consumption; isoquant theory of production; allocative efficiency and competition and monopoly; models of monopolistic competition and oligopoly; input pricing; microeconomic policies to address problems of market failure.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse decision-making by individual consumers and producers
  2. understand decision making in game-theoretic set ups
  3. analyse price determination in product and input markets under various conditions
  4. analyse and critically evaluate policies designed to affect individual behaviour and market outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2010 - Intermediate macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Qingyuan Du (First semester)
Dr Siew Ling Yew (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Qingyuan Du (First semester)
Dr Siew Ling Yew (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC9010, ECC5901, ECX9010, ETC2110

Synopsis

Keynesian macroeconomics; the open-economy, IS-LM framework and the aggregate demand-aggregate supply framework as a basis for more advanced macroeconomic analysis; principles of monetary and fiscal policy and problems of implementation; alternative theories of aggregate supply; new classical macroeconomics and the implications of imperfect information; new Keynesian macroeconomics and the implications of labour market rigidities; explaining and correcting inflation and unemployment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse systematically the forces that determine changes in macroeconomic performance and living standards in Australia
  2. understand the relationship between the domestic economy and the international economic environment, as reflected in the behaviour of the balance of payments and exchange rates
  3. appraise critically the issues underlying important contemporary policy debates in Australia and elsewhere
  4. appreciate the nature and relevance of some significant recent developments in macroeconomics
  5. engage in rigorous economic analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2300 - Current issues in macroeconomic policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wayne Geerling

Coordinator(s)

Dr Wayne Geerling

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000 and ECC1100

Synopsis

Issues include economic growth and inflation in a global context; international comparisons of policy and performance; objectives of monetary policy and central bank independence; forecasting and practical problems in policy making; financial markets and economic indicators.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the way in which economists apply economic theory and institutional knowledge of relevant parts of the economy to analyse government macroeconomic policy options, and to make recommendations on policy actions
  2. understand and critically evaluate current policy debate on issues of macroeconomic policy
  3. evaluate the contributions and limitations of economic analysis for helping to understand and to evaluate macroeconomic policy options.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2360 - Environmental economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Coordinator(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000 or equivalent.

Synopsis

The role of government in regulating the interaction between the economy and the environment; application of microeconomic theory to environmental problems, including air pollution, climate change and the over-exploitation of open access resources; using the tools such as environmental valuation and cost-benefit analysis to discuss policy options ranging from command and control to market based approaches to address these problems.

Outcomes

After successfully completing this unit students should be able to

  1. explain how the economy and the environment interact
  2. demonstrate the link between environmental problems and the economic concepts of property rights, externalities and non-excludability
  3. critically analyse how market failures contribute to environmental problems, and develop recommendations on how to correct for these.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2400 - Current issues in applied microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Liang Choon Wang

Coordinator(s)

Dr Liang Choon Wang

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit introduces economic ways of looking at everyday life and policy-relevant issues. The emphasis is on the scientific nature of economics and its policy relevance. Issues may include, but not be limited to, the microeconomics of firms, the microeconomics of the welfare state, the microeconomics of transitional economies, individual decision-making process, the microeconomics of social issues, and the microeconomic difficulties in the public sector.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the way in which economists apply economic theories and concepts to analyse various issues
  2. be familiar with the way in which economists evaluate theories and inform policies
  3. critically evaluate and effectively communicate current debates on policy-relevant issues
  4. demonstrate the ability to evaluate the contributions and limitations of economic analysis for understanding and informing policy options.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2450 - Sports economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Booth

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ross Booth

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECF2450Not offered in 2018, ECP2450, ECW2450Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit will cover: demand for sport, sports revenues, the economics of sports broadcasting, the pricing of sports events; why professional team sports leagues form, whether clubs are profit-maximisers or win-maximisers, remedies for competitive imbalance such as player drafts, salary caps and revenue sharing, the role of player associations in professional sport; government subsidies in sport, the economic impact of sports events, stadium financing; case studies of professional team sports leagues in Australia, North America and Europe; globalisation in professional sport, future directions in sport.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the so-called 'peculiar' characteristics of sports markets and the policy conclusions that follow
  2. analyse the role economic incentives play in determining the behaviour of controlling bodies, leagues, clubs, players, fans, sponsors, the media and government
  3. compare and contrast the key features of various sports markets in Australia and overseas
  4. use the economic analysis learnt to develop appropriate policies to address economic problems in the sports industry.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2510 - Economic growth: causes and consequences

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Edwyna Harris

Coordinator(s)

Dr Edwyna Harris

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

ECC3510, ECC4351

Synopsis

The unit surveys the source of economic development during the nineteenth and twentieth century with an emphasis on fluctuations in growth rates. Topics include analysis of climate, geography, institutions, human capital and technology on long-run growth. These topics are intended to enhance students' understanding of why some countries are rich whilst others are poor.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the general outline of economic development
  2. critically examine the major explanations of the dynamics of growth and change in the economy over the last two centuries
  3. develop analytical, written and oral skills by writing long essays
  4. acquire an historical understanding of current economic circumstances.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2600 - Behavioural economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Elias Khalil

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Elias Khalil

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MGC2600

Synopsis

The unit covers the intersection of economics and psychology. The unifying theme is the role of "rationality" with respect to four behavioural clusters: temptations (over-eating); habits of thought (stereotyping); framing effects (is a pay raise too little given the expectation?); and motivational effects (persistence in the pursuit of a career or an ideology). The unit contrasts expected utility theory and its alternative and draws examples from behavioural finance (e.g. the equity premium puzzle which is about the lower than expected prices of financial assets) and from law (e.g. cheating in cooperative efforts). The unit includes laboratory contact hours for behavioural economics experiments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify rational choice and deviations from rationality such as temptations, self-deception, superstitions, and conspiracy theories.
  2. understand habit-governed behaviour and cognitive illusions such as stereotyping.
  3. appreciate why perspective (framing) matters in understanding how people assess gains or losses, along the clich of whether a glass is half-empty or half-full.
  4. appreciate why motivation (when framing is infused with a goal) matters in understanding tenacity in the pursuit of a goal, which may shed light on career commitment, ambition, entrepreneurship, and why historical costs (sunk cost) matter.
  5. explain puzzles in behavioural finance (e.g., equity premium puzzle and the volatility puzzle) and the origin of legal rules concerning equality.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2610 - Game theory and strategic thinking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paola Labrecciosa

Coordinator(s)

Dr Paola Labrecciosa

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Game theory offers a tool for strategic thinking. It can be thought of as the art of beating your rivals, knowing that they are trying to do the same to you. Individuals, firms, governments and nations behave strategically, for good and bad. Over the last few decades, game theory has been developed for the purpose of understanding social phenomena. It has become the major tool used by social scientists to understand, predict and regulate strategic interaction among agents who have conflicting interests. This unit provides an introduction to game theory with an emphasis on real-world cases, including applications in economics and business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify real situations where game theory can be enlightening
  2. put a real situation into game theoretical formalism
  3. manipulate the formalism via game theory to reveal insights
  4. comprehend and critically assess complex strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2800 - Prosperity, poverty and sustainability in a globalised world

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Simon Angus

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Simon Angus

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit examines the process of economic development and its effects on prosperity, poverty and sustainability. The unit begins by studying the sources of prosperity via economic growth in the modern era, with particular reference to the Great Divergence in incomes that started during the 1800s. Second, the unit asks why some economic systems have prospered, whilst others have declined by turning its attention to disparate experiences of world-wide economic growth such as poverty and starvation. Finally we study the effects and prospects for future economic development in the context of environmental sustainability and climate change.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. to introduce economic analysis as a key tool in understanding global movements of capital, labour and goods and services
  2. to use this analysis to identify the underlying causes of economic prosperity, poverty and environmental degradation in the modern global economy
  3. to critically analyse the sources of globalisation at the beginning of the 20th century and in the modern era
  4. to equip students with the economic tools to assess current ideas that aim to alleviate global poverty and secure environmental sustainability.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC2840 - Australian economic institutions and policy

6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Coordinator(s)

Dr Michael White

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECC1000 and ECC1100

Synopsis

The role of economic institutions and the process of institutional change, including the role of interest groups in promoting such change. An overview of Australian economic development sketches the changing environment within which such institutions operate. Key institutions, and changes in institutional structures over time, in selected sectors of the Australian economy, including the agricultural and manufacturing sectors, the labour market and the financial sector, as well as the institutions central to competition and trade policy.

Outcomes

The learning objectives of this unit are to:

  1. understand the role and nature of institutions in a market economy;
  2. appreciate the varying pressures that may lead to change in institutions and institutional structures;
  3. apply theoretical models of institutions and institutional change to the Australian economy;
  4. understand the nature and role of key institutions in selected sectors of the Australian economy;
  5. develop analytical, written and oral skills by writing an essay and presenting a tutorial paper.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3600 - Experimental economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Andreas Leibbrandt

Coordinator(s)

Professor Andreas Leibbrandt

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000 and ETC1000

Synopsis

This unit offers an introduction to experimental economics, its methods, applications, and scope to understand and affect everyday behaviour. Economic experiments have become a popular tool to test economic theory and to understand the causes for individual decisions, social decisions, and behaviours in markets. In this unit we provide examples on how economic experiments are useful to advance theory and predict economic decision-making. In addition, we provide students with the knowledge on how to design, conduct, and apply economic experiments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand economic experiments as a scientific method
  2. understand the scope of economic experiments
  3. identify real situations in which experiments can be enlightening
  4. design an experiment capturing a real situation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3640 - Economics of climate change

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anke Leroux

Coordinator(s)

Dr Anke Leroux

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000

It is recommended that students complete ECC1100

Prohibitions

ECC4364

Synopsis

Climate change is the most significant environmental challenge the world is facing today. It has major implications for the global and domestic economies, including Australia's. This unit conveys the multifaceted nature of the economic problem that climate change represents. Uncertainty and catastrophic risk as well as inter- and intra-generational equity concerns are crucial to the evaluation of climate change impacts and to achieving international action. Options to achieve optimal stabilisation targets and pathways using economic principles and policy are contrasted. The implications of climate change mitigation for key industry sectors are also assessed.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide students with an understanding of the possible impacts of climate change on economies
  2. analyse the economic costs of climate change, and how industries can adapt to climate change at minimum cost
  3. provide students with an understanding of how economic instruments such as carbon taxes and emissions trading schemes can mitigate climate change
  4. analyse how key industries such as electricity and transport can respond to climate change policies and lessen emissions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3650 - Applied general equilibrium economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Janine Dixon

Coordinator(s)

Dr Janine Dixon

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECC2000 and ECC2010 or equivalent; or permission

Prohibitions

ECC4365

Synopsis

Applied general equilibrium economics is the basis of much of the economic modelling widely used today in government and business, in both advanced and developing economies. This unit covers introductory theory and applications of applied general equilibrium modelling and the associated data and computing. The study uses elementary calculus and matrix algebra.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an introductory understanding of all aspects of applied general equilibrium (AGE) economics - theory, data, computing and application
  2. understand how AGE models represent linkages in the economy between industries, households, the government and foreigners
  3. explain, using an AGE model, the micro and macroeconomic effects of selected contemporary policy issues such as real wage rates setting, taxation policy (including carbon tax), the mining boom, the global financial crisis, or natural resource management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20% + Examination: 80%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3660 - Monetary economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Giovanni Caggiano

Coordinator(s)

Dr Giovanni Caggiano

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 and ECC2010 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECC4366

Synopsis

Economics of financial assets, markets, intermediaries, regulation and innovation; money aggregates; behaviour of interest rates; loan funds analysis; risk and term structure of interest rates; adverse selection and moral hazard; independence of central banks; determinants of the money supply and the conduct of monetary policy in Australia; theories of money demand; money supply and economic activity; Keynesian-monetarist debate; transmission mechanisms of monetary policy; money and inflation; monetary implications of budget deficits; volatility in foreign exchange markets; the international financial system; capital controls; role of the IMF; international monetary policy strategy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. principal issues in contemporary monetary theory and policy
  2. nature and functions of the monetary system in a developed economy
  3. factors governing the relationship between monetary forces and economic activity
  4. principles, techniques and problems of implementing monetary policies;
  5. current controversies in monetary policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3670 - Economics of developing countries

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Ranjan Ray

Coordinator(s)

Professor Ranjan Ray

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC4367

Synopsis

This unit provides an analytical framework for studying economic problems of developing countries. We will examine how standard economic theories apply in the presence of market failures and weak formal institutions that characterise developing countries. The key focus is on general problems facing developing countries rather than any specific country or region. It examines specific issues and policy problems that are currently faced by developing nations, including issues such as inequality, poverty, population growth, rural-urban migration, human capital accumulation, gender bias, markets in developing countries, credit constraints and risk and insurance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply basic microeconomic principles and analytical tools to understand, interpret and assess the transport sector and government transport policies
  2. appreciate the special characteristics of the transport sector and the operation of transport markets
  3. recognise the presence and influence of economies of scale and scope, joint costs, price discrimination, peak and off-peak pricing and factors which shape the derived nature of transport demand and the inner-relationships between transport markets and other markets, including land markets.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3690 - International economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Laura Puzzello

Coordinator(s)

Dr Laura Puzzello

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 and ECC2010 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECC4369, ECF3121

Synopsis

Investigation of economic interaction between countries in the context of international exchanges of commodities and assets. Topics include the balance of payments, nominal and real exchange rate determination, international capital movements, foreign debt, structural reform and adjustment policies in the open economy, the gains from international trade, inter-industry trade, tariff policies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. essential features of international trade and asset exchanges
  2. effects of international commodity and capital flows, and of protectionist policies, on domestic economic welfare and other objectives; the foreign exchange market and the specific roles of exchange rates in asset markets and commodity markets
  3. implications of international interdependence for the conduct of national stabilisation policies and thus be able to form factual assessments and constructive criticism of public policy and debate concerning open economy issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3710 - Labour economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Claudio Labanca

Coordinator(s)

Dr Claudio Labanca

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or ECC5900

Prohibitions

ECC4371

Synopsis

This unit introduces various theoretical models of the labour market with a focus on policy-related issues. The unit examines neo-classical explanation of labour supply and demand decisions and addresses how well those theories explain observed patterns in the data. In this unit we shall examine employers' incentives and behaviour that determine the labour demand curve, the interaction between wages, income, and the decision to work, the relationship between wages and undesirable job characteristics, and the incentives for and the effects of educational and training investments and contemporary issues such as labour mobility, discrimination and income inequality.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand employers' incentives and behaviour that determine the labour demand curve, implications of minimum wage laws, and effects of technological change on labour demand
  2. build conceptual frameworks to analyse various aspects of workers' labour supply behaviour such as whether to work for pay as opposed to consuming leisure or working at home without pay, the choice of occupations with different characteristics, workers' decisions to invest in human capital and other investments designed to improve their earning capabilities, and various policy applications that affect workers' choice between work and leisure
  3. examine contemporary issues such as labour mobility, labour market discrimination and income inequality.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3800 - History of economic thought

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Elias Khalil

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Elias Khalil

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 and ECC2010 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC4380

Synopsis

The work of Richard Cantillon, David Hume, Adam Smith, David Ricardo, Thomas Malthus and Karl Marx with special reference to the economics of value, distribution and accumulation. The work of W S Jevons, Alfred Marshall and J M Keynes with special reference to economic policies proposed by those writers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss critically how different economists in the past understood and analysed the economic problem
  2. compare the work on founders of economics such as Adam Smith, David Ricardo, Thomas Malthus, Stanley Jevons, Karl Marx, Alfred Marshall, and others
  3. discuss critically diverse theories of value, growth, rent, and decline of economic society
  4. be familiar with primary sources relating to the major writings that shaped the evolution of economic analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3810 - Public finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Ranjan Ray

Coordinator(s)

Professor Ranjan Ray

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC4381

Synopsis

The relationship between the public and private sectors is explored from the perspective of both public finance and political economy. Theories of public expenditure and revenue generation are introduced to assess the proper scope of the public sector. Additionally, theories of public choice are presented to examine the effectiveness and decision-making process of the public sector.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the basic economic concepts and principles applied in the public finance area
  2. analyse specific policy issues in the area of public expenditure and taxation from the perspectives of both traditional public finance and public choice
  3. critically evaluate contemporary public debate on topics in public finance
  4. understand the usefulness and limitations of economic analysis in the public finance area
  5. identify both market failure and government failure and understand the causes of each.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3830 - Industrial organisation and regulation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chengsi Wang

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chengsi Wang

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC1000, ECC1100 and ECC2000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC4383, ECF3900, ECG3830, ECS3830, ECW3830, ECX3900

Synopsis

Economic policy as it affects business, particularly in relation to its dealings with consumers, and with emphasis on Australian industry and regulation; analysis of policies with respect to prices, monopolies, oligopolies and mergers, exclusive dealing, consumer protection and licensing, corporatisation, privatisation and deregulation; criteria for efficient industry and efficient industry policy; methods for the practical analysis of the performance of industries.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the basis for competition and rationale for regulation, and the basis of different theories of regulation
  2. explain the arguments for and against privatisation
  3. understand the main features of National Competition Policy in Australia, including its impact on segments of society such as rural Australia
  4. understand the variety of approaches to competition policies from the international perspective
  5. critically evaluate attempts to increase competition in particular industries, such as aviation, electricity, telecommunications and other relevant industries, where there are ongoing reforms.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3840 - Mathematical economics

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Birendra Rai

Coordinator(s)

Dr Birendra Rai

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC4384

Synopsis

The unit will cover, in mathematical terms, many of the areas treated more intuitively in first-year microeconomics, e.g. consumer demand, the theory of the firm, equilibrium and Pareto optimum. However, a significant portion of the lectures will deal with topics not covered earlier, such as non-linear programming, game theory, and dynamic optimisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse mathematically many of the basic economic problems introduced in earlier years
  2. apply optimisation analysis to a range of other economic topics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC3860 - Integrated economic modelling

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Simon Angus

Coordinator(s)

Dr Simon Angus
Dr Brett Parris

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC1000 before undertaking this unit

Co-requisites

It is recommended that students study ECC2800 Prosperity, poverty and sustainability in a globalised world

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to enable students to understand some of the complexities of interdisciplinary policy problems, particularly in the areas of sustainable development, and to enable them to design and undertake integrated modelling exercises for themselves. A complex systems science perspective will be adopted, introducing Agent-Based Modelling (ABM) as a flexible and powerful tool for exploring solutions to complex real-world problems. The ABM approach will be demonstrated and critically assessed through several interdisciplinary, integrated economy/sustainability models. Additionally, a flexible ABM modelling platform (NetLogo) will be introduced and demonstrated.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are for students to:

  1. understand some of the complexities of interdisciplinary policy problems, particularly in the areas of sustainable development
  2. comprehend and critically assess the complex systems perspective
  3. critically evaluate agent-based models and their outputs
  4. develop and analyse an agent-based model of an integrated modelling problem
  5. undertake verification, validation, evaluation and assessment of integrated modelling outputs
  6. apply integrated modelling approaches to real-world interdisciplinary economic problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4500 - Long-run economic change

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Gary Magee

Coordinator(s)

Professor Gary Magee

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit will introduce students to the field of long-run economic growth and performance. Two key questions are addressed: why do certain economies persistently perform more successfully than others, and how is leadership in the global economy achieved and maintained? Students completing this unit will be able to explain and describe the pattern of long-term economic growth, leadership and decline in the world economy since the industrial revolution; evaluate the role of culture, institutions and the environment in economic change; and apply the methods of historical economics to contemporary economic debates.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate critically contrasting views about the determinants of long-run economic change
  2. analyse the processes of long-term economic growth and decline
  3. analyse a variety of different approaches, including the historical and institutional, that can be used to supplement traditional economic analysis and policy making
  4. explain and analyse the main issues and debates in the field of historical economics
  5. explain and describe the main contours of the development of the world economy
  6. better contextualize and analyse contemporary economic events.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4650 - Microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Chongwoo Choe

Coordinator(s)

Professor Chongwoo Choe

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Topics include consumer preference theory; choice; demand; technology; profit maximisation and duality; competitive general equilibrium in the context of decreasing, increasing and constant returns; two-part tariffs; expected utility; adverse selection; and moral hazard.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. upgrade their analytical skill for intermediate microeconomics
  2. appreciate and have a basic understanding of the key ideas of advanced microeconomic theory
  3. gain first hand experience in the application of microeconomic principles to the analysis of a range of economic issues
  4. gain the microeconomic techniques to undertake successfully other fourth year units and some fifth year units taught by the Department.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4660 - Macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Solmaz Moslehi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Solmaz Moslehi

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECF5421

Synopsis

Contemporary macroeconomics and recent policy debates, including market clearing and long-run equilibrium; classical dichotomy; money in the global economy; aggregate demand and price rigidity, microfoundations of macroeconomics, disequilibrium models; stock-flow interactions; wealth effects; rational expectations; policy ineffectiveness and Ricardian equivalence; money and credit; exchange rate regimes; new Keynesian macroeconomics; comovements of macro variables and macroeconomic forecasting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be aware of major recent developments in the field of macroeconomics
  2. have a basic understanding of the concepts and techniques of macroeconomic forecasting using an applied general equilibrium (AGE) model
  3. be aware of the major developments in the field of macroeconomics in the last ten years
  4. be familiar with different macroeconomic models used for policy making and their points of emphasis
  5. be able to make judicious policy predictions and undertake independent research studies in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4670 - Economic development

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Coordinator(s)

Professor Pushkar Maitra

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Characteristics and experience of developing countries; theories of economic growth and development; domestic and external sources of financial and human resources for development; the roles of international trade, investment, technology manufacturing and government in the development process.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the distinctive environmental, technical and social characteristics of developing countries
  2. understand the processes of structural change and social change which occur during development
  3. recognise the importance of institutions, technological change, and international trade, aid, and investment for the development process
  4. have skills necessary for the critical appraisal of theories of economic development.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4690 - International trade

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 and ECC3690 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Topics include the gains and costs of trading internationally; static and dynamic welfare effects of protection; the political economy of international trade policy; optimum policies in the presence of market power, uncertainty, and other market imperfections; trade policy instruments; strategies for trade liberalisation including regional trade agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to analyse the effects of international trade on real income and its distribution in various market structures
  2. have a sound understanding of the allocation and welfare effects of commercial policies
  3. possess the skills necessary to evaluate critically contemporary innovations in Australia's trade policies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4700 - Competition, regulation and policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

ECC5470, ECX5470, ECF3900, ECX3900

Synopsis

Outline of the Australian and overseas approaches to competition policy; the economic background to the Competition and Consumer Act; market definition issues; evaluation of restrictive trade practices and mergers or alliances; structural reform of industries, access and monopoly regulation.

Outcomes

The learning objectives of this unit are to:

  1. be able to understand and analyse critically the economic reasons for government intervention to reduce the adverse effects of restrictive trade practices
  2. have an understanding of the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (and its predecessor, the Trade Practices Commission)
  3. be able to evaluate recent decisions from the perspectives of an economist, lawyer, policy-maker and business manager.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4710 - Post-Keynesian economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Michael White

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mike White

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Topics include Keynes' aggregate demand and supply analysis and critique of automatic adjustment in the economy; the significance of an endogenous money supply for inflation; credit, speculation and financial instability; the national saving debate; investment and income distribution; the Phillips Curve and hysteresis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the Post Keynesian framework of the economy, which draws on the work of J M Keynes and M Kalecki
  2. have a clear understanding of how the framework can be used to analyse a number of policy issues in Australia, including monetary policy, the roles of investment and saving, government budgetary strategies and income policies
  3. be able to critically analyse the framework through written work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4720 - Law and economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Peter Forsyth (First semester)
Professor Russell Smyth (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Russell Smyth

Not offered in 2018

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Prohibitions

ECX5472

Synopsis

The unit applies the method of economics to the analysis of the law itself - to the structure of the common law, legal processes, legal institutions and statutory regulation, and to the impact of law on the behaviour of individuals and groups and the functioning of the economy. Topics include: is there a role for law and economics in studying the law, economics of crime and capital punishment, punitive damages, interest group theories of judicial independence and the determinants of judicial influence and prestige.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the two-way interrelationships between law and economics
  2. evaluate the key role of laws in setting the institutional framework in which economic decisions are taken and to critically evaluate current and proposed laws as determinants of economic performance
  3. critically assess the responses of households and business enterprises to current and alternative laws.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4750 - Financial economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Matthew Leister

Coordinator(s)

Dr Matthew Leister

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC5475, ECX5475

Synopsis

Theories of hedging and speculation; determination of spot and futures prices, and intertemporal allocation; market efficiency; expectations, including adaptive expectations and rational expectations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have an understanding of how to think about the trade-off between risk and return
  2. have the ability to read literature in financial economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4790 - Project evaluation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Coordinator(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC5479, ECX5479

Synopsis

Topics include development and application of microeconomic theory for the economic evaluation of (public) sector investment projects and policies; investment analysis and criteria, discounting techniques; Pareto potential improvement criterion, shadow pricing, social discount rates, distribution issues, secondary benefits, risk and uncertainty, cost-effectiveness.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the analytical framework, economic principles and techniques required for the economic evaluation of investment projects, policies and regulations, especially those involving the public sector
  2. appreciate the welfare economic foundations upon which economic evaluation is based
  3. design studies to estimate benefits and costs, in the presence of market distortions (eg controls, taxes and externalities), and for non-marketed goods (for example, time, noise, safety).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4810 - Public economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECC3810 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Models of decision making in the collective setting, utilising a number of tools, some of which will be familiar microeconomic ones. Economic approaches to collective decision environments, including 'new welfare economics', the 'Chicago' and 'Virginia' schools. Whenever possible, Australian policies will be examined in light of theory.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the issues and analysis of collective decisions
  2. become more discriminating observers of the political and policy environment
  3. be able to review market failures and consider the potential for solving these failures in the collective or political setting
  4. be able to examine problems of free-riding, incentives to vote, interest group influence, bureaucratic behaviour and constitutional frameworks
  5. understand the economist's role in the process of formulating public policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4830 - Welfare economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

To be advised

Coordinator(s)

To be advised

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

A study of theories in welfare economics, including conditions for Pareto optimality, welfare criteria, social choice, consumer surpluses, second versus third best, externalities and public goods as well as problems of applying these theories to such areas as public utility pricing, optimal taxation, road congestion, environmental protection, and public spending.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the welfare economic foundation of public policies
  2. analyse the pros and cons, costs and benefits of economic measures and changes from the perspective of social welfare.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4840 - Industrial organisation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC5484, ECX5484, ECF5040

Synopsis

Theories of the firm, contract, property rights structure, market structure, hierarchy, bargaining, principal-agent relationship, research and development, advertising, and entry, exit, and pricing strategy. The equilibrium implications of the internal organisation of a firm and the organisational structure of the market in relation to strategic interactions between agents, information problems and related incentive mechanisms. Basic game theory and concepts of game equilibrium applied to the analysis of opportunistic behaviour and related transactions costs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the modern developments of the theory of industrial organisation
  2. enhance their knowledge of intermediate microeconomics by incorporating information and endogenous transaction costs into analysis
  3. undertake theoretical and empirical research in the field of industrial organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4860 - Honours research project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Vinod Mishra

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Vinod Mishra

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Admission to fourth year honours, Graduate Diploma in Economics or preliminary masters in the Departments of Economics, Econometrics or Accounting and Finance

Synopsis

Students select a preferred topic on which to conduct original research after consulting with the coordinator and supervisors. During the year students participate in research workshops, propose the research plan in written and oral form, conduct research, give a final presentation of the research findings, act as a reviewer of other students' research, submit their own final research paper, and are expected to engage in discussion of other students' presentations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain the necessary analytical, communication, creative, critical thinking and technical research skills and apply them to ask and answer a research question that has significant theoretical or policy implications
  2. demonstrate the ability to analyse, comment, evaluate, discuss, and communicate research outcomes in written and oral form in a professional manner
  3. demonstrate the application of knowledge and skills with high level personal autonomy and accountability.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4870 - Health economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Jennifer Watts

Coordinator(s)

Professor Jeff Richardson
Ms Jenny Watts

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

A survey of theoretical issues in the economics of health systems and the major health policy issues confronting Australia. Emphasis is given to theories which differ from economic orthodoxy. Topics include market characteristics; market failure and regulation; equity and issues of social justice; demand analysis and human capital; the production of health and health care; theories of price formation; hospital models and hospital payment; optimal health insurance; and alternatives to Medicare.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have a clear understanding of the theoretical debate over the 'special' characteristics of health and the health care and health insurance markets
  2. have a clear understanding of the major theories of the demand for health care
  3. have a clear understanding of the use of economic incentives to achieve allocative and technical efficiency in the production of both health and health care services
  4. be familiar with the social and institutional characteristics of the Australian health care market and the various proposals for its reform.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECC4990 - Economic evaluation of health services

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Tony Harris

Coordinator(s)

Mr Anthony Harris

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECC4650

Synopsis

Principles and techniques used in the economic evaluation of health services. Topics include effectiveness, efficiency and economic evaluation; cost benefit analysis; cost effectiveness and cost utility analysis; multi-attribute utility analysis; measuring utility; psychometric measurement theory; ethical issues in resource allocation; decision criteria; time discounting; costing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. techniques applied to the evaluation of health services and programs
  2. theoretical debates over discounting, decision criteria, and the measurement of both costs and the quality of life.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF1100 - Microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (First semester)
Dr George Rivers (Second semester)
Dr Anupama Sethi (Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (First semester)
Dr George Rivers (Second semester)
Dr David Treisman (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECB1101, ECC1000, ECG1101, ECP1100, ECS1101, ECW1101, PMM2020

Synopsis

Economics as an area of knowledge. Economics in a business degree. Understanding economic policy. An analysis of markets: supply and demand; consumer behaviour; firm behaviour; cost of production and profit maximisation; behaviour of firms in different market structures; evaluation of market capitalist economic systems, economic efficiency, market failure, government failure; current economic policies, competition policy, privatisation and the funding of education.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the economic behaviour of individual consumers and producers
  2. understand concepts relating to the cost of production in both the short and long run
  3. explain the determinants of price and output outcomes under different market structures in both the short and long run and the welfare implications of these outcomes
  4. describe the virtues and shortcomings of free markets
  5. have knowledge of remedies to overcome market failure.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF1200 - Macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ratbek Dzhumashev (First semester, Trimester A)
Dr Kris Ivanovski (Second semester)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ratbek Dzhumashev (First semester)
Dr Kris Ivanovski (Second semester)
Dr David Treisman (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC1100, ECG1102, ECW1102, ECB1102, ECS1102

Synopsis

This unit uses aggregate demand and supply analysis as a tool for identifying and explaining the business cycle, output growth employment, inflation and the current account deficit. The investigation will illustrate the impact of the macroeconomy on decisions by firms and other economic agents in the economy and the effect of fiscal and monetary policies on business outcomes. Key strategic variables affecting decision making in the macro business environment are interest rates, inflation and the Australian dollar.

Outcomes

The learning goals associate with this unit are to:

  1. understand and evaluate the importance of factors that determine aggregate output, employment, interest rates, the average price level and the exchange rate
  2. appreciate the influence of these factors on decision making in government, business and international trade
  3. enable students to demonstrate in individual summative assessments tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF2331 - Macroeconomic and monetary policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ayushi Bajaj (Caulfield)
Dr Ying Zhou (Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ayushi Bajaj (Caulfield)
Dr Ying Zhou (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECF1200 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECB2330, ECB2331Not offered in 2018, ECG2730, ECS2730, ECW2730.

Synopsis

This unit examines the scope for policy to improve macroeconomic performance. It will cover: the cyclical behaviour of the economy; the role of monetary, fiscal and exchange rate policies in influencing economic activities; the implementation and operation of monetary policy; the relationship of exchange rates to monetary policy; major factors determining movements in interest rates and exchange rates in both the intermediate and long terms.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the importance of distinguishing between the short-run and long-run impacts of macroeconomic policy
  2. understand the importance of and the differences between monetary, fiscal, and exchange rate policies.
  3. be able to critically assess macroeconomic policy
  4. understand the implementation and operation of monetary policy
  5. be familiar with economic factors which are of major interest to bankers and others operating in the finance industry.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF2450 - Sports economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Schuwalow

Coordinator(s)

Mr Peter Schuwalow

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECF1100

Prohibitions

ECC2450, ECP2450, ECW2450Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit will cover: demand for sport, sports revenues, the economics of sports broadcasting, the pricing of sports events; why professional team sports leagues form, whether clubs are profit maximisers or win-maximisers, remedies for competitive imbalance such as player drafts, salary caps and revenue sharing, the role of player associations in professional sport; government subsidies in sport, the economic impact of sports events, stadium financing; case studies of professional team sports leagues in Australia, North America and Europe; globalisation in professional sport, future directions in sport.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the so-called 'peculiar' characteristics of sports markets and the policy conclusions that follow
  2. analyse the role economic incentives play in determining the behaviour of controlling bodies, leagues, clubs, players, fans, sponsors, the media and government
  3. compare and contrast the key features of various sports markets in Australia and overseas
  4. apply the skills learnt to solve problems faced by sports businesses

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF2550 - Business in Asia

6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (Second semester)
Dr Anupama Sethi (Summer semester A)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECF1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECX2550, ECF3550, ECX3550

Synopsis

The recent economic and social development of selected Asian countries, especially the role of the business sector. Topics include entrepreneurship; technological change; the dynamics of comparative advantage; import substitution versus export-oriented industrial growth; the development state; the stages of business growth.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have critically examined the major hypothesis advanced to explain the dynamics of growth and change in selected Asian economies
  2. appreciate the main characteristics of the business environment in the selected countries, including business institutions and business practices
  3. understand the role of government and the market as allocators of resources and engines of development
  4. develop analytical, written and oral skills by writing a long essay and delivering a tutorial paper.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF2721 - Trade finance and foreign exchange

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Horag Choi (Caulfield, Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Horag Choi (Caulfield)
Dr Ying Zhou (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECF1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECW2721, ECG2721

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the topics of international finance and trade. This includes the importance of international finance, the determination of exchange rates, foreign investment, parity conditions, hedging and speculation in foreign exchange markets, foreign exchange markets-spot, forward, futures and options markets, the balance of payments accounts and the effect of macroeconomic policies on trade balance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the operation of foreign exchange markets
  2. understand the key factors that influence international financial markets
  3. analyse and evaluate the benefits and disadvantages of the various exchange rate systems
  4. understand the concept of payments among nations and macroeconomic policies
  5. understand and analyse the interactions among the foreign exchange rate, trades, and macroeconomic policies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF2731 - Managerial economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paul Raschky

Coordinator(s)

Dr Paul Raschky

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECF1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECF2931, ECG2731, ECS2731, ECW2731, PMM2020

Synopsis

Students will deepen their knowledge of the differing views of the firm. Topics include: the firm within a capitalist economic system; the macroeconomic constraints on the firm; the market structural constraints on the firm; differing perspectives of the firm - the conventional economic, technological view, the accounting, management and marketing views, the recent transaction costs and new classical view; how these different areas explain current issues such as downsizing and electronic commerce.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and recognise the various processes involved in investment decision making;
  2. understand and explain the relevant factors behind risk analysis and risk management;
  3. understand and analyse firm pricing strategies;
  4. recognise and evaluate the various theories of the organisation known as the firm and the role of managers in such organisations; and develop an understanding of strategic games in the use of business applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF3120 - Consumer economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Luc Borrowman

Coordinator(s)

Dr Luc Borrowman

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECF2731 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit introduces economic principles underlying consumer choice and market demand; describing consumer preferences, indifference curves and budget constraints, with particular emphasis on the role of prices as conveyors of information. It introduces economic tools and concepts for the analyses of consumption choices over time, under uncertainty and/or with risk, and in markets with asymmetric information. Other topics include work-leisure choice, wage changes and the supply of labour, and the provision of public goods and environmental goods. An examination of observed economic and social outcomes from the point of view of various normative criteria completes the coverage.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand economic models of household consumption which explain the allocation of resources over a variety of goods
  2. understand the allocation of income between savings and consumption, and the allocation of expenditures over the life cycle
  3. analyse data on household expenditure patterns
  4. understand the role of government over consumer protection
  5. analyse the role and impact of e-commerce on the way consumers choose in the marketplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF3121 - Economics of international trade

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Laura Puzzello

Coordinator(s)

Dr Laura Puzzello

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECF1200 and ECB2731 or ECF2731 or ECF2931

Prohibitions

ECB3121, ECC3690, ECG3121, ECS3121, ECW3121Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The pure theory of international trade. Trade and income distribution, economic growth and changes in trade, bases for trade and gains from trade. Trade policy. Tariffs, quotas, subsidies, import discrimination and other national policies affecting trade. Trade policies in developing nations. The foreign exchange market and its impact on international trade. Models of currency crisis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an introduction to the microeconomic and macroeconomic theory underlying the discipline of international economics
  2. provide an awareness of the "open" economy
  3. provide a broad knowledge of foreign exchange markets and their role in international trade
  4. understand contemporary policy debates in the area of international trade.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF3143 - Economics of money and banking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Solmaz Moslehi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Solmaz Moslehi

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed ECF1100 and ECF2331 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECB3143, ECG3143, ECS3143, ECW3143

Synopsis

This unit is designed to analyse the effect of money on the key economic variables such as interest rates, inflation, output and the workings of the banking sector. In addition, we will also examine the roles commerical banks and the central bank play in the process of money creation and implementation of monetary policies. The unit also teaches an economic approach to interpret today's information and policy decisions that can help you to predict future events and the effects those events can have on your own decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a knowledge of the theoretical structure of an open economy with particular emphasis on monetary policy formulation and implementation
  2. acquire an understanding of the institutional structure of the banking system
  3. develop skills in analysis and prediction for the key economic variables when the economy is faced with internal and external market shocks
  4. be able to use an economic model to analyse policy measures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECF3900 - Business, competition and regulation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of ECB2731, ECF2731, ECF2931, ECW2731 or ECG2731

Prohibitions

ECC3830, ECG3830, ECS3830, ECW3830, ECX3900, ECC4700Not offered in 2018, ECC5470

Synopsis

This unit considers market structures, conduct and performance from the business perspective; economic policy as it affects business, particularly in relation to its dealings with consumers; the variety of approaches to competition and regulation policies from the international perspective; analysis of policies with respect to prices, monopolies, oligopolies and mergers, exclusive dealing, consumer protection and licensing, deregulation and privatisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concepts used in the economic analysis of business and the policy framework within which business operates
  2. understand performance, structure and behaviour of different businesses in any market
  3. apply models of behaviour to specific cases
  4. analyse different structures of businesses in detail, identifying major policies which might affect their performance and conduct.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECM2001 - Asia in the world economy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Coordinator(s)

Dr Audrey Siah Kim Lan

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit is designed for undergraduates to develop a solid grounding in the principles of how Asia is integrated in the world economy. The unit provides an in-depth understanding of the theory and concepts to explain the economic development in Asia and its integration into the global market. The topics include: planning processes; trade and investment policies in the climate of mega-regional trade deals; regional economic integration; structural reforms; trade and resource flows; and the participation of Asian countries in the global economic governance. The learning material is presented in ways, so that students learn to connect theory to existing evidence. The syllabus also provides an overall perspective on how the sub-regional and local economic development programs are evolving in response to a global economic and climate challenges.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. learn the economic theories and issues in the context of Asian economies
  2. understand the challenges and opportunities that arise within the context of Asian economies as an integral part of the world economy
  3. critically evaluate the competing explanations of the evolution of the Asian economic landscape
  4. analyse and understand the framework for contemporary debates related to Asian economic policies
  5. understand the geography of uneven development in Asia and explore the implications for designing and implementing regional policies in response to a globalised world.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECM2360 - Environmental and natural resource economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ashutosh Sarker

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ashutosh Sarker

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECW1101

Synopsis

This unit applies basic intermediate microeconomic principles to local, regional, and global environmental and natural resource management, such as river water pollution, air pollution and climate change. It provides an in-depth understanding of the theory and concepts underlying how economic and business activities affect environmental and natural resource management issues. It also includes discussion of the inverse relationship between these phenomena - how environmental and resource management concerns affect economic development - as well as how they complement each other without compromising their sustainable association.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify differences between conventional goods allocated efficiently and environmental commodities allocated inefficiently
  2. explain why traditional economics fails to deal with market failures
  3. understand cost-benefit measurements of changes in environmental quality
  4. understand policy instruments available to achieve the optimal level of pollution and the strengths and weaknesses of policy alternatives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECM3670 - Development economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Eduard Bomhoff

Coordinator(s)

Professor Eduard Bomhoff

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECW1101 and ECW2730

Synopsis

This unit focuses on broad topics, including industrialisation, sectoral shifts in employment, urbanisation, education and health in developing and middle income countries. Students will acquire a deeper and more structured understanding of trends in the region and will also be able to better evaluate remaining differences in development between developing and middle-income nations in Asia and the rich countries that are the main focus of their economics textbooks. The unit will assist students with their preparation for employment by companies that operate in developing and middle-income nations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the principal differences in the social and business environment between developing and fully developed economies
  2. understand trends in urbanisation, sectorial shifts in employment in developing and middle-income countries in Asia
  3. achieve some insight in cultural trends into poor and middle income countries and be able to better evaluate cultural differences between developing and fully developed nations
  4. get a sense of the challenges for the political systems in poor and middle-income countries and in governance trends in these countries in Asia.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECM3810 - Public sector economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Habibur Rahman

Coordinator(s)

Dr Habibur Rahman

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECW2731

Synopsis

The unit explains how the Malaysian government operates in comparison with governments in other developed and developing countries. Main topics are: (a) welfare economics (mixed economies and the extent to which they can be met by private markets; role of government in redistributing income; various modes of privatisation, public-private sector partnerships; role and performance of state-owned enterprises); (b) government budget expenditure (welfare economics, provision of public goods and externalities, emphasising environmental issues, income distribution, social insurance and cost-benefit analysis); (c) taxation (emphasis on constructing a theoretical framework for considering tax policy; how taxes should be levied to enhance economic efficiency and promote a fair distribution of income).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theory and issues related to welfare economics
  2. identify the rationale for government intervention in the economy and the extent of that intervention
  3. analyse specific policy issues in the area of public expenditure and taxation from the perspective of both traditional public finance and public choice
  4. critically evaluate economic analysis and contemporary public debate in the area of public finance
  5. analyse and understand a framework for taxation which enhances economic efficiency and promotes a fairer distribution of income.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECS1101 - Introductory microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Alain Kaninda

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECB1101, ECF1100, ECG1101, ECW1101, ECP1100

Synopsis

An introduction to the study of economics; consumer behaviour; demand and supply and the operation of markets; market efficiency and welfare; welfare effects of international trade; public sector economics; the behaviour of firms and the organisation of an industry; market structures - perfect competition and monopoly; economies of the labour market.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theoretical foundations of economics
  2. understand generic skills essential for progression to upper level units by applying rigorous thinking and understanding to analytical geometric models
  3. appreciate economics as an evolutionary science and its ability to address, in a microeconomic framework, the persistent social and economic problems confronted by society
  4. demonstrate in individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECS1102 - Introductory macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Alain Kaninda

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 1 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECB1102, ECF1200, ECG1102, ECW1102

Synopsis

An introduction to the study of economics from a macroeconomic perspective including the following areas of study: trade in a global village, GDP as National Income and Aggregate Expenditure, savings and investment, unemployment, money and the South African monetary system, aggregate demand and supply in the short and long run, monetary and fiscal policy, including the related debates in South Africa as an open economy and as a major economy in Africa.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an insight into the product, money, labour and foreign exchange markets
  2. develop skills in the application of economic principles to wider social issues
  3. gain knowledge and understanding of the South African and African economies and their operation in an international environment
  4. acquire the basis for more advanced studies in economics
  5. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECS2141 - Economics of labour markets

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Alain Kaninda

Coordinator(s)

Professor Miracle Ntuli

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECB1101 or ECG1101 or ECW1101 or ECP1100

Prohibitions

ECB2141Not offered in 2018, ECG2141, ECG9170, ECW2141

Synopsis

Topics include the supply of and the demand for labour, education and training, the operation of labour markets, including the role of institutions in the labour market, wage relativities, disadvantaged groups in the labour market, and the role of trade unions. Also included is a study of the macroeconomic implications of wage changes and a consideration of wages policy. Special attention is given to current labour market conditions in South Africa and the broader African continent.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the operation of labour markets by drawing on basic economic principle
  2. think critically about the implications of labour market activity for society
  3. recognise the issues involved in labour market activities through a consideration of issues such as unemployment and labour market disadvantage
  4. apply analytical skills developed through an analysis of continuing change in the labour market and labour market policy in South Africa and the broader African continent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECS2730 - Intermediate macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tendeukayi Mugadza

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

ECB1102 or ECG1102 or ECW1102 or ECS1102

Prohibitions

ECB2330, ECB2331Not offered in 2018, ECF2331, ECG2730, ECW2730.

Synopsis

Measuring and interpreting macroeconomic data; consumption and investment decisions; analysis of the real exchange rate and trade balance; assets price movements; different international monetary systems; the economic benefits and costs of optimum currency areas; IS-LM mode; AD-AS model; how policy-makers in South Africa and the broader African continent try to stablise the economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the impact of monetary and government policies on an open economy using the IS-LM model and AD-AS model
  2. explain the policy consequences of consumption and investment decisions
  3. explain how policies affect the trade balance and income
  4. analyse policy responses to assets price movements
  5. evaluate the economic benefits and costs of optimum currency areas.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECS2731 - Intermediate microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tendeukayi Mugadza

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

ECB1101, ECF1100, ECG1101 or ECW1101

Prohibitions

ECB2731, ECF2931, ECG2731, ECF2731, ECW2731

Synopsis

This unit reviews the contemporary microeconomic principles. Consumer and producer theory focusing on individual consumers and firms, market processes, demand patterns, cost structures, market conditions, pricing policies, and the impact of regulation on business decisions are discussed. Cases and problems from the prescribed text, South African media, and online resources illustrate how economic concepts can be applied to specific industries. Analytical techniques and quantitative tools link the concepts to measurement and decision-making.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how markets work
  2. understand how customers value products
  3. understand which production and cost measures are relevant for decision making
  4. understand how competition affects business decisions on investment, production, and pricing in different market structures
  5. understand how changes in foreign exchange rates, technology, incomes, government regulations, sources of energy, the balance of payments impact on decision making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECS3121 - Economics of international trade

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tendeukayi Mugadza

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB2331Not offered in 2018 or ECG2730 or ECF2731 or ECW2730 or ECS2730 AND ECB2731 or ECG2731 or ECW2731 or ECS2731 or ECF2731 or ECF2931 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECB3121, ECC3690, ECF3121, ECG9121, ECW3121Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The pure theory of international trade. Trade and income distribution, economic growth and changes in trade, bases for trade and gains from trade. Trade policy. Tariffs, quotas, subsidies, import discrimination and other national policies affecting trade. The foreign exchange market. Determination of exchange rates, the balance of payments, modern foreign exchange policies and the threat of unstable exchange rates. Regional trade agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. draw upon skills developed in micro and macroeconomics to enable students to understand and critically evaluate contemporary policy debates in international trade and finance
  2. develop the ability to use powerful analytical tools to predict the impact of global economic, political and social policies on South Africa as a small open economy, as well as the broader African continent
  3. recognise the positive welfare effects of worldwide unrestricted trade.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECS3143 - Economics of money and banking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Moremi Labeodan

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: ECF1100 or ECG1101 or ECS1101 or ECW1101 or ECB1101 and ECB2331Not offered in 2018 or ECF2331 or ECG2730 or ECW2730 or ECS2730 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECB3143, ECG3143, ECF3143, ECW3143

Synopsis

The concept of money, the financial system and financial intermediation, the nature and roles of the Reserve Bank, banks and non-bank financial institutions. The role and interaction of financial markets and the determination of interest rates, foreign exchange markets and the determination of exchange rates, the interaction between foreign exchange and money markets and implication for policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a knowledge of the theoretical structure of an open economy with particular emphasis on monetary policy formulation and implementation
  2. develop skills in analysis and prediction for the key economic variables when the economy is faced with internal and external market shocks
  3. be able to use an economic model that allows for competitive international capital markets and floating exchange rates to analyse policy measures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECS3567 - Development economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tendeukayi Mugadza

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tendeukayi Mugadza

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ECG2730 or ECS2730 or ECW2730

Prohibitions

ECW3567Not offered in 2018 and ECC3670

Synopsis

Topics include measuring growth and development; theories of economic growth and development; poverty, inequality and human capital; saving, investment and capital flows; production and trade; the role of the state; and policy measures. Country specific research will relate to sources of the World Bank, United Nations Development Program, IMF, etc.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and describe the concepts and debates in the field of development economics
  2. interpret various development indicators
  3. explain growth and development theories
  4. argue about the role of resources in economic development
  5. evaluate development policies in a country specific context.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECS3830 - Competition and regulation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tendeukayi Mugadza

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

ECB2731 or ECG2731 or ECS2731 or ECW2731

Prohibitions

ECC3830, ECF3900, ECG3830, ECW3830, ECX3900

Synopsis

This unit considers market structures, conduct and performance from the business perspective; economic policy as it affects horizontal and vertical relationships in business, particularly in relation to its dealings with consumers; the variety of approaches to competition and regulation policies from a South African and international perspective; analysis of policies with respect to prices, monopolies, oligopolies and mergers, consumer protection and licensing, deregulation, privatisation and nationalisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise differences in market structures and understand how those differences affect firms' competitive behaviour and performance
  2. understand how and why competition causes changes in market structures by way of mergers, acquisitions, vertical integration and diversification
  3. explain the economic rationale for competitive weapons utilised by business in contemporary competitive environment, such as barriers to entry, pricing and advertising strategies, product differentiation, and innovation
  4. explain the rationale for regulation and merits of different theories of regulation
  5. explain the arguments for and against privatisation
  6. understand the main features of national competition policies in South Africa and other African nations compared to international experience
  7. critically evaluate attempts to affect competition in particular industries, e.g. electricity and telecommunications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW1101 - Introductory microeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Grace Lee Hooi (First semester)
Dr Lilian Chan Mei Li (Second semester)
Dr Giovanni Ko (October intake)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Grace Lee Hooi (First semester)
Dr Lilian Chan Mei Li (Second semester)
Dr Giovanni Ko (October intake)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • October intake 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECB1101, ECG1101, ECP1100, ECS1101

Synopsis

An introduction to the study of economics; consumer behaviour; demand and supply and the operation of markets; market efficiency and welfare; welfare effects of international trade; public sector economics; the behaviour of firms and the organisation of an industry; market structures -- perfect competition and monopoly; economies of the labour market.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theoretical foundations of economics
  2. understand generic skills essential for progression to upper level units by applying rigorous thinking and understanding to analytical geometric models
  3. appreciate economics as an evolutionary science and its ability to address, in a microeconomic framework, the persistent social and economic problems confronted by society
  4. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW1102 - Introductory macroeconomics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Shahriar Kabir (First semester)
Dr Koh Geok May (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Shahriar Kabir (First semester)
Dr Koh Geok May (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECB1102, ECG1102, ECS1102

Synopsis

An introduction to the study of economics from a macroeconomic perspective including the following areas of study: trade in a global village, GDP as National Income and Aggregate Expenditure, savings and investment, unemployment, money and the Australian monetary system, aggregate demand and supply in the short and long run, monetary and fiscal policy including the related debates and in particular Australia as an open economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an insight into the product, money, labour and foreign exchange markets
  2. develop skills in the application of economic principles to wider social issues
  3. gain knowledge and understanding of the Australian economy and its operation in an international environment
  4. acquire the basis for more advanced studies in economics
  5. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in ECW1102.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW2141 - Economics of labour markets

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lilian Chan Mei Li

Coordinator(s)

Dr Lilian Chan Mei Li

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB1101 or ECG1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECG2141, ECG9170, ECS2141

Synopsis

Topics include the supply of and the demand for labour, education and training, the operation of labour markets, including the role of institutions in the labour market, wage relativities, disadvantaged groups in the labour market, and the role of trade unions. Also included is a study of the macroeconomic implications of wage changes and a consideration of wages policy. Special attention is given to the current labour market conditions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the operation of labour markets by drawing on basic economic principle
  2. think critically about the implications of labour market activity for society
  3. recognise the issues involved in labour market activities through a consideration of issues such as unemployment and labour market disadvantage
  4. apply analytical skills developed through an analysis of continuing change in the labour market and labour market policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW2450 - Sports economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Schuwalow

Coordinator(s)

Mr Peter Schuwalow

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB1101 or ECG1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC2450, ECF2450Not offered in 2018, ECP2450

Synopsis

This unit will cover: the demand, supply and pricing in the sport industry, sports revenues; whether clubs are profit-maximisers or win-maximisers, competitive imbalance in sport such as player drafts, salary caps and revenue sharing, the sport industry, including government subsidies, private delivery of sport and sport participation, the economic impact of sports, stadium financing; labour markets and sport, regulation of sports, international issues, future directions of the sport industry.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the 'peculiar' characteristics of sports markets and the relevant policy prescriptions that follow
  2. gain an understanding of the role of economic incentives in determining the behaviour of the various stakeholders -- controlling bodies and leagues, clubs/teams, players, fans, sponsors, the media and the government -- in determining outcomes in different sports markets
  3. acquire knowledge of the nature of several specific sports markets in Australia and overseas, and of the relative merits of different approaches to solving contemporary problems in those sports markets.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW2451 - The business of sport

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Schuwalow

Coordinator(s)

Mr Peter Schuwalow

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB1101 or ECG1101 or ECS1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

Sport is a major industry in Australia and overseas. The unit will use a mixture of economic theory, economic history and the study of institutions to explore the business issues faced by the sport industry. Throughout the unit, case studies of several sports, notably Major League Baseball, professional boxing, the English Premier League (soccer), and the Australian Football League, will be used to explore these issues in depth.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the constraints and opportunities that affect the ability of sports to survive in an increasingly global marketplace
  2. identify the characteristics and problems of labour markets in professional sports
  3. identify the market for various sports, and how sports have been affected by rising costs and competing uses for consumer income
  4. develop a high level of research, analytical, written and oral skills by writing an essay and participating in tutorials.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW2721 - Trade finance and foreign exchange

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Poon Wai Ching

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Poon Wai Ching

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB1101 or ECG1101 or ECS1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECF2721, ECG2721

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the topics of international trade, finance and foreign exchange. This includes the balance of payments, the operation of foreign exchange markets, and the exchange rates, and alternative exchange rate systems, foreign exchange risks, exchange rate determination, and international monetary system in the open-economy macroeconomics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand payments among nations and the monetary approach to the Balance of Payments
  2. study the operation of foreign exchange markets and alternative exchange rate systems
  3. acquire essential skills for managing foreign exchange risk
  4. learn macroeconomic adjustment mechanism with different exchange rate systems
  5. demonstrate in the assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW2730 - Macroeconomic policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Eduard Bomhoff

Coordinator(s)

Professor Eduard Bomhoff

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB1102 or ECG1102 or ECW1102 or ECS1102 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECB2330, ECB2331Not offered in 2018, ECF2331, ECG2730, ECS2730.

Synopsis

Macroeconomic policy as it affects the open economy; policy consequences of consumption and investment decisions; analysis of policies with respect to the real exchange rate and trade balance; policy responses to assets price movements; policy goals under different international monetary systems; the economic benefits and costs of optimum currency areas; how policy-makers in Australia try to stabilise the economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the impact of monetary and government policies on an open economy
  2. explain the policy consequences of consumption and investment decisions
  3. explain how policies affect the trade balance and income
  4. analyse policy responses to assets price movements
  5. evaluate the economic benefits and costs of optimum currency areas.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW2731 - Managerial economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Siah Kim Lan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Siah Kim Lan

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB1101 or ECG1101 or ECS1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECB2731, ECF2731, ECF2931, ECG2731, ECS2731

Synopsis

This subject reviews the contemporary microeconomic principles in the context most relevant to business people. Market processes, demand patterns, cost structures, market conditions, pricing policies, and the impact of regulation on business decisions are discussed. Cases and problems from the prescribed text, Australian media, and online resources illustrate how economic concepts can be applied to specific industries. Analytical techniques and quantitative tools link the concepts to measurement and managerial decision-making.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how do markets work
  2. understand how do customers value products
  3. understand which production and cost measures are relevant for decision making
  4. understand how does competition affect business decisions on investment, production, and pricing in different market structures
  5. understand how important to managerial and marketing decisions are changes in foreign exchange rates, technology, incomes, government regulations, sources of energy, the balance of payments.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW3121 - Economics of international trade

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vinod Mishra

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vinod Mishra

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECB1101 or ECG1102 or ECS1101 or ECW1102 or ECS1102 and ECB2331Not offered in 2018 or ECG2731 or ECS2731 or ECW2731.

Prohibitions

ECB3121, ECC3690, ECF3121, ECG3121, ECG9121, ECS3121

Synopsis

The pure theory of international trade. Trade and income distribution, economic growth and changes in trade, bases for trade and gains from trade. Trade policy. Tariffs, quotas, subsidies, import discrimination and other national policies affecting trade. The foreign exchange market. Determination of exchange rates, the balance of payments, modern foreign exchange policies and the threat of unstable exchange rates.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. draw upon skills developed in micro and macroeconomics to enable them to understand and critically evaluate contemporary policy debates in international trade and finance
  2. develop the ability to use powerful analytical tools to predict the impact of global economic, political and social policies on Australia as a small open economy
  3. recognise the positive welfare effects of worldwide unrestricted trade.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW3143 - Economics of money and banking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Eduard Bomhoff

Coordinator(s)

Professor Eduard Bomhoff

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: ECB1101 or ECG1101 or ECS1101 or ECW1101 and ECB2331Not offered in 2018 or ECG2730 or ECS2730 or ECW2730 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECB3143, ECG3143, ECF3143, ECS3143

Synopsis

This unit is designed to analyse the effect of money on key economic variables such as interest rates, inflation, output, and on the workings of the banking sector. In addition, the unit examines the roles played by Commercial Banks and the Central Bank in the process of money creation and the implementation of monetary policy. The unit uses an economic approach to allow analysis of policy decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a knowledge of the theoretical structure of an open economy with particular emphasis on monetary policy formulation and implementation
  2. develop skills in analysis and prediction for the key economic variables when the economy is faced with internal and external market shocks
  3. be able to use an economic model that allows for competitive international capital markets and floating exchange rates to analyse policy measures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW3150 - Natural resources and environment

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Lionel Frost

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECW1102, ECW2120 or ECW2731 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECG9150

Synopsis

Economic systems and environmental problems. Suitability of the market system to deal with environmental problems. The need for government intervention. Microeconomic principles and decision making in the management of privately and publicly owned renewable and non-renewable natural resources. International, national and regional policies addressing natural resources and environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the problem of global resource scarcity within an international, national and regional context
  2. understand how intermediate economic principles can be extended to address advanced and specialised problems of natural resources and environment
  3. develop strong analytical and research skills within an economic framework
  4. apply economic analysis to contemporary environmental and natural resource issues
  5. use economic tools to assist decision making in the use of environmental and natural resources and to critically evaluate environmental and natural resources policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW3291 - Multinational trade and investment

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Coordinator(s)

Dr Michael Yap

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECW1102

Synopsis

Multinational corporations and their role in the international economy; theories of international trade and the characteristics of Australia's role in the international economy; theories of internationalisation of firms; forms of international business; the impact on trade patterns of foreign direct investment; locational choice for multinational corporations; regional trade groups and their impact on trade and investment; the institutional environment of international business including the World Bank and World Trade Organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand welfare gains that accrue from international trade and the losses associated with barriers to trade
  2. understand characteristics of Australia's participation in the international economy
  3. understand the role of international institutions like the IMF, WTO and World Bank
  4. understand motives and operation of regional trade groups
  5. understand various modes of entry available to multinational corporations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW3301 - Case studies in international trade

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Siah Kim Lan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Siah Kim Lan

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECG2721 or ECW2721 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECF3301

Synopsis

Students will deepen their knowledge of Australia's traditional and emerging trading partners through lectures and contact with business people who have successful records in this field; case studies of particular countries covering economic, legal and financial aspects, will be undertaken in depth; successful Australian exporters will be examined; practical visits to operating entities to bring the topic to life.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand Australia's traditional and emerging trading partners
  2. understand the process of international trade, the parties involved and their functions
  3. be able to argue a point of view in a structured setting and to question and participate in a team environment
  4. develop a professional attitude whilst interfacing with industry practitioners
  5. acquire knowledge of the application of the case study method of study.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW3567 - Development economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Anmar Pretorius

Coordinator(s)

Ms Anmar Pretorius

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ECW2730 or ECG2730

Prohibitions

ECC3670

Synopsis

Topics include measuring growth and development; theories of economic growth and development; poverty, inequality and human capital; saving, investment and capital flows; production and trade; the role of the state; and policy measures. Country specific research will relate to sources of the World Bank, United Nations Development Program, IMF, etc.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and describe the concepts and debates in the field of development economics
  2. interpret various development indicators
  3. explain growth and development theories
  4. argue about the role of resources in economic development
  5. evaluate development policies in a country specific context.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECW3830 - Business, competition and regulation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gamini Herath

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gamini Herath

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ECB2731 or ECG2731 or ECS2731 or ECW2731 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC3830, ECF3900, ECG3830, ECS3830, ECX3900

Synopsis

This unit considers market structures, conduct and performance from the business perspective; economic policy as it affects business, particularly in relation to its dealings with consumers; the variety of approaches to competition and regulation policies from the international perspective; analysis of policies with respect to prices, monopolies, oligopolies and mergers, exclusive dealing, consumer protection and licensing, deregulation and privatisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise differences in market structures and understand how those differences affect firms' competitive behaviour and performance
  2. understand how and why competition causes changes in market structures by way of mergers, acquisitions, vertical integration and diversification
  3. explain the economic rationale for competitive weapons utilised by business in contemporary competitive environment, such as barriers to entry, pricing and advertising strategies, product differentiation, and innovation
  4. explain the rationale for regulation and merits of different theories of regulation.
  5. explain the arguments for and against privatisation
  6. understand the main features of national competition policies in the countries of particular interest to Monash University in Australia and overseas

  7. critically evaluate attempts to increase competition in particular industries, e.g. aviation, electricity and telecommunications, where there are ongoing reforms.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECX2650 - Contemporary economic policy and general equilibrium

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Coordinator(s)

Dr Yin Mai

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECC1000, ECF1100, ECP1100 or ECB1101 before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

The unit will examine a variety of major economic policy issues within the general equilibrium framework. The issues will be of major importance for many countries, such as: carbon emissions abatement, free-trade agreements, direct and indirect taxation reforms, industrial relations, domestic and international immigration, macroeconomic stimulus, infrastructure and other major project evaluation, and catastrophic events such as terrorist attacks and global pandemics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. strengthen understanding of contemporary policy issues and their potential impacts on society via analyses within the general equilibrium conceptual framework
  2. foster an appreciation of the role of formal quantitative analysis in the process of economic policy decision-making
  3. build confidence in applying economy-wide thinking to a diverse range of policy issues
  4. develop the skills required to be critical users of quantitative assessments of economic policy proposals.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ECX3550 - Business in Asia

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Economics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (Caulfield and Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Professor Gamini Herath (Malaysia)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi (Caulfield)
Mr Syed Shah (City)
Professor Gamini Herath (Malaysia)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ECB1101, ECF1100, ECG1101, ECW1101, or ECC1000 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC2550, ECC3550, ECF2550, ECF3550, ECW3550, ECX2550

Synopsis

This unit studies recent economic developments of selected Asian countries. Topics include: theories of economic growth; economic freedom and economic development; entrepreneurship and economic transformation in Hong Kong; the role of industrial policy in Japanese post-war economic performance; economic reforms in China and India; and the 1997 Asian financial crisis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have critically examined the major hypothesis advanced to explain the dynamics of growth and change in selected Asian economies
  2. appreciate the main characteristics of the business environment in the selected countries, including business institutions and business practices
  3. understand the role of government and the market as allocators of resources and engines of development
  4. develop their analytical, written and oral skills by writing a long essay and delivering a tutorial paper.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETB1100 - Business statistics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Bruce Stephens

Coordinator(s)

Mr Bruce Stephens

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BUS1100, PMM2020, ETC1000, ETG1102, ETW1000, ETX1100, SCI1020, STA1010, ETW1102

Synopsis

Introduction to spreadsheeting. Descriptive statistics. Elementary probability. Discrete and continuous probability distributions. Statistical inference. Simple linear regression and correlation. Forecasting and time series. Index numbers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and applying inference methods to single population means
  4. evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply time series techniques of indexing, deflating, and forecasting to business and financial series, and interpreting the results.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETB2111 - Business data modelling

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor George Athanasopoulos

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor George Athanasopoulos

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETB1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETW1010 and ETW1031

Synopsis

Sampling designs and inference; confidence limits and tests on means, proportion, differences. Cross tabulation, with chi square. Simple and multiple linear regression: regression with non-linear terms; regression with dummy variables. Introduction to analysis of variance. Uses Excel.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. choose and apply an appropriate sampling design
  2. understand and interpret confidence intervals and hypothesis tests for means, proportions and variances, and be able to identify significant differences
  3. understand and conduct regression analyses to interpret and communicate the business value of the results
  4. understand and conduct one way analysis of variance in business problems
  5. understand the concept and application of Chi-square test for independence between business variables.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC1000 - Business and economic statistics

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Coordinator(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B2000, B2001, B2003, B2004 or associated double degree program.

Prohibitions

ETG1102, ETW1000, ETW1102, ETX1100, ETX9000, FIT1006, STA1010

Synopsis

Presentation and analysis of grouped and ungrouped data using tables, charts and measures of location and dispersion; standardisation techniques, including index numbers, with application to share price indices and the CPI; analysis of relationships between variables using simple and multiple regression; extensions to multiple regression, including nonlinear and categorical explanatory variables and time series data with applications to forecasting; main ideas of probability theory as a foundation for statistical inference; concept of sampling as a way of capturing uncertainty about data; estimators and their properties; constructing and interpreting confidence intervals; fundamentals of hypothesis testing, testing hypotheses about the mean, difference between means and the slope, including analysis of variance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business and economic data using tables, charts and descriptive statistics techniques, applying standardisation techniques where appropriate
  2. describe the concept of a sampling distribution, estimators and their properties
  3. make inference on single and multiple population means, difference between means and the slope for business and economic decision-making
  4. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business and economic decision-making using simple and multiple linear regression
  5. apply the main ideas of probability theory to business and economic decision-making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC1010 - Data modelling and computing

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Dianne Cook

Coordinator(s)

Professor Dianne Cook

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETW1010, ETC9010

Synopsis

Introduction to principles and techniques for modelling business and economic data. Modelling in business and finance using computers, spreadsheet modelling of business problems, organising and accessing data efficiently. Modelling in economics and finance, multiple regression as a tool for modelling macroeconomic and microeconomic decisions, elasticities and statistical evaluation of policy, time series modelling with application to finance. Introduction to Actuarial Studies as an approach to building quantitative models of risk.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply principles and techniques of data management with computers and spreadsheet modelling to business and economic decision-making
  2. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables using simple and multiple linear regression
  3. apply statistical techniques for making decisions with quantitative and categorical data in business and economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC2410 - Introductory econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid-Araghi

Coordinator(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid-Araghi

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC1000 or equivalent or be enrolled in course B6001 or B6014.

Prohibitions

ETC2400, ETC3440, ECC2410

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the empirical analysis of relationships between economic variables. The approach is based on linear regression theory, and emphasises 'hands on' data analysis. Topics studied will include properties of least squares estimators, hypothesis testing, the choice of appropriate functional form, the use of dummy variables, issues around modelling survey data and the problems of serial correlation, heteroscedasticity and multicollinearity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and derive the properties of ordinary least squares in summation and matrix notation
  2. interpret, evaluate and apply inferential methods to multiple linear regression
  3. understand the use and implications of data scaling, functional form and dummy variables in regression modelling
  4. identify the presence of heteroscedasticity, adjust OLS standard errors and perform feasible GLS in regression models
  5. understand issues related to modelling with time-series data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC2420 - Statistical thinking

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC1000 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the tools for a large, digital data world, including the building blocks for business analytics, modern insurance and risk assessment. A computational approach is employed to teach the concepts of statistics, and decision making in the presence of uncertainty. An important aspect will be to develop skills for compiling data from multiple sources to support better decisions and models. Topics covered will include simulation and randomisation methods, decision and credibility theory, data wrangling and visualisation, methods for time series, Bayesian analysis and models for risk and loss distributions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. use simulation of statistical games to understand decision theory
  2. learn about statistical distributions, including those used for loss functions
  3. compile data from various digital sources, handling missing values, clean, transform, visualise and summarise
  4. understand and explain the basic concepts of Bayesian statistics
  5. obtain a basic understanding of working with temporal data and time series models
  6. use randomisation methods to assess uncertainty in relation to hypothesis testing, decision-making, risk assessment and model assessment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC2430 - Actuarial statistics

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Athanasios Pantelous

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Athanasios Pantelous

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC1000 or equivalent or be enrolled in course B6014.

Synopsis

This unit will introduce students to basic financial and stochastic techniques used in actuarial work, and will give an overview of some of the areas in which actuaries are currently involved. The student will be introduced to the basic concepts involved in assessing and pricing future risks and pricing insurance products, using past data.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce actuarial discounting concepts and basic actuarial notation
  2. introduce statistical techniques in actuarial work
  3. construct demographic statistics and life tables
  4. model mortality rates.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC2440 - Mathematics for economics and business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr John Stapleton

Coordinator(s)

Mr John Stapleton

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC1000 or equivalent or be enrolled in course B6001 or B6014.

Prohibitions

ETF2700, ECC2440. Students are also prohibited from enrolling in ETC2440 if they have passed both MTH2010 and MTH2021.

Synopsis

This unit introduces mathematical techniques that are invaluable tools for econometrics, economics, finance, and business. Topics covered include matrix algebra, linear simultaneous equations and the LU decomposition, eigenvalues and the Schur decomposition, random vectors; optimisation, including the Lagrange multiplier method, partial differentiation, multiple integration, difference and differential equations. Some emphasis will be given to the use of computer programs for performing matrix calculations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide a practical training in basic mathematics needed for the study of econometrics
  2. examine the calculus of many variables and its application in econometrics and business statistics
  3. introduce matrix algebra
  4. provide a training in the use of mathematical software.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC2450 - Applied forecasting for business and economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Rob Hyndman

Coordinator(s)

Professor Rob Hyndman

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETC1000

Synopsis

Reliable forecasts of business and economic variables must often be obtained against a backdrop of structural change in markets and the economy. This unit provides a practical introduction to methods suitable for forecasting in these circumstances including the classical decomposition of time series, exponential smoothing, Box-Jenkins ARIMA modelling, and regression with auto-correlated disturbances. It also provides an introduction to applied multiple regression analysis. Students can expect to enhance their computer skills with exercises using advanced features of Microsoft Excel and an econometrics package.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an understanding of common statistical methods used in business and economic forecasting
  2. develop computer skills for forecasting from business and economics time series data
  3. provide insights into the problems of implementing and operating large scale forecasting systems for use in production and services management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC2470 - Applied business modelling

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETC1000

Prohibitions

ETC3480

Synopsis

Computer business models in decision making are the primary focus of this unit. Their potential application in controlling operations and supply chains is explored. Mathematical and statistical methods needed in the construction of business models are examined. An introduction is provided to decision making under risk, Monte Carlo simulation, inventory control, replacement theory, multi-level production systems and supply chains. Computing is undertaken with Microsoft Excel. Training is provided in the programming language Visual Basic for Applications to extend the capacities of Microsoft Excel.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an understanding of the quantitative way of thinking about business problems
  2. enhance analytical skills for problem solving
  3. increase computing skills for business modelling with spreadsheets
  4. provide tools for decision making under risk
  5. examine the quantitative dimensions of logistics and supply chain management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30% + Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC2480 - Business modelling methods

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETC1000

Prohibitions

ETF2480, ETW2480

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to business modelling. It examines how to systematically build, evaluate and implement both predictive and prescriptive models of common business processes, with the aim of supporting management in their role as decision-makers. Emphasis is placed on quantitative methods required to optimise outcomes, with due consideration given to the need to systematically address risk when it occurs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand common applications of business modelling in operations management, supply management, finance and project management
  2. formulate and solve business problems with quantitative methods such as linear, non-linear and integer programming
  3. address decision problems, involving risk and uncertainty, using Monte Carlo simulation
  4. acquire greater proficiency in advanced aspects of spreadsheet software, given the dominant place of this technology in business decision-making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC2500 - Marketing research analysis

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Luke Greenacre

Coordinator(s)

Dr Luke Greenacre

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC1000 and MKC1200 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MKC2500, MKF2121, MKG2420, MKW2420

Synopsis

This unit introduces sample survey methods, statistical techniques for the analysis of survey data and also introduces qualitative research techniques. It provides students with the knowledge and skills required to understand the role research methods play in problem identification, decision making, strategy development, marketing planning and the evaluation of marketing performance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the nature and scope of marketing research, and its role in business decision making
  2. understand the difference between qualitative, quantitative, descriptive and causal research
  3. design, undertake and analyse sample surveys, report and present their results
  4. use various data analysis techniques
  5. develop competence in using a statistical package (SPSS).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC2520 - Probability and statistical inference for economics and business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Donald Poskitt

Coordinator(s)

Professor Donald Poskitt

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC1000 or equivalent.

Synopsis

An introduction to probability and statistical inference for use in economics and business. Topics covered include random variables, moments and cumulants generating function, discrete and continuous distributions, independence, jointly distributed random variables, conditional random variables, the central limit theorem, sampling distribution, properties of estimators, confidence intervals, tests of hypotheses.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand concepts of probability, statistical inference, generating functions and cumulants
  2. derive and use generating functions to evaluate moments and establish the distribution of linear combinations of independent random variables
  3. understand and apply the main methods of estimation and the main properties of estimators
  4. construct confidence intervals for unknown parameters and test hypotheses
  5. develop written, presentational and group work skills through a series of assessed essays, assignments and tutorial work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3250 - Business analytics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Souhaib Ben Taieb

Coordinator(s)

Mr Souhaib Ben Taieb

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2410, ETC3440 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Business analytics involves uncovering the hidden information in masses of business data using statistical models and algorithms. In this unit, some of the most widely used prediction and classification models will be covered. A suitable software environment for business analytics will be used, and tools for handling large data sets will be introduced.

We will explore the trade-off and distinction between prediction, explanation and interpretation using statistical models. Topics to be covered include numerical optimisation; Monte Carlo simulation; resampling methods such as the bootstrap, cross-validation, and bagging; nonlinear and nonparametric methods such as regression splines, trees and support vector machines; principal components analysis and clustering.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. select and develop appropriate models for clustering, prediction or classification
  2. estimate and simulate from a variety of statistical models
  3. measure the uncertainty of a prediction or classification using resampling methods
  4. apply business analytic tools to produce innovative solutions in finance, marketing, economics and related areas
  5. manage very large data sets in a modern software environment
  6. explain and interpret the analyses undertaken clearly and effectively.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3400 - Principles of econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Coordinator(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC2410 or equivalent or be enrolled in course B6001.

Prohibitions

ETC4340

Synopsis

This unit provides a formal treatment of the core principles underlying econometric and statistical analysis, with particular focus given to likelihood-based inference. Topics covered include the likelihood principle and maximum likelihood estimation; minimum variance unbiased estimation; maximum likelihood asymptotic distribution theory; likelihood-based hypothesis testing; and quasi-maximum likelihood inference. The theoretical developments are supplemented by numerical results produced using computer simulation. Consideration is also given to the numerical optimisation techniques used to implement likelihood-based procedures in practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. consolidate the core principles underlying econometric and statistical analysis
  2. understand and implement the technique of maximum likelihood estimation and develop an appreciation of the associated asymptotic distribution theory
  3. understand and implement likelihood-based hypothesis testing and quasi-maximum likelihood inference

  4. develop the skills needed to demonstrate and explore theoretical sampling properties using computer simulation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3410 - Applied econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jun Sung Kim

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jun Sung Kim

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC2410 or equivalent or be enrolled in course B6001.

Prohibitions

ECC3410, ETC4341, ETW3410

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in modern applied econometrics. Emphasis is placed on models that address the special problems that arise when analysing microeconomic data, that is, data at the level of individual consumers, households and firms. The topics covered include modelling discrete dependent variables, modelling data sets that have both a cross-section and a time-series dimension and conducting inference in models in which the dependent variable is jointly determined with one or more of the regressors. The models taught in this unit are widely used in empirical work in economics, finance and marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a binary dependent variable
  2. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with one or more endogenous explanatory variables
  3. conduct statistical inference in a system of simultaneous equations
  4. conduct statistical inference on data that has both a time series and a cross section dimension.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3420 - Applied insurance methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2420, ETC2520, MTH2222 or equivalent.

Synopsis

To provide a grounding in the mathematics and statistics of short term insurance risk.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. calculate probabilities and moments of loss distributions both with and without limits and risk-sharing arrangements
  2. construct risk models involving frequency and severity distributions and calculate the moment generating function and the moments for the risk models both with and without simple reinsurance arrangements
  3. explain the concept of ruin for a risk model
  4. describe the fundamental concepts of risk rating and apply them to simple experience rating systems
  5. describe and apply techniques for analysing a delay (or run-off) triangle and projecting the ultimate position.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3430 - Financial mathematics under uncertainty

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Athanasios Pantelous

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Athanasios Pantelous

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2430 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Financial mathematics under uncertainty will apply the ideas of interest rates, present values, cash flow modelling and profit testing in the context of certain payments and payments dependent on individual deaths or other uncertain risk. We will also introduce stochastic modelling techniques applied to actuarial and financial contexts.

Students will cover the topics of present values and accumulated values, equations of value, markov modelling, survival models, life tables and contingent products.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the use of cash flow models to visualise a series of income and outgo within a financial context
  2. understand and be able to manipulate interest rates, to convert interest rates between effective and nominal, and to appropriate interest rates to cashflows
  3. explain the concept of survival models
  4. understand and apply the concepts of markov chains and jump processes to financial and actuarial contexts.
  5. understand mortality rates, the development of mortality tables and their use in pricing actuarial products
  6. understand the different types of actuarial products including annuity and assurance type products, their pricing and notation
  7. explain the sequence of procedures that should be applied to analyse a given dataset.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3440 - Introductory econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid-Araghi

Coordinator(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid-Araghi

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC2400, ETC2410, ETW2410, ECC2410

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the empirical analysis of relationships between economic variables. The approach is based on linear regression theory, and emphasises 'hands on' data analysis. Topics studied will include properties of least squares estimators, hypothesis testing, the choice of appropriate functional form, the use of dummy variables, issues around modelling survey data and the problems of serial correlation, heteroscedasticity and multicollinearity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and derive the properties of ordinary least squares in summation and matrix notation
  2. interpret, evaluate and apply inferential methods to multiple linear regression
  3. understand the use and implications of data scaling, functional form and dummy variables in regression modelling
  4. identify the presence of heteroscedasticity, adjust OLS standard errors and perform feasible GLS in regression models
  5. understand issues related to modelling with time-series data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3450 - Time series analysis for business and economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr John Stapleton

Coordinator(s)

Mr John Stapleton

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2410 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to modern time series methods. The topics covered include a review of stationary, univariate ARMA models, stochastic and deterministic trends, testing for unit roots, vector auto regressions, multivariate cointegration and error correction models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. model and forecast stationary autoregressive and moving average time series
  2. test for unit roots in univariate time series
  3. analyse the relationships between multiple, stationary time series
  4. test for, estimate and interpret the long run relationships between non-stationary time series.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3460 - Financial econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr David Frazier

Coordinator(s)

Dr David Frazier

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2410, ETC3440, MTH2232 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETF3300

Synopsis

The specification, estimation and testing of asset pricing models, including the capital asset pricing model and extensions; the statistical characteristics of financial data emphasising skewness, kurtosis and volatility aspects; volatility models such as ARCH models of financial time series, with applications to stock prices, derivatives, and exchange rates including the forecast performance of these models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the time series and distributional features of financial data
  2. explain appropriate specification, estimation and testing of asset pricing models
  3. evaluate the need for volatility models for financial returns
  4. describe the specification and estimation of conditional volatility models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3490 - Risk and business modelling

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lee Gordon-Brown

Coordinator(s)

Dr Lee Gordon-Brown
Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETC2470Not offered in 2018 or ETC2480Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

ETC2490

Synopsis

This unit covers modelling of business processes involving risk and uncertainty. It has a particular emphasis on the principles of decision making under risk and the use of Monte Carlo simulation methods for complex business operations. It covers applications in the management of manufacturing and services, including inventory control. Training is provided in the programming language Matlab and the simulation package Simul8.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an understanding of the quantitative way of thinking about business problems
  2. enhance analytical skills for problem solving
  3. increase computing skills for business modelling
  4. provide tools for decision making under risk
  5. examine quantitative dimensions of manufacturing and services management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3500 - Survey data analysis

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Peter Danaher

Coordinator(s)

Professor Peter Danaher

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2410, ETC2500, ETC3440, MKC2500 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MKC3500, ETF3500, MKF3500Not offered in 2018, ETC4350

Synopsis

Introduction to multivariate statistical techniques for the analysis of survey data and models to analyse the discrete choice behaviour of individuals. Topics include multivariate analysis of variance, principal components analysis, factor analysis, correspondence analysis and models of discrete choice behaviour. Statistical software and case studies will be utilised during this subject and students will apply the techniques to a variety of practical problems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. state clearly the research problem and associated research questions
  2. design comprehensive survey instruments
  3. demonstrate a logical argument in hypotheses development, analysis and data interpretation on the basis of scientific reasoning
  4. have a knowledge and understanding of relevant quantitative techniques used in marketing research
  5. communicate and present research findings in oral and written form with clarity and conciseness.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3510 - Modelling in finance and insurance

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Fima Klebaner

Coordinator(s)

Professor Fima Klebaner

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students have passed one of MTH2010, MTH2015, MTH2032 or ETC2440 and one of MTH2222, ETC2520 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC4351, ETC5351, MTH3251

Synopsis

Mathematical definition of options and other financial derivatives; probability models; mathematical models of random processes; applications; numerical methods; Monte Carlo methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the modern approach to evaluation of uncertain future payoffs
  2. develop an understanding of the concepts of arbitrage and fair games and their relevance to finance and insurance
  3. develop an understanding of concept of conditional expectation and martingales and their relation to pricing of financial derivatives
  4. develop an understanding of the random processes such as Random Walk, Brownian Motion and Diffusions and be able to apply them for modelling real life processes and risk models
  5. obtain skills to use Ito's formula
  6. develop the skills to price options by using the Binomial and Black-Scholes models
  7. ability to simulate the price process and obtain prices by simulation
  8. ability to formulate discrete time Risk Model in Insurance and use it for control of probabilities of ruin.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3530 - Contingencies in insurance and pensions

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2430, BFC2340 or equivalent.

Synopsis

The modelling and valuation of cash flows dependent on death, survival, or other uncertain risks.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. calculate, using ultimate or select mortality, net premiums and net premium reserves for increasing and decreasing benefits and annuities
  2. develop techniques for the valuation of annuity and assurance products involving two lives, and the use of actuarial functions in that situation
  3. develop methods which can be used to model cash flows contingent upon competing risks
  4. use the technique of discounted emerging costs as used in profit tests, pricing assessments and reserving calculations for various insurance and pension products
  5. address practical issues such as guarantees and options, risk classification and the effects of the pricing and reserving basis on the emergence of profit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3550 - Applied forecasting for business and economics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Rob Hyndman

Coordinator(s)

Professor Rob Hyndman

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2410, ETC2420, ETC3440 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC2450Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Reliable forecasts of business and economic variables must often be obtained against a backdrop of structural change in markets and the economy. This unit introduces methods suitable for forecasting in these circumstances including the decomposition of time series, exponential smoothing methods, ARIMA modelling, and regression with auto-correlated disturbances. Students can expect to enhance their computer skills with exercises using R.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an understanding of common statistical methods used in business and economic forecasting
  2. develop computer skills for forecasting business and economics time series data
  3. provide insights into the problems of implementing and operating large scale forecasting systems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3555 - Statistical machine learning

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Souhaib Ben Taieb

Coordinator(s)

Dr Souhaib Ben Taieb

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC3250 or FIT3154.

Synopsis

This unit covers the methods and practice of statistical machine learning for modern data analysis problems. Topics covered will include recommender systems, social networks, text mining, matrix decomposition and completion, and sparse multivariate methods. All computing will be conducted using the R programming language.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and understand the statistical and computational trade-offs in modern data analysis problems
  2. develop computer skills for exploring modern data sets
  3. understand and apply machine learning algorithms to solve modern data analysis problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC3580 - Advanced statistical modelling

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Rob Hyndman

Coordinator(s)

Professor Rob Hyndman

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC2410, ETC2420, ETC3440 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit introduces extensions of linear regression models for handling a wide variety of data analysis problems. Three extensions will be considered: generalised linear models for handling counts and binary data; mixed-effect models for handling data with a grouped or hierarchical structure; and non-parametric regression for handling non-linear relationships. All computing will be conducted using R.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an understanding of statistical models for handling common data analysis problems
  2. develop skills for fitting, interpreting and assessing statistical models
  3. develop computer skills for exploring and modelling different kinds of data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4010 - Special reading unit in econometrics honours

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Coordinator(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students have completed at least three third year econometrics units.

Synopsis

A unit of study in a special field of econometrics in which no formal unit is available. The supervisor will prescribe a list of references, consult frequently with the student and set whatever written work and examinations are deemed appropriate.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4110 - Actuarial practice 1

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mike Callan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mike Callan

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed the following units: ETC2430, ETC3430, ETC3530, ETC3420 and ETC3510, or completion of 24 credit points in course 4439

Synopsis

Unit ETC4110 covers the subject material required for Actuaries Institute subject Part IIA The Actuarial Control Cycle. The student is introduced to the concept of the Actuarial Control Cycle and how it can be applied in practical commercial situations in a wide range of insurance and related applications. This covers life insurance, general insurance, health insurance, pension or superannuation funds and investment issues. The unit also develops the student's understanding of a wide range of commercial background matters in insurance, pensions and investment - covering features of financial products, the related business environment in Australia, and Government policies affecting insurance and related industries. Risk management is introduced both in terms of the risk issues involved in offering insurance and related financial products, and the general concepts of Enterprise Risk Management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss and apply an actuarial control cycle in a variety of practical commercial situations
  2. apply the tests of professionalism
  3. examine the need for and impact of regulation and government policy on medium and long term commercial decisions
  4. analyse the main features and risks of financial products and contracts, from the point of view of consumers and providers
  5. demonstrate an understanding of enterprise risk management and its role in organisational management
  6. apply a risk assessment framework to identify and assess the risks in a range of commercial situations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4120 - Actuarial practice 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Coordinator(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC4110.

Synopsis

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss and apply the process of product design
  2. select an appropriate model to solve client problems
  3. recognise the importance of capital
  4. apply relevant approaches and techniques to the valuation of liabilities
  5. apply appropriate techniques to the pricing of products and contracts
  6. measure, report and manage solvency
  7. measure and report emerging profits and/or costs
  8. monitor and assess experience
  9. manage the business and respond to the experience.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4130 - Asset liability management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dan Zhu

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC4110 or be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

Unit ETC4130 covers the subject material required for Actuaries Institute subject Part IIB Investment and Asset Modelling. The unit gives an introduction into the investment background for Australian financial institutions, especially those offering insurance and related financial products. It then addresses issues in asset liability management. The student is introduced to the characteristics and behaviour of various investment types and the understanding of the relationship between risk and return. Valuation methods for investment types are addressed. Economic and financial theories relevant to investment are studied. The techniques of setting investment objectives for different investment funds are covered. More detailed issues in relation to asset liability management are then addressed, including how investment policy for assets may assist in managing liabilities for financial institutions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to describe and critically discuss the characteristics and behaviour of different Investment types under different economic conditions, understanding the relationship between risk and return and recognising risk factors which includes issuer default, counterparty failure, systemic liquidity, the collapse of speculative bubbles, shocks to the economic system and cyclical/structural changes
  2. develop an understanding of the methods used for valuation of the common forms of debt, equity, property and derivative securities. In particular students should be aware of the valuation methods and principles, data requirements and sources and the implicit assumptions and limitations of these models
  3. develop an understanding of the application and limitations of the major economic and financial theories relevant to investment, and be able to critically evaluate these theories including the efficient market hypothesis, the capital asset pricing model, multi-factor pricing models and theories from behavioural finance
  4. define appropriate investment objectives based on the liability profile of a fund
  5. specify appropriate investment constraints, based on the liability profile of a fund
  6. identify the characteristics of different types of asset models
  7. critically evaluate the appropriateness of an asset model for a given context
  8. derive consistent asset assumptions for asset models, taking into account historical data, prevailing industry expectations, contemporary investment literature, and other practical considerations such as tax
  9. apply asset assumptions, and the linkages contained within asset models, to real world situations
  10. describe and critically evaluate different approaches to asset allocation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4400 - Econometric theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Don Poskitt

Coordinator(s)

Professor Don Poskitt

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETC3400

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to outline the general principles that underlie what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM). The discussion is motivated by reference to econometric and statistical techniques, and simple practical examples with which students should be familiar. It is shown that GMM finds application in many areas of econometrics and business statistics, and that GMM may be viewed as a methodology that encompasses many econometric and statistical techniques. Broad topic headings are: Classical Method of Moments and Regression (OLS and IV), GMM, Identification, Asymptotic Distribution Theory for GMM, GMM and Optimal Inference.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. build upon existing concepts developed in previous courses and to outline the basic principles under-lying what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM)
  2. outline the classical Method of Moments and relationship of Regression to the Method of Moments
  3. discuss Identification and Asymptotic Distribution Theory in the context of the GMM
  4. examine GMM in relation to minimum variance unbiased estimation, and GMM based inference
  5. consider special cases of single equation and simultaneous equations GMM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4410 - Applied econometrics 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Daniel Melser

Coordinator(s)

Dr Daniel Melser

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC3400, ETC3410, ETC3450 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit involves a critical review of recent empirical work in econometrics. The topics to be covered include i) the specification and estimation of systems of consumer demand equations and producer demand and supply equations and extensions of these methods to other areas; and ii) structural vector autoregressions and error correction models, together with some practical applications that address macroeconomic issues. On completion of this unit students should be familiar with recent developments in these fields and have developed the skills to undertake empirical work. Further, students should be able to critically evaluate empirical work and related policy implications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. specify the structure of consumer demand systems
  2. use duality theory to generalise these specifications
  3. understand the use of appropriate specific estimation techniques
  4. extend these ideas to producer demand and supply models
  5. consider a number of empirical applications, and derive policy implications
  6. become competent in handling demand and production data using econometric software
  7. specify, estimate and interpret growth regressions
  8. understand the modelling of trends, cycles and structural breaks
  9. specify, estimate and interpret structural vector autoregressions and error correction models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4420 - Microeconometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Xueyan Zhao

Coordinator(s)

Professor Xueyan Zhao

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must passed ETC3400, ETC3410 or equivalent or be granted permission by the Chief Examiner to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

ETC5420, BEX4420

Synopsis

This unit involves the analysis of micro-level cross-sectional and panel data to study the behaviour of individuals and other micro-units as decision makers. It studies the specification, estimation, inference and evaluation of a range of microeconometric models. These include models for discrete, count, duration, censored or truncated dependent variables and examine issues arisen from sample selection and endogenous treatment. The aim of the unit is also for students to gain hands-on experience and computation skills for analysing large scale micro datasets. The computing package used for the unit is STATA.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. become familiar with typical features and structures of micro datasets
  2. be able to identify microeconometric models suitable for given micro datasets and given research objectives
  3. be able to specify, estimate, evaluate and analyse econometric models with dependent variables that are binary choices, multinomial discrete choices, durations, censored or truncated, using a given dataset
  4. be able to summarise and present key model results and measures of interest in tables and graphs
  5. be comfortable and proficient with the use of STATA software to manage and analyse large datasets
  6. have had hands-on experience with analysing several real world micro datasets in health, labour, finance and marketing research, through computing exercises and a written assignment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4430 - Quantitative economic policy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor John Madden

Coordinator(s)

Professor John Madden

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit covers the theoretical structure and application of computable general equilibrium (CGE) models. Topics include:

  • the derivation of the model's non-linear equation system
  • evaluation of coefficients and parameters, model closure, specification of economic shocks, solution techniques and interpretation of results.

During hands-on computing sessions, students will undertake simulations of a series of economic policy questions and analyse results.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the main elements of the theoretical structure of a computable general equilibrium (CGE) model
  2. acquire an understanding of how a CGE model is calibrated and implemented on computer
  3. develop the ability to conduct basic simulations with a comparative-static CGE model
  4. acquire skills in the analysis of the more readily interpretable model results in terms of model theory, data base, closure and shocks
  5. develop an elementary understanding of the key features of dynamic CGE models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4460 - Financial econometrics 2

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC3460 and one of ETC3400, ETC3410, ETC3450, ETC3510 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to a range of advanced, current techniques used in analysing financial data. Topics covered include the analysis of the time series and distributional features of financial data; the use of stochastic volatility and realised volatility models to capture time-varying volatility, including long memory in volatility; the use of econometric methods to estimate Value at Risk; the modelling of transactions data using trade duration models and transaction-based volatility models; continuous time processes and the application of econometric techniques to option pricing; and the use of generalised method of moments in financial models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate alternative methods of modelling asset return volatility
  2. explain the role of volatility modelling in the measurement of risk and in the pricing of financial derivatives
  3. describe the role of continuous time stochastic processes in the pricing of financial derivatives
  4. evaluate econometric models for high frequency data
  5. evaluate the use of generalized method of moments in financial models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4541 - Bayesian time series econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Coordinator(s)

Professor Gael Martin

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC3400 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC5410

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to both foundational and methodological aspects of Bayesian econometrics. Topics covered include a review of the philosophical and probabilistic foundations of Bayesian inference; the contrast between the Bayesian and frequentist (or classical) statistical paradigms; the use of prior information via the specification of objective, Jeffreys and subjective prior distributions; Bayesian linear regression; the use of simulation techniques in Bayesian inference, including Markov chain Monte Carlo algorithms; Bayesian analysis of Gaussian and non-Gaussian time series econometric models, including state space models; and the Kalman filter as a Bayesian updating rule.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the importance of Bayesian statistical techniques in econometric research and understand the differences between the Bayesian and frequentist statistical paradigms
  2. acquire the skills necessary to derive Bayesian results analytically, in simple models
  3. demonstrate an understanding of simulation methods and be able to implement these methods in empirically realistic econometric models
  4. understand the Kalman filter and its role in Bayesian inference in linear time series models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETC4860 - Honours research project

12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Xueyan Zhao

Coordinator(s)

Professor Xueyan Zhao

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

Topics for seminar presentation are selected in consultation with the coordinator. A list of possible topics will be distributed but students are encouraged to propose subjects of interest to them, based in their own discipline. Students present one paper, act as formal discussant on another, and are expected to engage in discussion of others.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the skills to present an area of research in the discipline of econometrics or statistics in a non-technical manner, both written and oral
  2. grow in ability to ask and address critical questions about research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 288 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average six/eight hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF1100 - Business statistics

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Geraldine Roberts (Caulfield)
Miss Carla Bainbridge (Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Ms Geraldine Roberts (Caulfield)
Dr Lito Cruz (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ETX1100, BUS1100, ETB1100, ETC1000, ETG1102, ETW1000, ETW1102, PMM2020, SCI1020, ETP1100, ETX9000, AFX9510, ETC9000, ETX9000 and students enrolled in course codes 1941, 2224, 3381 or 4423 cannot undertake this unit.

Synopsis

Students will learn to use basic statistical techniques and apply them to problems in accounting, finance, management, marketing and business in general. Students should also be able to effectively communicate the results of their analyses. This unit covers descriptive statistics for revealing the information contained in data; probability as a tool for dealing with uncertainty; probability distributions to model business behaviour; confidence interval estimation and hypothesis testing techniques for single populations; analysis of relationships between variables using simple linear regression; and simple tools for forecasting time series data. Excel software will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of Excel spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and apply inference methods to single populations
  4. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply suitable statistical techniques for describing and forecasting time series data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF2011 - Quantitative methods for risk analysis

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Bruce Stephens

Coordinator(s)

Mr Bruce Stephens

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETX1100 or ETF1100

Prohibitions

ETX9520, ETF5952, ETX2011Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit presents the basis techniques of quantitative risk analysis. Risk identification and measurement techniques most commonly used in industry are discussed, including descriptive statistics. The basic rules of probability are presented in practical contexts and as the foundation for the study of probability distributions - themselves the foundations of risk analysis models. Finally, spreadsheet models of practical situations are developed and evaluated, using simulation methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse risk statistically by summarising and interpreting data using techniques of descriptive statistics including the use of associated spreadsheet functions
  2. analyse and evaluate risk by applying concepts of probability and of probability distributions
  3. analyse and evaluate risk via Monte Carlo simulation, using @Risk software
  4. evaluate decision-making strategies, including use of PrecisionTree software
  5. describe and analyse the quality of production in an industrial process, using statistical control charts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30% + Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF2100 - Introductory econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich (First semester)
Dr Anastasios Panageliotis (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich (First semester)
Dr Anastasios Panageliotis (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETF1100 or equivalent or be enrolled in course B6001, B6003 or B6014.

Prohibitions

ETC2410, ETC3440, ECC2410

Synopsis

Econometrics is a set of research tools employed not only in economics but also in business disciplines. This unit covers the basic tools for estimation in the context of simple and multiple linear regression, the sampling properties of the least squares estimator, statistical inference and hypothesis testing. It also covers regression with dummy variables, model specification issues and estimation problems when least squares assumptions are violated. EViews is used as the software package.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply econometric tools to modelling, estimation, inference, and forecasting in the context of real world economic and business problems
  2. formulate and test hypotheses about the relationships between variables
  3. understand the nature and consequences of violation of the classical assumptions and know how to test for violations
  4. apply the skills and knowledge from the unit to real situations in business and economics
  5. demonstrate the ability to generate and analyse EViews computer output for business and economic applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF2121 - Data analysis in business

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ann Maharaj

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Ann Maharaj

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETB2111, ETX2111, ETC1010, ETW2111, ETX2121Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Further develops statistical concepts from ETX1100 and their application to business sectors such as finance and accounting. Sources of data and sampling techniques. Confidence intervals and hypothesis testing both for single populations and between populations to identify significant findings with applications to accounting and finance, risk modelling. Commonly used modelling methods in industry -- simple and multiple regression, analysis of time series in financial markets. Excel software will be used. Emphasis throughout is on interpretation of results that provides insight and value to management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of different sampling techniques and their role in business
  2. demonstrate an understanding of the role of statistical inference and its role when applied in business
  3. interpret and analyse the results of a regression analysis and their value when applied in business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF2480 - Business modelling

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jill Wright

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jill Wright

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF1100 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BUS2020, ETC2480Not offered in 2018, ETW2480

Synopsis

This is a software-oriented subject intended to provide a working knowledge of decision-making tools and techniques applicable in a business environment. Various optimisation techniques used in managerial decision-making will be introduced. Topics include business modelling with spreadsheets, linear programming models, transportation and assignment models, inventory control models, network models, project planning and scheduling models. Applications in management, marketing, accounting, finance and related fields are emphasised.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the relevance of quantitative analytical techniques in solving business decision problems
  2. formulate business decision problems as mathematical models and lay out as spreadsheet models
  3. apply tools available in Microsoft Excel and algorithms to generate solutions and interpret the results
  4. appraise the solutions through the use of sensitivity analysis
  5. communicate the analysis and results of business decision problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF2700 - Mathematics for business

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Mervyn Silvapulle (First semester)
Dr Yi He (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Professor Mervyn Silvapulle (First semester)
Dr Yi He (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ECC2440, ETC2440

Synopsis

The topics covered in this unit include: the linear model, linear simultaneous equations, non-linear functions, index numbers, financial mathematics, derivatives and partial differentiation, integration optimisation (constrained and non-constrained) and matrix algebra with software applications (e.g. Excel).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire skills in solving equations and applying them to problems arising in business
  2. understand the features of linear and non-linear models and their applications in economics, finance and business
  3. solve two and three dimensional simultaneous equations, with applications in areas including operations management
  4. work with arithmetic and geometric sequences and series and use them in financial applications
  5. develop skills to perform differentiation, optimisation (constrained and unconstrained) and basic matrix operations and apply them to understand and solve problems in business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF3200 - Applied econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vasilis Sarafidis

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vasilis Sarafidis

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100, ETC2410, ETC3440 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC3410

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in applied econometrics. The topics covered are linear regression models with random regressors, method of moments and instrumental variables estimation; simultaneous equations models; models for time-series data; introduction to maximum likelihood estimation; models for discrete dependent variables and models for panel data. EViews computer software is used to carry out data analysis and estimation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in linear regression models with random regressors using the method of moments and the instrumental variables estimators
  2. conduct statistical inference for simultaneous equations models
  3. understand the statistical properties of nonstationary macroeconomic time series data and how to model the long-run relationships among co-integrated time series
  4. conduct statistical inference in models with discrete dependent variables
  5. conduct statistical inference in panel data models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF3231 - Business forecasting

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor George Athanasopoulos

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor George Athanasopoulos

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETF2121, ETF2100 or ETC1010.

Prohibitions

ETC2450Not offered in 2018 and ETX3231Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Forecasts are crucial for guiding the planning and decision making process in business. In this unit you will learn to apply reliable methods for generating accurate forecasts in a rapidly changing business environment. These include: an introduction to regression modelling from a forecasting perspective, classical decomposition, exponential smoothing, Box-Jenkins ARIMA modelling and judgemental forecasting. You will build your programming skills by learning to program in R, a free programming language for statistical computing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop statistical skills for analysing data in a business environment
  2. learn how to build accurate and robust models for forecasting
  3. acquire computer skills vital for forecasting business and economic data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF3300 - Quantitative methods for financial markets

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wei Wei

Coordinator(s)

Dr Wei Wei

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100 or ETF2121 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC3460, ETF5930, ETF9300

Synopsis

This unit covers statistics and econometric tools to assess the time series properties and distributional properties of financial series. It teaches how to model and estimate the single-factor and multiple-factor capital asset pricing models; and conduct diagnostic checks and reliable statistical inferences on various risk-return relationships and financial market hypotheses. It also introduces recent literature on modelling, estimating and forecasting financial markets' volatility; and parametric and nonparametric methods to estimate the value at risk and expected shortfall. Statistical software will be used to carry out financial data analysis and applied research projects.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. assess the time series and distributional properties of financial data
  2. evaluate the risk-return relationship among financial assets
  3. estimate the long run relationship among financial time series and test market hypotheses arising in finance
  4. analyse and model the volatility of financial returns and estimated value at risk and relate measures
  5. demonstrate the ability to generate and analyse EViews computer output.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF3480 - Optimisation for managers

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tissa Galagedera

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tissa Galagedera

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2480 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop quantitative problem solving skills. The emphasis is on recognising and identifying decision problems, modelling them and generating solutions to them. Various optimisation techniques used in the business decision-making process will be introduced. Topics include benchmarking with data envelopment analysis, game theory, queuing models, Markov chains and simulation modelling. Applications in business, particularly in management, marketing, banking and finance will be used in the demonstration.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the complementary nature of the rational and behavioural approaches to decision making
  2. select and apply quantitative modelling concepts to problems arising from business
  3. formulate an appropriate model to analyse various business decision problems
  4. apply tools available in Microsoft Excel and algorithms to generate solutions and appraise the solutions through the use of sensitivity analysis
  5. communicate the analysis and results of business decision problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF3500 - High dimensional data analysis

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Coordinator(s)

Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100, ETF2121, ETC2410, ETC2420 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC3500

Synopsis

In many fields of business, analysts must deal with data on many variables, for example, surveys with a large number of questions. In such cases, statistical tools known as multivariate methods must be used to analyse the data and drive business decisions.

This unit covers such methods in three sections: Cluster Analysis, Discriminant Analysis and MANOVA can be used to identify, predict and test for differences groups such as between distinct classes of customers or products; Principal Components Analysis, Correspondence Analysis and Multidimensional Scaling are dimension reduction methods that help analysts to visualise complicated datasets; and finally, Factor Analysis and Structural Equation Modelling are used to predict and test theories and explain and predict business outcomes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the role that multivariate statistical techniques such as factor analysis, structural equation modelling, categorical data analysis, cluster analysis, multidimensional scaling and correspondence analysis play in uncovering relationships and patterns in survey data
  2. appraise the strengths and limitations of these techniques
  3. apply tools in R to generate solutions for the appropriate statistical techniques
  4. demonstrate skills in using the appropriate statistical techniques from a user and provider perspective
  5. demonstrate skills in communicating the results of the analysis so that decision making can be implemented.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETF3600 - Quantitative models for business research

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vasilis Sarafidis

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vasilis Sarafidis

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETF2100, ETC2410, ETC3440 or equivalent.

Synopsis

The topics covered in this unit include: review of regression analysis, binomial dependent variables, unordered multinomial dependent variables, ordered multinomial dependent variables, duration dependent variables. Computer software EVIEWS will be used to apply these techniques to real world problems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide a solid understanding of regression analysis including relationships with dependent variables that can be binary, in unordered categories, in ordered categories and duration variables
  2. analyse these relationships using a software package
  3. analyse, interpret and communicate the business value of results.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETS1102 - Business statistics

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Alain Kaninda

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

BUS1100, PMM2020, ETB1100, ETC1000, ETG1102, ETP1100, ETW1000, ETW1102, ETX1100, SCI1020, STA1010

Synopsis

Topics include an introduction to spreadsheeting; descriptive statistics; elementary probability; discrete and continuous probability distributions; statistical inference; simple linear regression and correlation; forecasting and time series; and Index numbers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and applying inference methods to single population means
  4. evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply time series techniques of indexing, deflating, and forecasting to business and financial series, and interpreting the results.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETS1200 - Quantitative methods for business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Moremi Labeodan

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Term 1 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in the Bachelor of Business Science to undertake this unit.

Synopsis

This unit aims to develop the mathematical knowledge, skills and attitudes of first year business students. Students will learn about the following topics; mathematical preliminaries, the straight line and applications, simultaneous equations, non-linear functions and applications, differentiation and applications, integration and applications, function of several variables (partial differentiation), basic linear algebra and financial mathematics (arithmetic and geometric progression, simple and compound interest, depreciation and net present value).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. perform basic mathematical calculations with algebraic expressions and fractions
  2. understand the straight line function to model a wide range of concepts in economics and business such as the demand, supply and cost functions
  3. use different methods to solve simultaneous equations analytically and graphically and apply these methods to the analysis of equilibrium in the goods, labour and money markets
  4. use different types of non-linear functions in economics and business
  5. understand differentiation, integration and derivatives of several functions and their optimisation and how it can be applied to business
  6. solve first and second order partial derivatives
  7. perform basic matrix arithmetic operations and determine the determinant and inverse of 2x2 and 3x3 matrices
  8. calculate the arithmetic and geometric sequences and series and apply them in financial mathematics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETS2000 - Advanced quantitative methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Moremi Labeodan

Coordinator(s)

Ms Moremi Labeodan

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETS1200 or with permission.

Synopsis

The purpose of this module is to develop a scope of knowledge of the main areas of the theory of single variable and multivariable calculus, namely differentiation and integration of one or more variable functions by means of first principles and otherwise, and to include an understanding of the key terms, concepts, facts, principles, rules and theories pertaining to single and multivariable variable calculus.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are for students to understand the following concepts:

  1. functions and limits
  2. derivative, derivative as a function, higher derivatives
  3. application of differentiations: maximum and minimum values, graphs, limits at infinity, optimisation problems
  4. integrals: areas and distances, definite and indefinite integrals, fundamental theorems of calculus
  5. applications of integrations: areas between curves
  6. exponential functions and their derivatives
  7. techniques of integration
  8. differential equations
  9. infinite series and sequences
  10. partial derivatives
  11. multiple integrals
  12. advance linear algebra

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETS2010 - Introductory probability theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Rakesh Bhurtun

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETS2000 or equivalent.

Synopsis

The main aim of this unit is to provide a solid introductory background in probability theory to students wishing to pursue a career as an econometrician, but also to those who wants to do further studies in economics at post-graduate level.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to understand the concepts of:

  1. axiomatic probability theory (conditional probabilities)
  2. random variables (standard univariate discrete/continuous distributions)
  3. expected values and moments (moment generating functions)
  4. jointly distributed variates and Multivariate probability distributions
  5. distributions of functions of random variables
  6. sampling distributions
  7. estimation theory

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETS2111 - Business data modelling

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Rakesh Bhurtun

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 2 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETS1102 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETB2111, ETW1010, ETW2010, ETW1031, ETB1100, ETP1100, ETW2111

Synopsis

This unit aims to provide an understanding of sampling designs and inference, confidence limits and tests on means, proportion, differences, cross tabulation, with chi square, simple and multiple linear regression (regression with non-linear terms), regression with dummy variables, and an introduction to the analysis of variance. This unit uses Excel.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. choose and apply an appropriate sampling design
  2. understand and interpret confidence intervals and hypothesis tests for means, proportions and variances, and be able to identify significant differences
  3. understand and conduct regression analyses to interpret and communicate the business value of the results
  4. understand and conduct one way analysis of variance in business problems
  5. understand the concept and application of Chi-square test for independence between business variables.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETS2410 - Introductory econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid-Araghi

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETS2111 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETW2410, ECC2410, ETC2410, ETC3440.

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the empirical analysis of relationships between economic variables. The approach is based on linear regression theory and emphasises 'hands on' data analysis. Topics studied will include properties of least squares estimators, hypothesis testing, the choice of appropriate functional form, the use of dummy variables, issues around modelling survey data, and the problems of serial correlation, heteroscedasticity and multicollinearity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and derive the properties of ordinary least squares in summation and matrix notation
  2. interpret, evaluate and apply inferential methods to multiple linear regression
  3. understand the use and implications of data scaling, functional form and dummy variables in regression modelling
  4. identify the presence of heteroscedasticity, adjust OLS standard errors and perform feasible GLS in regression models
  5. understand issues related to modelling with time-series data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETS3410 - Applied econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Rakesh Bhurtun

Coordinator(s)

Mr Rakesh Bhurtun

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETS2410 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETW3410, ETC3410

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in modern applied econometrics. Emphasis is placed on models that address the special problems that arise when analysing microeconomic data, that is, data at the level of individual consumers, households and firms. The topics covered include modelling discrete dependent variables, modelling data sets that have both a cross-section and a time-series dimension and conducting inference in models in which the dependent variable is jointly determined with one or more of the regressors. The models taught in this unit are widely used in empirical work in economics, finance and marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a binary dependent variable (LOGIT and PROBIT models)
  2. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a limited dependent variable (TOBIT and Censored Regression models)
  3. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with one or more endogenous explanatory variables
  4. conduct statistical inference in a system of simultaneous equations
  5. conduct statistical inference on data that has a time series dimension.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW1000 - Business and economic statistics

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jason Ng Wei Jian

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

ETC1000, ETG1102, ETW1102, ETX1100, ETB1100, ETP1100, ETX9000, FIT1006, STA1010, SCI1020

Synopsis

An introduction to descriptive statistics -- the collection, organisation, presentation and analysis of grouped and ungrouped data using measures of location and dispersion; the construction of index numbers, with application to share price indices and the CPI; analysis of relationships between variables using simple and multiple regression, with applications to forecasting; main ideas of probability theory as a foundation for statistical inference; concept of sampling as a way of capturing uncertainty about data; estimators and their properties; constructing and interpreting confidence intervals, testing a hypothesis, including analysis of variance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business and economic data using descriptive statistics techniques
  2. construct and interpret index numbers
  3. describe the concept of a sampling distribution, estimators and their properties
  4. use P values to make inference on single population means for business and economic decision-making
  5. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business and economic decision-making using simple linear regression
  6. apply the main ideas of probability theory, discrete and continuous probability distributions to business and economic decision-making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW1010 - Data modelling and computing

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Dianne Cook

Coordinator(s)

Mr Nazirul Hazim A Khalim (First semester)
Dr Santha Vaithilingam (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETW1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETB1100, ETC1010, ETC9010, ETW1031, ETW2111, ETW2010

Synopsis

Introduction to principles and techniques for modelling business and economic data.

Modelling in business and finance using computers -- spreadsheet modelling of business problems, organising and accessing data efficiently. Modelling in economics and finance -- multiple regression as a tool for modelling macroeconomic and microeconomic decisions, elasticities and statistical evaluation of policy, time series modelling with application to finance. Introduction to actuarial studies as an approach to building quantitative models of risk.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply principles and techniques of data management with computers and spreadsheet modelling to business and economic decision-making problems, including profit models, breakeven analysis, sensitivity analysis, simulation, optimisation under uncertainty and network models
  2. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business and economic decision-making using multiple linear regression, including dummy variables, functional form, trends and seasonality in time series as well as inference, confidence intervals and prediction
  3. apply statistical techniques for making decisions with quantitative and categorical data in business and economics, including testing hypotheses about population mean(s), population proportion(s), one- and two-way analysis of variance, and difference between proportions in contingency tables.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW1102 - Business statistics

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Thangarajah Thiagu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Thangarajah Thiagu

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

BUS1100, PMM2020, ETB1100, ETC1000, ETG1102, ETP1100, ETW1000, ETX1100, SCI1020, STA1010

Synopsis

Introduction to spreadsheeting. Descriptive statistics. Elementary probability. Discrete and continuous probability distributions. Statistical inference. Simple linear regression and correlation. Forecasting and time series. Index numbers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and applying inference methods to single population means
  4. evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply time series techniques of indexing, deflating, and forecasting to business and financial series, and interpreting the results.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW2111 - Business data modelling

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Thangarajah Thiagu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Thangarajah Thiagu

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETW1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETB2111, ETW1010, ETW2010, ETW1031, ETX2111

Synopsis

Sampling designs and inference; confidence limits and tests on means, proportion, differences. Cross tabulation, with chi square. Simple and multiple linear regression: regression with non-linear terms; regression with dummy variables. Introduction to analysis of variance. Uses Excel.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. choose and apply an appropriate sampling design
  2. understand and interpret confidence intervals and hypothesis tests for means, proportions and variances, and be able to identify significant differences
  3. understand and conduct regression analyses to interpret and communicate the business value of the results
  4. understand and conduct one way analysis of variance in business problems
  5. understand the concept and application of Chi-square test for independence between business variables.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW2410 - Introductory econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Vahid-Araghi

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Santha Vaithilingam

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETW1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ECC2410, ETC2410, ETC3440

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the empirical analysis of relationships between economic variables. The approach is based on linear regression theory, and emphasises 'hands on' data analysis. Topics studied will include properties of least squares estimators, hypothesis testing, the choice of appropriate functional form, the use of dummy variables, issues around modelling survey data and the problems of serial correlation, heteroscedasticity and multicollinearity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and derive the properties of ordinary least squares in summation and matrix notation
  2. interpret, evaluate and apply inferential methods to multiple linear regression
  3. understand the use and implications of data scaling, functional form and dummy variables in regression modelling
  4. identify the presence of heteroscedasticity, adjust OLS standard errors and perform feasible GLS in regression models
  5. understand issues related to modelling with time-series data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW2420 - Survey methods and managerial statistics

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ewilly Liew Jie Ying

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ewilly Liew Jie Ying

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETW1000 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Introduction to sample survey methods, quality management and statistical techniques for survey data used in business, industry and the public sector. Topics covered include the planning and execution of a survey, sampling methods, quality management and sampling, the design of experiments, analysis of variance and analysis of 'ranked data'.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how to conduct a survey, including planning, execution and cost-benefit analysis
  2. apply concepts of probability and probability distribution to problems associated to survey data
  3. describe the role of statistical inference for survey data and applying inference methods to population mean, variance (bound), proportion, and totals
  4. use statistical inference methods to determine the optimal sample size for a survey;
  5. analyse survey data using experimental design techniques and analysis of variance methods (both for unranked and ranked data)
  6. apply statistical quality control methods and survey techniques for data used in business, industry and the public sector, including Six Sigma methodologies
  7. demonstrate in the individual summative assessment task a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit. This is demonstrated by the requirement that the student must attain a mark of at least 40% in the final summative assessment task (final exam).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW2472 - Project management analytics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Elsa Phung Yet Chin

Coordinator(s)

Ms Elsa Phung Yet Chin

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGW2700, MGG2700, MGX2700Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Project management analytics introduces students to a data-driven approach to making rational and effective project decisions. This unit covers the essential concepts, tools and analytical techniques for effective project management according to the global industry standards set by the Project Management Institute. This will enable students to learn broad perspectives of managerial skills and knowledge required to initiate, implement, and evaluate successful projects. Students will be trained to understand and apply analytics-based project metrics to measure, observe, and analyse project performance objectively and make rational project decisions with analytical certainty. Throughout the unit, students will also employ relevant information technology and project management software to achieve quality outcomes that underpin and reinforce the conceptual and analytics perspectives of project management in businesses.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce the data-driven project management framework
  2. introduce analytics concepts, tools and techniques for effective project management
  3. demonstrate the applications of analytical techniques in project management decision-making
  4. identify and demonstrate, with examples, the processes of monitoring and controlling the uncertainty of project schedule and project cost, and to accurately estimate the same with analytics-driven prediction
  5. describe the project completion process
  6. apply tools and principles to project management through use of information technology, setting quality standards, risk analysis, and identifying obstacles to project success.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW2480 - Business modelling methods

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Akram Hasanov

Coordinator(s)

Dr Akram Hasanov

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETW1000 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

BUS2020, ETC2480Not offered in 2018, ETF2480

Synopsis

Topics include business modelling with spreadsheets and R programming language; the methodology of business modelling; linear programming; primal and dual models; integer programming; transportation; and assignment problems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe business models using concept diagrams and mathematical programming formulations
  2. understand analytical and algorithmic optimisations applied to real-life business cases
  3. formulate, solve and interpret business problems with linear programming using graphical methods, Excel Solver, R program, simplex method, and branch and bound algorithms
  4. implement and analyse duality, sensitivity, transportation, assignment problems, and integer programming.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW3410 - Applied econometrics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Akram Hasanov

Coordinator(s)

Dr Akram Hasanov

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETW2410 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC3410

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in modern applied econometrics. Emphasis is placed on models that address the special problems that arise when analysing microeconomic data, that is, data at the level of individual consumers, households and firms. The topics covered include modelling discrete dependent variables, modelling data sets that have both a cross-section and a time-series dimension and conducting inference in models in which the dependent variable is jointly determined with one or more of the regressors. The models taught in this unit are widely used in empirical work in economics, finance and marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a binary dependent variable (LOGIT and PROBIT models)
  2. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a limited dependent variable (TOBIT and Censored Regression models)
  3. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with one or more endogenous explanatory variables
  4. conduct statistical inference in a system of simultaneous equations
  5. conduct statistical inference on data that has a time series dimension.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW3420 - Principles of forecasting and applications

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jason Ng Wei Jian

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jason Ng Wei Jian

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETW2410 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC2450Not offered in 2018, ETX3231Not offered in 2018, ETW3232

Synopsis

Obtaining reliable forecasts of business and economic variables is a challenging task that organisations face. This challenge is exacerbated against the backdrop of structural changes and volatility in markets and the economy. In this unit, students will be introduced to methods suitable for forecasting in these circumstances. These methods include classical decomposition of time series, exponential smoothing, Box-Jenkins ARIMA modelling and regression with auto-correlated disturbances. Students will also be exposed to several case studies, to study the application of these methods in real-life situations. Students can expect to enhance their computer skills with exercises using econometric packages.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. Motivate the need for obtaining reliable forecasts in business and economics
  2. Understand and apply appropriate statistical methods for business and economic forecasting
  3. Develop computer skills for forecasting from business and economic time series data
  4. Develop research skills and be able to write and present reports effectively.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW3481 - Econometric methods for finance

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Akram Hasanov

Coordinator(s)

Dr Akram Hasanov

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETW2410 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to a wide range of contemporary financial econometric techniques which are commonly utilised in the financial data analysis. Topics covered include the random walk model, volatility and risk modelling, and several symmetric and asymmetric univariate volatility models. Also, this unit will expose students to applications of econometric analysis in the multivariate asset pricing models, portfolio selection and performance analysis, and volatility transmissions between markets and assets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the properties and distributional characteristics of financial returns
  2. understand and model the first moment (mean) and second moment (volatility)processes
  3. understand the stages of analysis and critically assess the challenges and shortcomings in the models
  4. understand and acquire the skills needed to interpret risk measures (e.g. value at risk)
  5. understand and conduct diagnostic tests of financial time series models and generate forecasts for returns and volatility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW3482 - Data mining for business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Elsa Phung Yet Chin

Coordinator(s)

Ms Elsa Phung Yet Chin

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed 12 credit points in any second year level unit in any discipline.

Prohibitions

FIT3002Not offered in 2018, CSE3212, GCO3828 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit aims to provide an understanding and application of the tools and techniques of data mining in delivering superior value added propositions to businesses. Students will learn the data mining methodology, appropriate techniques to apply in different cases, practical use of data mining software and how to interpret the knowledge generated from these tools. Students will be exposed to emerging areas in data mining, such as applications of data mining in the cloud.

Students will also learn about ethical concerns on the use of data mining. Superior data mining skills and knowledge enables the business to maximise the value of current customers, through creative and critical analysis of favourable circumstances and possibilities for gaining increasing business and or reducing costs from current customers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the different stages of the data mining process
  2. understand the role that data mining play in various areas of business
  3. select the appropriate data mining tools to suit the problem at hand
  4. have hands-on experience on using data mining tools on various case studies such as direct marketing campaigns and product introductions, and analysing customer churn
  5. interpret and apply critical thinking on the results generated from the data mining models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETW3483 - Enterprise analytics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ewilly Liew Jie Ying

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ewilly Liew Jie Ying

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Successful completion of 12 credit points of any second year level unit in any discipline.

Synopsis

This unit aims to develop within students, the fundamental business information knowledge and its application towards creating, enabling and preserving business value. Specifically, it aims to develop an understanding of the primary enabler for better business analytics processes, which includes an in-depth awareness of information type, access, integration, and analysis within a business environment. Areas of study include ERP systems, business process mapping, business analytics linkages to four insights on customer relationship management (CRM), supply chain management (SCM), finance and accounting (FICO) as well as other operational and external business areas. This unit equips students with the use of SAP software for operational analytics and next-generation business intelligence.

Outcomes

Upon successful completion of the unit, students should be able to:

  1. Understand the origin, characteristics, technologies and integration of ERP systems
  2. Understand the business processes and acquire the skills to identify and map best practice processes
  3. Understand the implementation stages and evaluate the challenges and limitations in ERP implementation
  4. Understand the ERP modules (SCM and CRM) and acquire the skills to identify the cause-and-effect relationship necessary for business analytics
  5. Understand the four analytical insights (operational, supply chain, customer and external) and develop a business process improvement activity that creates value.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETX2011 - Quantitative methods for risk analysis

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Bruce Stephens

Coordinator(s)

Mr Bruce Stephens

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETX1100

Prohibitions

ETX9520, ETX2011

Synopsis

This unit presents the basis techniques of quantitative risk analysis. Risk identification and measurement techniques most commonly used in industry are discussed, including descriptive statistics. The basic rules of probability are presented in practical contexts and as the foundation for the study of probability distributions - themselves the foundations of risk analysis models. Finally, spreadsheet models of practical situations are developed and evaluated, using simulation methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse risk statistically by summarising and interpreting data using techniques of descriptive statistics including the use of associated spreadsheet functions
  2. analyse and evaluate risk by applying concepts of probability and of probability distributions
  3. analyse and evaluate risk via Monte Carlo simulation, using @Risk software
  4. evaluate decision-making strategies, including use of PrecisionTree software
  5. describe and analyse the quality of production in an industrial process, using statistical control charts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30% + Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETX2121 - Data analysis in business

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ann Maharaj (First semester)
Mr Bruce Stephens (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Ann Maharaj (First semester)
Mr Bruce Stephens (Second semester)

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETX1100 or a credit grade in ETW1102

Prohibitions

ETX2111, ETC1010, ETW2111

Synopsis

Further develops statistical concepts from ETX1100 and their application to business sectors such as finance and accounting. Sources of data and sampling techniques. Confidence intervals and hypothesis testing both for single populations and between populations to identify significant findings with applications to accounting and finance, risk modelling. Commonly used modelling methods in industry -- simple and multiple regression, analysis of time series in financial markets. Excel software will be used. Emphasis throughout is on interpretation of results that provides insight and value to management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of different sampling techniques and their role in business
  2. demonstrate an understanding of the role of statistical inference and its role when applied in business
  3. interpret and analyse the results of a regression analysis and their value when applied in business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETX2250 - Data visualisation and analytics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jill Wright (Caulfield, Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jill Wright (Caulfield)
Dr Lito Cruz (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have completed one of the following units: ETB1100, ETC1000, ETF1100, ETG1102, ETP1100, ETW1000, ETW1102, ETX1100, SCI1020 or STA1010 before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

Business analytics can unlock the hidden insights in data to give businesses a competitive advantage. Many businesses have masses of data about customers and operations, and need skilled analysts to uncover insights and make informed predictions.

This unit uses data visualisation to explore and analyse data sets of all sizes, and it introduces some business analytic models for interpretation and prediction.

It will introduce an appropriate software environment for data visualisation, and analytics, and cover visualisation and analysis techniques for categorical and numerical variables. Visualisation methods to be covered include some of Box-and-whisker plots, Mosaics, Rotatable 3D scatter plots, Heat maps, Motion charts, cluster and association charts. Models to be covered may include linear regression models, classification and regression trees, and random forests. Methods for evaluating model performance will also be discussed. Examples from marketing, finance, economics and related disciplines will be included.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. select, create and interpret appropriate types of visual representation for a given set of data
  2. select and develop model types with explanatory and/or predictive ability
  3. make appropriate use of in-sample and out-of-sample evaluation of models
  4. apply the above research skills to produce innovative solutions in finance, marketing, economics and related areas
  5. use visualisation and modelling to effectively communicate the results of their investigations
  6. explain the sequence of procedures that should be applied to analyse a given dataset.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average four hours of scheduled activities per week when taught in trimester mode, and three to four hours three times per week when taken as a summer unit. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


ETX3231 - Business forecasting

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Econometrics and Business Statistics

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ann Maharaj

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Ann Maharaj

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETX2111, ETX2121Not offered in 2018, ETF2100 or ETC1010

Prohibitions

ETC2450Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Basic forecasting tools. Review of basic time series analysis techniques. Moving averages and exponential smoothing forecasting methods. Box-Jenkins method of forecasting. Comparison of forecasting techniques. Introduction to time series regression and dynamic models. Applications to time series from the accounting, economics, banking, finance and management areas. Excel and SPSS will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the basic tools of forecasting and define the basic time series analysis techniques
  2. describe the decomposition techniques, exponential smoothing forecasting techniques and Box-Jenkins method of forecasting
  3. compare the forecasts of real economic, business and financial time series by decomposition techniques and exponential smoothing techniques using Excel and Box Jenkins method using SPSS
  4. differentiate between decomposition methods, exponential smoothing methods and autoregressive methods of forecasting
  5. analyse time series in the business environment using the appropriate methods and interpret computer output.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGB1010 - Introduction to management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Claire Smith

Coordinator(s)

Ms Claire Smith

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGC1010, MGF1010, MGG1010, MGP1010, MGW1010

Synopsis

This unit offers a critical introduction to fundamental questions in the discipline of management. What is management? What do managers do, and how do I become a good manager? What are the effects of management practice on employees and their experience of being managed? Key contemporary issues of globalisation and cultural diversity, ethics and social responsibility affect the answers to these questions and are therefore woven throughout the curriculum. The unit draws upon a range of sources - academic, practical, popular cultural - to engage students in multiple ways of knowing about management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a contextual appreciation of management as an evolving set of contested ideas for how managers may influence people, organisations, and their environments to achieve organisational goals
  2. identify what managers do in practice, and analyse how the various activities that comprise managing both shape and are shaped by individual and group behaviour and diversity in organisational settings
  3. critically evaluate the impact of contemporary management practices on employee experiences of being managed
  4. explain the concepts of stakeholder interests, ethics and responsible management and assess their implications for individuals and organisations in a global context
  5. apply research, analytical and communication skills required of the management discipline to address business challenges.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGB2200 - Business Communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Pieter Van Dijk

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Pieter Van Dijk

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must complete one of the following units: MGB1010, MGC1010, MGF1010, MGP1010, MGS1010 or MGW1010

Prohibitions

MGW1110, MGG1100, MGF1100

Synopsis

Business communication is designed to provide students with the skills and knowledge of communication in professional contexts. The unit emphasises organisational communication theory, its application to effective written communication, informative and persuasive communication, the role of verbal and non-verbal communication, and interpersonal skills in business teams and cultures. The underlying theme of the unit is to provide awareness of a range of professional communication skills required to meet 21st century career demands. Students will be provided the opportunity to develop and demonstrate a range of skills to assist in meeting communication challenges within organisations in preparation for employment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate communication theories underpinning business communication
  2. analyse the relationships between different business communication theories and concepts
  3. demonstrate creative solutions to persuasive and informative business communication challenges
  4. understand the roles of verbal and non-verbal communication and interpersonal communication in business contexts
  5. develop professional writing skills for business, electronic communication and social media for business communication.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGB2230 - Organisational behaviour

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Andrea Kirk-Brown

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Andrea Kirk-Brown

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB1010 or MGC1010 or MGF1010 or MGG1010 or MGP1010 or MGW1010

Prohibitions

MGC2230, MGF2111, MGG2230, MGW2230

Synopsis

Students gain an understanding of factors affecting the behaviour of people in work settings. The unit focuses on individual, group, and total organisational human factors influencing the effectiveness of organisations including: the nature of organisations in the global context; individual behaviour including perception, attitudes, values and personality, motivation and performance; group behaviour in organisations including the properties and management of groups, leaders and leadership, organisational power, influence, communication, conflict and decision making; organisational structure; organisational culture; change; the formal and informal organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine theories of organisational behaviour to develop fundamental knowledge of organisational behaviour as an area of management
  2. analyse organisational behaviour issues from multiple workplace perspectives
  3. examine how managers can use knowledge of organisational behaviour to manage individual employees and teams
  4. apply theoretical organisational behaviour concepts to organisational situations using the case study method
  5. demonstrate skills in evaluation and analysis of organisational behaviour concepts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGB2430 - People, culture and strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Hannah Meacham

Coordinator(s)

Dr Hannah Meacham

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB1010 or MGC1010 or MGF1010 or MGG1010 or MGP1010 or MGW1010

Prohibitions

MGC2430, MGF2661, MGG2430, MGW2430

Synopsis

Increased competition within the business environment has enhanced the focus on human resource strategies for business success. This unit will introduce students to the world of human resource management (HRM) and will explore the role of people, culture and strategy across contexts, sectors and occupations. This unit is designed to provide students with an opportunity to develop a critical approach to HRM concepts, models and theories. In addressing the challenges for 21st century students, the unit will also enhance student's employability by introducing personal development as a concept, and will enhance job readiness through providing opportunities for personal development.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the scope and purpose of HRM through the principles and practices of contrary people, culture and strategy initiatives
  2. critically evaluate and analyse conceptual frameworks for assessing HRM systems in a global business environment and across different cultural/national setting
  3. develop creative solutions to a range of contemporary HRM challenges involving people, culture and strategy initiatives
  4. enhance student employability and job readiness skills, through personal development opportunities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGB3120 - Inclusive Management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Claire Smith

Coordinator(s)

Ms Claire Smith

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB1010 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MGP2279, MGS3210 and MGW3210.

Synopsis

Inclusive management is concerned with leveraging society's diversity for the benefit of individuals, groups and organisations. In the unit, students will develop a greater understanding of difference and inclusion, identify inclusive management opportunities for different contexts and practice approaches to effectively implement these changes. Current business trends and future directions for research are covered. The unit prepares students to manage effectively, garnering positive and inclusive individual, group and organisational outcomes. This unit is also designed to develop students' awareness of current theoretical perspectives on, and empirical evaluations of, organisational initiatives designed to foster well-being through diversity at both the individual and organisational level.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. synthesis concepts of mindset, openness, difference and inclusion
  2. analyse internal management inclusion opportunities and challenges
  3. analyse and compare solutions for external management inclusion opportunities and challenges
  4. demonstrate awareness of self and inclusive management practices
  5. identify predictors and consequences of 'wellness' and 'toxicity' in the organisational context
  6. describe and critically evaluate current organisational wellness initiatives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGB3249 - Events and Project Management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter O'Neill

Coordinator(s)

Dr Peter O'Neill

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB1010 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MGP2249 and MGP3249.

Synopsis

This unit explores the principles, processes and practice of project management. It examines the myriad of challenges and opportunities created in trying to balance strategic initiatives and operational realities within organisations. The unit reviews how to plan and manage events of all sizes and complexities. Students who have undertaken this unit should be able to select and utilise appropriate project management tools and techniques when planning and managing an event.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine, analyse and synthesise the concepts, principles, processes and practice of project management
  2. apply and critically evaluate the project management techniques and decision tools within constrained, ambiguous and uncertain business environments
  3. assess the interrelationship between organisational strategy, innovation and change with project management
  4. enhance communication, interpersonal, research, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGB3684 - Business strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sarah Lindsay

Coordinator(s)

Ms Jami Hurley

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB1010 or MGC1010 or MGF1010 or MGG1010 or MGP1010 or MGW1010 and 96 credit points.

Prohibitions

MGP3684, MGC3110, MGW3401, MGF3401, MGG3401

Synopsis

Business strategy enhances students' knowledge of the process of strategy formulation, implementation and evaluation within a business, and the key contextual factors and managerial decisions which influence this process. The unit develops skills in research, academic writing and application to current and future business environments. The unit amalgamates aspects from a range of management areas and prepares students to be able to develop and apply sound business strategy methods in practical settings.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and explain the core concepts of business strategy
  2. explain and evaluate the influence of key contextual variables on a business' strategy
  3. apply and critically analyse business strategy formulation, implementation and evaluation concepts and the relationships between them to different contexts
  4. identify and explain future directions and trends for forming, implementing and evaluating business strategy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC1010 - Introduction to management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mulyadi Robin (First semester)
Dr Jess Co (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mulyadi Robin (First semester)
Dr Jess Co (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGB1010, MGF1010, MGG1010, MGP1010, MGW1010

Synopsis

This unit offers a critical introduction to fundamental questions in the discipline of management. What is management? What do managers do, and how do I become a good manager? What are the effects of management practice on employees and their experience of being managed? Key contemporary issues of globalisation and cultural diversity, ethics and social responsibility affect the answers to these questions and are therefore woven throughout the curriculum. The unit draws upon a range of sources - academic, practical, popular cultural - to engage students in multiple ways of knowing about management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a contextual appreciation of management as an evolving set of contested ideas for how managers may influence people, organisations, and their environments to achieve organisational goals
  2. identify what managers do in practice, and analyse how the various activities that comprise managing both shape and are shaped by individual and group behaviour and diversity in organisational settings
  3. critically evaluate the impact of contemporary management practices on employee experiences of being managed
  4. explain the concepts of stakeholder interests, ethics and responsible management and assess their implications for individuals and organisations in a global context
  5. apply research, analytical and communication skills required of the management discipline to address business challenges.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC2021 - Organisations and society

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Laura Visser

Coordinator(s)

Dr Laura Visser

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB1010 or MGC1010 or MGF1010 or MGP1010 or MGS1010 or MGW1010

Synopsis

The world of work in the 21st century presents exciting opportunities and new challenges for thinking through relationships that exist between organisations and society. At the heart of such debates is how organisations influence and in turn are influenced by the socio-cultural contexts in which they are situated. In this unit we will begin by introducing a framework for conceptualising the organisational/socio-cultural interface and exploring how this impacts those who are situated in and around organisations. We will then focus on specific themes common to contemporary modes of working where organisational dynamics and socio-cultural expectations or beliefs come together. By the end of the unit, students will be able to articulate and apply contemporary theories of organising to a range of ethical, social and cultural challenges that coalesce in and around today's organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare a classical and critical understanding of work organisations with reference to key academic theories and approaches
  2. critically assess key theoretical debates surrounding topics introduced in the unit with reference to the organisational/socio-cultural interface
  3. evaluate the different ways in which the organisational/socio-cultural interface manifests in and around organisational contexts
  4. demonstrate evidence of skills in independent assessment and synthesis of academic literature and the effective communication of academic knowledge
  5. demonstrate recognition of ethical, social and cultural issues and their impact on multiple stakeholders.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC2120 - Managing international business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sharif Rasel

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sharif Rasel

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGC1010

Prohibitions

MGW3351, MGF2351, MGG2351, MGW2351

Synopsis

This unit will provide an introduction for students to the broad context in which international business operates, and will address the general theory and management issues related to doing business internationally. Topics include a brief history of management of international business; managing the environment and international relations; understanding of the nature of multinational, transnational and small businesses as multinational enterprises; comparisons of business systems in a variety of developing and developed countries; the management of ethical and social responsibility issues; and future challenges in managing international business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of international business from a multi-disciplinary perspective
  2. assess the impact of the various environmental factors on the internationalisation process of a business organisation
  3. describe the strategy and structure of international business operations in an increasingly competitive global environment
  4. explain the role of foreign market entry modes in the firm internationalisation process
  5. critically evaluate the operation of an international business and analyse an event or an issue relevant to international business using appropriate theories and other resources including books, academic journals, business periodicals and newspapers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC2230 - Organisational behaviour

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jun Gu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jun Gu

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGC1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGB2230, MGF2111, MGG2230, MGW2230

Synopsis

This unit provides a framework for understanding the behaviour of people at work. Its fields of analysis include the individual, the group, and the total organisation. The unit provides information on human factors that influence individual and organisational effectiveness such as differences in perception, personality, motivation, leadership styles and others. The study of organisational behaviour is based upon social science methods and links with other studies in behavioural sciences such as management, human resource management, sociology and psychology.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the nature and purpose of the field of organisational behaviour
  2. distinguish the major theories used to explain the behaviour of people in organisations
  3. identify the major factors influencing individual and group behaviour in organisations
  4. read and critically evaluate published research in the field of organisational behaviour.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC2410 - International employment relations

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

MGF2341

Synopsis

The unit provides a foundation for the study and practice of employment and human resource management through exploring the complex range of factors which shape how employers and employees relate to each other across a range of developed and developing market economies. Topics include comparative analysis, international employment relations institutions and actors, and employment relations in Europe, the Americas and in Asian economies, including China and India.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop knowledge and skills applicable to working in the various fields of management in both government and non-governmental organisations
  2. identify and explain the range of factors (economic, historical, political, national and international) which may influence national employment relations patterns
  3. apply comparative analysis to evaluate contemporary developments in employment relations at the international, national, industry and workplace levels
  4. identify and examine different perspectives and value systems in employment relations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC2420 - Employee relations

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Coordinator(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGF2341, MGG2323, MGW2323

Synopsis

The subject focuses on the changing nature of work and the implications of this for labour and management at the workplace. Topics include new technology and team working; employee financial participation; training and skill formation; equal opportunity and managing diversity; and occupational health and safety.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and explain the changing nature of work and employment
  2. describe the process of labour market deregulation and analyse the consequences for employees, managers and society
  3. identify and explain labour process theories and their application to post-industrial societies
  4. identify critical issues which confront employee relations and human resource managers in a dynamic environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC2430 - Human resource management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Hannah Meacham

Coordinator(s)

Dr Hannah Meacham

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB1010 or MGC1010 or MGF1010 or MGG1010 or MGP1010 or MGS1010 or MGW1010.

Prohibitions

MGB2430, MGF2661, MGG2430, MGW2430

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the factors involved in the effective utilisation of people within organisations. Topics include analysis of the global context for human resource management (HRM); the strategic role of HRM; human resource planning; job analysis; staffing; performance management; training and development; remuneration; and legal issues in HRM, including EEO and occupational health and safety.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the role of Human Resource Management in achieving organisational objectives
  2. critically evaluate some of the key theoretical models of Human Resource Management
  3. critically evaluate some of the key technical, legal and ethical issues in Human Resource Management
  4. analyse the policies, practices and procedures associated with the effective management of people in organisations
  5. explain the impact of the social, political and economic environment on the theory and practice of Human Resource Management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC3110 - Strategic management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Linda McGuire

Coordinator(s)

Dr Linda McGuire

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Successful completion of 72 credit points.

Prohibitions

MGF3401, MGG3401, MGW3401

Synopsis

This is a capstone unit for students undertaking a management major in the Bachelor of Commerce degree. The unit considers the practical applications of strategic management concepts and theories. Students are required to apply critical thinking and research skills to strategic problem solving in contemporary Australian cases. The emphasis is on analysis and judgment to identify strategic issues, evaluate options and recommend action.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the practical implications of different perspectives on strategic management
  2. select and apply a framework and techniques to analyse particular cases
  3. research and select information to analyse particular cases
  4. identify and evaluate strategic issues and recommend actions in particular cases
  5. integrate and effectively communicate analysis in presentations and reports.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC3120 - International management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Cherrie Zhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ruby Ranjan

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGC1010

Prohibitions

MGF3681, MGG3681, MGW3681, MGP2278

Synopsis

This unit highlights the challenges of managing the global activities of international companies; examines the environmental foundations and cultural contexts for international management; discusses the impact of national cultures on management, negotiation and communication; and provides an overview of strategic, operational and human resource management issues in the dynamic international economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply management theory within the wide range of national contexts in the global economy
  2. summarise the contemporary risks, opportunities and ethical considerations of the international business environment from a managerial perspective
  3. explain the role of culture in cross-cultural management, communication, negotiation and decision-making
  4. assess the complex challenges of managing the multinational enterprise in terms of coordinating international strategy and organisational structure
  5. compare ways in which specific overseas environments affect the management functions of leading, motivating, controlling and staffing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC3130 - The management of change

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tui McKeown

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tui McKeown

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGC2230 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MGF3621, MGW3130

Synopsis

This unit examines the process of organisation change within the theoretical frameworks of organisation culture, power and leadership. It examines the major schools of thought concerning the management of change, and analyses change processes used in organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the major conceptual models underlying the OD change process and the role of the OD practitioner and his/her relationship with the client system
  2. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of diagnostic techniques and its importance for the success of the planned change program
  3. discuss the main features of different interventions for the individual, work, group and organisational levels
  4. explain current trends in OD and speculate on how OD is likely to change in the near future
  5. demonstrate skills to analyse case studies of change situations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC3250 - Innovation, entrepreneurship and intrapreneurship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tui McKeown

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tui McKeown

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit examines entrepreneurs and entrepreneurial behaviour as something that occurs both within organisational settings, as well as amongst those who start up their own business ventures. Students will be challenged to think critically about the selection and application of concepts, frameworks and analytical techniques in both entrepreneurship and intrapreneurship situations with the aim of developing self-insight, analysis, and judgement to identify and successfully implement innovative business opportunities. The unit provides students the opportunity to demonstrate critical and creative scholarship and responsible and effective global citizenship, whilst analysing and providing multidisciplinary solutions to a current issue in commerce via a team-based approach.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and critically evaluate the role of entrepreneurship and intrapreneurship within organisations within the Australian economic context
  2. analyse and critically evaluate the contemporary public policy frameworks in which entrepreneurship and intrapreneurship operates both domestically and internationally
  3. identify, select and apply frameworks and techniques to analyse specific business cases
  4. recommend and communicate creative business solutions to particular actions which are financially, ethically and socially responsible.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC3450 - Managing conflict

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGF3450

Synopsis

The focus of the unit is on developing the knowledge and skills to manage conflict in a range of business and professional contexts. Students study a variety of theories and processes that will enhance their skills in avoiding and resolving disputes within and between organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and interpret the implications of the characteristics of conflict in society and in relationships
  2. apply ethically communication, counselling, negotiation and mediation techniques to a variety of conflict situations
  3. examine the influence and implications of power in conflict
  4. evaluate the main alternative dispute resolution techniques and assess the applicability of dispute resolution techniques to specific situations
  5. assess and develop dispute resolution systems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGC3950 - Managing for sustainability

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Amrik Sohal

Coordinator(s)

Mr Rodney Sarah

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

96 credit points.

Prohibitions

MGC2950

Synopsis

The unit integrates 'systems thinking' concepts, tools and methods to help students understand 'managing for sustainability' as a dynamically complex whole system. If people do not have a concept of the 'whole system', the decisions they take can lead to unfortunate and unintended consequences. Conversely people who do hold a concept of the whole, of how a system's elements are interconnected though feedback to achieve a purpose, they can do very fortunate things to achieve positive consequences and outcomes. Enter systems thinking.

Managing for sustainability develops students' understanding and capacity to operate in dynamically complex systems. 'Systems thinking' abilities are combined with 'systems practice' tools and methods, including systems mapping and analysis techniques, in a methodology that is applied to a range of contemporary sustainability issues. Students will be able to conduct their own policy design and evaluation analysis and identify leverage points for improving sustainability outcomes. The unit prepares students with a range of skills to manage sustainability in a range of contexts and has wide application in organisations and communities, as well as in people's lives.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and evaluate systems thinking with other approaches to understand complex sustainability issues spanning social, organisational and natural systems
  2. assemble and apply concepts, tools and methods of systems thinking, to model and analyse policy for sustainability outcomes
  3. design and evaluate policy decisions as applied to contemporary sustainability challenges from a 'whole system' perspective.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF1010 - Introduction to management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Dr Lakmal Abeysekera (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Lakmal Abeysekera (Caulfield)
Dr Bruce Johnstone (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGB1010, MGC1010, MGG1010, MGP1010, MGW1010

Synopsis

This unit offers a critical introduction to fundamental questions in the discipline of management. What is management? What do managers do, and how do I become a good manager? What are the effects of management practice on employees and their experience of being managed? Key contemporary issues of globalisation and cultural diversity, ethics and social responsibility affect the answers to these questions and are therefore woven throughout the curriculum. The unit draws upon a range of sources - academic, practical, popular cultural - to engage students in multiple ways of knowing about management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a contextual appreciation of management as an evolving set of contested ideas for how managers may influence people, organisations, and their environments to achieve organisational goals
  2. identify what managers do in practice, and analyse how the various activities that comprise managing both shape and are shaped by individual and group behaviour and diversity in organisational settings
  3. critically evaluate the impact of contemporary management practices on employee experiences of being managed
  4. explain the concepts of stakeholder interests, ethics and responsible management and assess their implications for individuals and organisations in a global context
  5. apply research, analytical and communication skills required of the management discipline to address business challenges.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF1100 - Managerial communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Mr Josh Howard (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Josh Howard (Caulfield)
Dr Bruce Johnstone (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGF2100, MGG1100, MGW1100

Synopsis

Communication theory emphasising written and oral communication in relation to organisational, intrapersonal, interpersonal and group communication. Importance of relationships in the work context, language, listening and nonverbal behaviour. Interpersonal contexts include negotiation, interviewing, feedback, coaching and counselling. Group communication -- roles, leadership and facilitation, problem-solving, decision making and group creativity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and discuss contemporary theories and concepts in interpersonal communication
  2. examine the role of communication in management, particularly in leadership, decision making, conflict resolution, creativity and problem-solving
  3. extend personal communication skills by identifying opportunities for growth and strategies for development
  4. demonstrate competence and professionalism in structuring and delivering persuasive messages
  5. critically analyse communication style.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF2111 - Organisational behaviour

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jun Gu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jun Gu

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGB2230, MGC2230, MGG2230, MGW2230

Synopsis

The unit takes a positive and appreciative approach, presenting supportable practices and interventions to help understand and develop more positive and productive individual, team and organisational behaviours and outcomes. A range of relevant issues will be addressed at the organisational, environmental, team and individual levels including: the employment relationship, reward systems, positive organisational behaviours, learning, leadership, teamwork, technology, emotions, culture and diversity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and discuss the major theories and concepts that pertain to understanding behaviour in organisations
  2. describe and discuss contemporary perspectives in Organisational Behaviour, including the Positive Organisational Behaviour approach to this field
  3. engage with the relevant research literature, and draw on that literature to make plausible, evidence-based predictions about how environmental factors may influence organisational behaviour
  4. examine the role of Organisational Behaviour theory in enhancing both individual and organisational effectiveness.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF2341 - Managing employee relations

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Coordinator(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB1010, MGC1010, MGG1010, MGF1010, MGP1010 or MGW1010.

Prohibitions

MGC2410Not offered in 2018, MGG2323, MGW2323

Synopsis

Management of employment relationships and workplace issues is central to the unit. Roles of parties to the employment relationship -- management, employees, trade unions, employer groups, governments, and tribunals -- are analysed. Management and employee roles in conflict resolution, negotiation and bargaining, conciliation and arbitration, and maintaining control of the employment relationship are covered. External and internal environments are considered regarding productivity, equity, regulation, labour market reform, and decentralisation of the industrial relations system to an enterprise focus.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. differentiate between employee relations issues and industrial relations issues using current research
  2. describe the main institutional features and key developments in the Australian industrial relations system as they impact upon employee relations
  3. identify management strategies for dealing with employee relations in Australian workplaces and those in other countries
  4. participate in individual and team-based analysis of workplace case studies and activities
  5. develop basic skills in managing communication, negotiation, and bargaining at the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF2351 - International business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)
Dr Andrew Cavanagh (all other teaching periods)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Andrew Cavanagh (Caulfield)
Mr Syed Shah (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGC2120, MGG2351, MGW2351

Synopsis

The international environment including international trade and investment, and the legal, political, cultural and technological contexts faced by internationalising organisations; forms of operations available to the internationalising organisation; the impact of the multinational enterprise; international strategic planning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. classify the key features and issues in the global environment in which international business takes place
  2. explain the impact that the environment has on the internationalisation process of a business organisation
  3. demonstrate an understanding of the role of entry mode choice and other strategic issues in order to succeed in international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF2656 - HRM and managing global workforces

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Hannah Meacham

Coordinator(s)

Dr Hannah Meacham

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB2430, MGC2430, MGG2430, MGF2661 or MGW2430

Synopsis

This unit explores the HRM theory and practice of managing workforces globally. Topics may include workforce planning in a global context, design of work processes and systems, and risk management in a dynamic environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain and critically evaluate the major challenges impacting on workforce planning in organisations
  2. integrate theoretical and empirical knowledge with practical examples
  3. evaluate and recommend human resource management solutions to global workforce challenges.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF2661 - Human resource management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Susan Mayson

Coordinator(s)

Dr Susan Mayson

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB1010, MGC1010, MGG1010, MGF1010, MGP1010 or MGW1010

Prohibitions

MGB2430, MGC2430, MGG2430, MGW2430

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to human resource management, theory, context and practices. It focuses on the contribution of HRM to organisational competitive advantage and meeting the needs of employees and other stakeholders.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the scope and purpose of HRM as an academic discipline and activities associated with HRM as a management practice
  2. identify major changes in the global business environment that impact on organisations and HRM
  3. critically evaluate competing models of HRM that underpin perceived good practices
  4. critically apply knowledge about HR activities to identify solutions to HRM issues
  5. enhance students' research capabilities to work individually and in groups.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF3361 - Workplace learning and performance management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Andrea North-Samardzic

Coordinator(s)

Dr Andrea North-Samardzic

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MGF2661

Synopsis

The interface between establishing a continuous learning environment, coaching and performance appraisal systems, training and development practices and the implementation of reward systems. The unit focus is on: personal and organisational skills and procedures through setting performance standards and objectives; performance review methods; giving effective feedback; links with rewards and compensation; determining training and development needs and objectives; coaching and feedback skills, planning, conducting and evaluating the training and development of staff.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed awareness, knowledge and application of current theory in establishing continuous learning environments within organisations
  2. examine the issues related to staff appraisal, training and development and reward systems within a continuous learning environment
  3. demonstrate a high level of personal skill the provision of employee growth and learning within organisations through dialogue, coaching, mentoring and training skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF3381 - Managing information systems

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter O'Neill

Coordinator(s)

Dr Peter O'Neill

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

MGC3510, MGW3381

Synopsis

The components of IT; characteristics of hardware, software and telecommunications; types of information systems; networking and the worldwide web; managing 'information' workers; using IT to promote business objectives and gain competitive advantage; systems development methodology; IT-enabled transformation to create adaptive, flexible organisations; social and system issues associated with IT; managerial problems posed by IT. Computer laboratory exposure to a variety of applications software including electronic mail, project management, graphics, and other decision support software.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate knowledge of computers, networks, and software, and networks so as to analyse the implications for individuals, organisations, governments, and society
  2. analyse the implications, especially outsourcing and off-shoring, of widespread information networks, such as the internet for organisations
  3. integrate managerial theory and knowledge of Information and Communications Technologies (ICT) to explain ICT's possible effects on aspects of organisations such as structure, culture, staffing, strategy, required skills, and systems
  4. analyse and evaluate the design and implementation of information systems that advance organisational goals and the concomitant ethical and legal constraints
  5. be able to design and implement a simple set of web pages.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF3420 - Human resource development

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glennis Hanley

Coordinator(s)

Dr Glennis Hanley

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MGF2661

Prohibitions

MGC3420

Synopsis

This unit examines the strategic roles of human resource development in organisations: training; management and career development; and organisational development. Theories and factors affecting training outcomes; and economic, ethical, legal and financial considerations are considered also.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the strategic importance of human resource development (HRD) in the success of organisations and within the context of environmental pressures and government policy
  2. evaluate the nature and importance of theories of learning in the development of HRD programs
  3. develop skills in identifying HRD needs, the development of objectives, the design of programs to meet objectives and the evaluation
  4. explain and apply models of career management and other emerging HRD themes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF3450 - Managing conflict

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGC3450

Synopsis

Skills in identifying, understanding and managing conflict are essential in a range of business and professional contexts. Participants in this unit will study a variety of theories and processes that will enhance their skills in avoiding and resolving disputes within and between organisations. Participants will learn through engaging in activities related to negotiation, mediation, advocacy, arbitration and other dispute resolution processes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse the characteristics of conflict in society and in relationships
  2. apply ethical communication, counselling, negotiation and mediation techniques to a variety of conflict situations
  3. examine the influence and implications of power in understanding and managing conflict
  4. evaluate a range of dispute resolution techniques and assess the applicability of these techniques to specific situations
  5. assess and develop dispute resolution systems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF3621 - Organisational change

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGF2111 or MGB2230 or MGC2230 or MGG2230 or MGW2230.

Prohibitions

MGC3130, MGG3130, MGW3130

Synopsis

Theory of organisation change and development, OD and metaphor, the client-consultant relationship, diagnosis, interventions, organisational learning, resistance to change, managing resistance to change, evaluation and institutionalisation of change, transformation and cultural change, future directions, revision.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify strategies and actions for planned organisational change
  2. critically evaluate different frameworks and philosophies for change management in organisations
  3. integrate and synthesise previous knowledge of organisational change processes
  4. analyse change processes that exist at an individual level, group level and across the organisation as a whole
  5. examine management practices which directly influence the success or otherwise of implementing a planned change process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF3681 - International management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Olga Abeysekera (Caulfield, Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Dr Dan Wang (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Olga Abeysekera (Caulfield)
Ms Jacqueline O'Toole (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Prerequisites

MGF2351 or MGW2351 or MGS2351

Prohibitions

MGC3120, MGG3681, MGW3681, MGP2278

Synopsis

Management theory and its application in various cultures. Topics covered include: the role of culture; motivation; global leadership; international human resources management; international teams, and ethics and social responsibility.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. assess the application of management theory to various global cultures
  2. explain the complex challenges of the multinational business enterprise at the interpersonal and operational levels
  3. compare a range of cross-cultural variables in the business environment
  4. apply theory to cross cultural scenarios
  5. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of national culture assessment tools.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGF3684 - Business strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sarah Lindsay

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sarah Lindsay

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB1010 or MGC1010 or MGF1010 or MGG1010 or MGP1010 or MGS1010 or MGW1010 and 96 credit points.

Prohibitions

MGB3684, MGP3684, MGC3110, MGF3401, MGW3401

Synopsis

Business Strategy enhances students' knowledge of the process of strategy formulation, implementation and evaluation within a business, and the key contextual factors and managerial decisions which influence this process. The unit develops skills in research, academic writing and application to current and future business environments. The unit amalgamates aspects from a range of management areas and prepares students to be able to develop and apply sound business strategy methods in practical settings.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain and apply the core concepts of business strategy
  2. analyse and evaluate the influence of key contextual variables on a business' strategy
  3. apply and critically appraise business strategy formulation, implementation and evaluation concepts and the relationships between them
  4. illustrate and judge future directions and trends for forming, implementing and evaluating business strategy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS1010 - Introduction to management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Francisca Maingehama (First semester)
Ms Jennifer Nzonzo (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGB1010, MGC1010, MGF1010, MGG1010, MGP1010, MGW1010.

Synopsis

This unit offers a critical introduction to fundamental questions in the discipline of management. What is management? What do managers do, and how do I become a good manager? What are the effects of management practice on employees and their experience of being managed? Key contemporary issues of globalisation and cultural diversity, ethics and social responsibility affect the answers to these questions and are therefore woven throughout the curriculum. The unit draws upon a range of sources - academic, practical, popular cultural - to engage students in multiple ways of knowing about management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a contextual appreciation of management as an evolving set of contested ideas for how managers may influence people, organisations, and their environments to achieve organisational goals
  2. identify what managers do in practice, and analyse how the various activities that comprise managing both shape and are shaped by individual and group behaviour and diversity in organisational settings
  3. critically evaluate the impact of contemporary management practices on employee experiences of being managed
  4. explain the concepts of stakeholder interests, ethics and responsible management and assess their implications for individuals and organisations in a global context
  5. apply research, analytical and communication skills required of the management discipline to address business challenges.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS1100 - Managerial communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Natasha Mwila

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Term 1 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGF1100, MGG1100, MGW1100, MGF2100

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop students' awareness of communication issues within organisational settings and their own capacity as professionals to communicate effectively. The unit emphasises the importance of effective communication both oral and written, introduces models of communication and focuses on communication as process and transaction. Overall the unit is designed to allow students the opportunity to explore the ways in which intrapersonal, interpersonal, group and organisational communication are experienced within organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the major theories underpinning managerial communication
  2. examine the relationships between different managerial communication theories and concepts
  3. discuss managerial communication in the context of organisational examples
  4. compare and contrast verbal and non verbal messages and examine their impact on interpersonal communication
  5. extend skills in written and oral expression as relevant to the unit assessment tasks.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS2230 - Organisational behaviour

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Jennifer Nzonzo

Coordinator(s)

Ms Jennifer Nzonzo

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGS1010 or MGW1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGB2230, MGC2230, MGG2230, MGW2230, MGF2111.

Synopsis

In this unit, students will gain an understanding of factors affecting the behaviour of people in work settings. The unit focuses on individual, group and total organisational human factors influencing the effectiveness of organisations.

This will include the nature of organisations in the global context; individual behaviour including perception, attitudes, values and personality, motivation and performance; group behaviour in organisations - the properties and management of groups, leaders and leadership, organisational power, influence, communication, conflict and decision making; organisational structure; organisational culture; change; and the formal and informal organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine theories of organisational behaviour (OB) to develop fundamental knowledge of OB as an area of management
  2. analyse OB issues from multiple workplace perspectives
  3. examine how managers can use knowledge of OB to manage individual employees and teams
  4. apply theoretical OB concepts to organisational situations using the case study method
  5. demonstrate skills in evaluation and analysis of OB concepts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS2351 - International business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Natasha Mwila

Coordinator(s)

Dr Natasha Mwila

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prohibitions

MGC2120, MGF2351, MGG2351, MGW2351.

Synopsis

This unit explores the international business environment including international trade and investment, and the legal, political, cultural and technological contexts faced by internationalising organisations. It covers the forms of operations available to the internationalising organisation, the impact of the multinational enterprise and international strategic planning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the impact the international business environment has on the internationalisation process of an organisation
  2. evaluate the role and influence of government and international funding and trade organisations
  3. identify the strategic issues impacting on internationalising organisations
  4. analyse how entry mode choice and the functional areas of management, impact on the internationalisation of a firm.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS2430 - Human resource management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGP1010 or MGF1010 or MGW1010 or MKB1010 or MGG1010 or MGS1010.

Prohibitions

MGB2430, MGC2430, MGG2430, MGW2430, MGF2661.

Synopsis

This unit explores the strategic role of HRM in organisations, human resource planning, job design, staffing, performance management, training and development, reward systems, legal issues in employment, HR information systems and the contribution of HRM to competitive advantage.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the organisational role and context of HRM
  2. describe how HRM can contribute to the achievement of strategic and operational organisational objectives
  3. identify and describe the influence of an organisation's external environment on HRM
  4. identify the range of HR activities and techniques and explain how they can determine, acquire, develop, motivate and reward employees
  5. describe contemporary issues in managing human resources and discuss their influence on HRM
  6. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task, a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit. This is demonstrated by the requirement that the student must attain a mark of at least 40% in the final summative assessment task.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS3130 - Organisational change and development

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mazanai Musara

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGS1010 or MGB1010 or MGC1010 or MGP1010 or MGF1010 or MGW1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3130, MGF3621, MGG3130, MGW3130

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to various concepts of organisational change and development. It covers topics including: theories of organisational development, organisational change and organisational transformation, the role of the organisational change practitioner, development of change interventions, employee responses to change and challenges of change.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce students to organisational change and development theories and develop fundamental knowledge of organisational change as an area of management;
  2. explore various models and analytical tools used by organisational change practitioners
  3. identify and critically evaluate a variety of organisational change interventions
  4. develop an understanding of the challenges that both managers and employees face when experiencing change
  5. develop critical thinking and analytical skills in applying organisational change theory to various workplace situations
  6. demonstrate in the individual summative assessment task a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit. This is demonstrated by the requirement that the student must attain a mark of at least 40% in the final summative assessment task.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS3210 - Organisational wellness

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Jennifer Nzonzo

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGS1010 or MGP1010 or MGF1010 or MGW1010 or MGB1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGW3210

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop students' awareness of current theoretical perspectives on and of empirical evaluations of organisational initiatives designed to foster wellbeing at both the individual and organisational level. The unit will provide a macro-level framework for examining an organisation's social, ethical and environmental responsibility, followed by an examination of organisational level approaches to wellness including work/life initiatives and OH&S initiatives. At the micro-level, the unit will address strategies individual employees may use to manage their own state of wellness.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the relationship between the changing face of organisations into today's business environment and the need for managers to attend to organisational wellness
  2. identify predictors and consequences of 'wellness' and 'toxicity' in the organisational context
  3. describe and evaluate current organisational wellness initiatives
  4. analyse and evaluate current theoretical frameworks of 'wellness' in order to understand and devise 'healthy' organisation initiatives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS3401 - Strategic management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Frances Scholtz

Coordinator(s)

Mrs Frances Scholtz

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGB1010 or MGC1010 or MGF1010 or MGG1010 or MGP1010 or MGS1010 or MGW1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3110, MGF3401, MGG3401, MGW3401

Synopsis

Business environments including markets, critical success factors, and strategies employed to gain a competitive advantage; the nature of strategic management; the analysis and interpretation of business environments; the nature of competition, relative position of firms, individual strategies and their relationship to critical success factors; strengths and weaknesses related to production, finance, research and development, marketing, administration; the role of structure, controls, rewards, culture and leadership in implementation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify factors that help companies to survive and prosper
  2. compare various business models and the actual processes of managing strategies
  3. evaluate various techniques of analysing situations that require a strategic response
  4. debate the factors that lead to strategy success and failure
  5. apply strategic management concepts in particular cases.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS3650 - Integrated business management simulation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Frances Scholtz

Coordinator(s)

Mrs Frances Scholtz

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MGS3401 or MGW3401 and AFS1000 or AFW1000.

Prohibitions

MGX3650Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit, as a final semester unit, integrates the business management knowledge, skills and attitudes students acquired throughout their bachelor study. The unit teaches students all the essential elements of running a business including strategic planning, leadership, teamwork, cause and effect relationships between functional areas (research and development, marketing, production and finance), satisfying customer demands, and competitive analysis in a simulated learning environment. More specifically, students will learn to understand the value of 'focusing' in the strategic implementation process, understand how decisions in one part of the business impacts other parts of the business, practice decision-making as a team across all key areas of a business, use the information from balance sheets, income statements and cash flow statements to improve business decision making, analyse competitors' performance and market positioning and build core competencies within the business to take a differentiation or low cost position in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the elements of strategic business planning
  2. study and understand the external factors that effect business
  3. study and apply business terminology
  4. identify and analyse the internal functional areas of business
  5. study and understand the basic principles of business finance
  6. understand and conduct analysis of competitors
  7. experience the effects of business decision making through simulation
  8. develop skills to work effectively in teams.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS3651 - Entrepreneurship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mazanai Musara

Coordinator(s)

Mr Mazanai Musara

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGB1010 or MGC1010 or MGP1010 or MGF1010 or MGW1010 or MGG1010 or MGS1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX3651Not offered in 2018, MGC3250

Synopsis

Entrepreneurship develops students' understanding and capacity to launch and manage new as well as innovative business ideas. A combination of theory and practice is integrated into the conceptualisation and application of the entrepreneur phenomenon and the entrepreneurship process. Students will be able to conduct self-evaluation and analysis of their surroundings in order to identify business opportunities that can be exploited to the benefit of the individual entrepreneur as well as the societies at large.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and synthesise entrepreneurship conceptualisations
  2. evaluate the roles of entrepreneurs
  3. identify and evaluate the characteristics of entrepreneurs
  4. analyse and recommend business opportunities to launch an entrepreneurial career as well as developing business plans
  5. conduct a self-analysis and self-evaluation in the context of choosing and launching an entrepreneurial occupation to fit the individual student.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGS3991 - Leadership principles and practices

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Frances Scholtz

Coordinator(s)

Mrs Frances Scholtz

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGB1010 or MGC1010 or MGF1010 or MGP1010 or MGG1010 or MGS1010 or MGW1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX3991

Synopsis

This interactive unit examines principles and practices of leadership which are vital for aspiring leaders of the future. Through a personal portfolio of leadership concepts, character and competencies, students develop their potential for growth as strategic leaders of 21st century organisations. Inspiring stories of leadership successes and failures from exemplary leaders of the past and present, will guide the student's leadership journey to find their own authentic voice. A plethora of cutting-edge leadership materials (research articles, movies and videos, case studies, role-plays, games and self-assessments) will also be featured weekly to enhance the learning experience.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of major theories of organisational leadership
  2. formulate a framework of leadership that would help students make sense of their current and future leadership experiences and discern critical lessons drawn
  3. develop a higher self awareness of students own personalities, values, attitudes and styles, as well as strengths and weaknesses pertinent to their leadership aspirations
  4. construct a personal leadership philosophy outlining student's convictions on ethical and compassionate leadership, and its impact in real-world organisational contexts
  5. analyse and synthesise crucial roles and positive impacts that managers and leaders can make to organisations and their stakeholders.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW1010 - Introduction to management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Coordinator(s)

Dr Chong Yit Sean

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • October intake 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGB1010, MGC1010, MGF1010, MGG1010, MGP1010

Synopsis

This unit offers a critical introduction to fundamental questions in the discipline of management. What is management? What do managers do, and how do I become a good manager? What are the effects of management practice on employees and their experience of being managed? Key contemporary issues of globalisation and cultural diversity, ethics and social responsibility affect the answers to these questions and are therefore woven throughout the curriculum. The unit draws upon a range of sources - academic, practical, popular cultural - to engage students in multiple ways of knowing about management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a contextual appreciation of management as an evolving set of contested ideas for how managers may influence people, organisations, and their environments to achieve organisational goals
  2. identify what managers do in practice, and analyse how the various activities that comprise managing both shape and are shaped by individual and group behaviour and diversity in organisational settings
  3. critically evaluate the impact of contemporary management practices on employee experiences of being managed
  4. explain the concepts of stakeholder interests, ethics and responsible management and assess their implications for individuals and organisations in a global context
  5. apply research, analytical and communication skills required of the management discipline to address business challenges.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW1100 - Managerial communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Adlina Ahmad

Coordinator(s)

Ms Adlina Ahmad

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGF1100, MGG1100, MGF2100

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop students' awareness of communication issues within organisational settings and their own capacity as professionals to communicate effectively. The unit emphasises the importance of effective communication both oral and written, introduces models of communication and focuses on communication as process and transaction. Overall the unit is designed to allow students the opportunity to explore the ways in which intrapersonal, interpersonal, group and organisational communication are experienced within organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the major theories underpinning managerial communication
  2. examine the relationships between different managerial communication theories and concepts
  3. discuss managerial communication in the context of organisational examples
  4. compare and contrast verbal and nonverbal messages and examine their impact on interpersonal communication
  5. extend skills in written and oral expression as relevant to the unit assessment tasks.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW1232 - Introduction to Islamic business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Adlina Ahmad

Coordinator(s)

Ms Adlina Ahmad

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

The unit introduces basic principles of business from an Islamic perspective. It provides an understanding of the importance of business and economic activities in Islam, and the ways of organising and managing such business and economic activities to satisfy broader societal and community expectations in an equitable and ethical manner. The unit encourages students to critically analyse and apply Islamic perspectives of entrepreneurial, financial, managerial, and marketing functions to satisfy the consumer and community needs of modern society. It also facilitates the understanding of the inseparable roles of science and business in satisfying consumer and community needs where joint initiatives from both sides can make significant contributions to societal well-being.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the basic principles of Islamic business in a modern society
  2. understand the equitable and ethical ways of organising and managing a business organisation for greater societal and community welfare
  3. critically analyse and interpret Islamic perspectives of entrepreneurial, financial, managerial, and marketing functions of an organisation in a modern society
  4. apply entrepreneurial, financial, managerial, and marketing functions in an organisation with Islamic principles and societal expectations in mind
  5. communicate effectively with the scientific, financial, consumer and broader stakeholder community to understand each other's role in a business and modern society.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW2230 - Organisational behaviour

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lau Yin Yin

Coordinator(s)

Dr Lau Yin Yin

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGB2230, MGC2230, MGF2111, MGG2230

Synopsis

Students gain an understanding of factors affecting the behaviour of people in work settings. The unit focuses on individual, group, and total organisational human factors influencing the effectiveness of organisations, including: the nature of organisations in the global context; individual behaviour including perception, attitudes, values and personality, motivation and performance; group behaviour in organisations -- the properties and management of groups, leaders and leadership, organisational power, influence, communication, conflict and decision making; organisational structure; organisational culture; change; the formal and informal organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine theories of organisational behaviour (OB) to develop fundamental knowledge of OB as an area of management
  2. analyse OB issues from multiple workplace perspectives
  3. examine how managers can use knowledge of OB to manage individual employees and teams
  4. apply theoretical OB concepts to organisational situations using the case study method
  5. demonstrate skills in evaluation and analysis of OB concepts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW2351 - International business

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Manjit Singh Sandhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Manjit Singh Sandhu

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGC2120, MGF2351, MGG2351

Synopsis

The international environment including international trade and investment, and the legal, political, cultural and technological contexts faced by internationalising organisations; forms of operations available to the internationalising organisation; the impact of the multinational enterprise; international strategic planning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the impact the international environment has on the internationalisation process of an organisation
  2. evaluate the role and influence of government and international funding and trade organisations
  3. identify the strategic issues impacting on internationalising organisations
  4. analyse how entry mode choice and the functional areas of management impact on the internationalisation of a firm.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW2430 - Human resource management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Patricia Lau

Coordinator(s)

Dr Patricia Lau

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGP1010 or MGF1010 or MGW1010 or MKB1010 or MGG1010

Prohibitions

MGB2430, MGF2661, MGC2430, MGG2430

Synopsis

Analysis of the strategic role of HRM in organisations, human resource planning, job design, staffing, performance management, training and development, reward systems, legal issues in employment, HR information systems, and the contribution of HRM to competitive advantage.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the organisational role and context of HRM
  2. describe how HRM can contribute to the achievement of strategic and operational organisational objectives
  3. identify and describe the influence of an organisation's external environment on HRM
  4. identify the range of HR activities and techniques and explain how they can determine, acquire, develop, motivate and reward employees
  5. describe contemporary issues in managing human resources and discuss their influence on HRM
  6. demonstrate in the individual summative assessment task a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit. This is demonstrated by the requirement that the student must attain a mark of at least 40% in the final summative assessment task.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW2991 - Leadership in Asia

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Adlina Ahmad

Coordinator(s)

Ms Adlina Ahmad

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

This unit covers an overall introduction to leadership with an emphasis on the Asian context. It covers relevant theoretical concepts as well as the practical, skill building approaches and learning drawn from actual experiences of organisational leaders. Specifically the unit begins by introducing definitions, meaning and relevance of leadership in organisations, followed by various theoretical approaches to leadership, the individual and internal (such as personality) and external (such as culture) elements of a leader, and concludes with the ways to develop effective communication and soft skills necessary in building leadership abilities. All of the topics will adopt an Asian perspective and consider the dynamic driving the environmental contexts within Asia.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define leadership and illustrate how it applies to all levels of management and external stakeholders
  2. critically analyse and apply conceptual frameworks, theories and models of leadership that recognise the impact of culture and society in the Asian context
  3. examine individual differences of leaders and critically analyse the impact of their ethical practices, power and influence in organisations in Asia
  4. explain and apply communication skills associated with leading organisational change in the Asian context
  5. critically evaluate the leadership behaviours of contemporary Asian business practitioners.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW3130 - Organisational change and development

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Manjit Singh Sandhu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Manjit Singh Sandhu

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGP1010 or MGF1010 or MGW1010 or MGB1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3130, MGF3621, MGG3130

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to various concepts of organisational change and development. It covers topics including: theories of organisational development, organisational change and organisational transformation; the role of the organisational change practitioner; development of change interventions; employee responses to change; and challenges of change.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce students to organisational change and development theories and develop fundamental knowledge of organisational change as an area of management;
  2. explore various models and analytical tools used by organisational change practitioners
  3. identify and critically evaluate a variety of organisational change interventions
  4. develop an understanding of the challenges that both managers and employees face when experiencing change
  5. develop critical thinking and analytical skills in applying organisational change theory to various workplace situations
  6. demonstrate in the individual summative assessment task a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit. This is demonstrated by the requirement that the student must attain a mark of at least 40% in the final summative assessment task.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW3234 - Social entrepreneurship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Au Wee Chan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Au Wee Chan

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGW1010

Synopsis

The purpose of this unit is to examine and debate the critical role of social entrepreneurship in the modern business context. The unit will introduce students to social entrepreneurship and equip them with an understanding of the theoretical foundations and practical issues of social entrepreneurship. Key processes involved in the business of managing social enterprises such as the development and use of alternate yardsticks of performance measurement, approach to management of people, financing, and entrepreneurial leadership for social goals will be critically examined. Business models of social entrepreneurship will be introduced and critically evaluated in relation to conventional modes of practice. Topics studied will include definitions and background of social entrepreneurship; challenges and drivers of social entrepreneurship; processes and business models concerning social entrepreneurship.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the fundamentals and concepts of social entrepreneurship
  2. critically appreciate and understand the role of social entrepreneurship in the business context
  3. identity and analyse processes of social entrepreneurship
  4. identify and appraise challenges and opportunities in social entrepreneurship
  5. explore and understand the business models in social entrepreneurship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW3381 - Management information systems

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Teh Pei Lee

Coordinator(s)

Dr Teh Pei Lee

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MGF3381Not offered in 2018, MGC3510

Synopsis

The components of IT; characteristics of hardware, software and telecommunications; types of information systems; networking and the worldwide web; managing 'information' workers; using IT to promote business objectives and gain competitive advantage; systems development methodology; IT-enabled transformation to create adaptive, flexible organisations; social and system issues associated with IT; managerial problems posed by IT. Computer laboratory exposure to a variety of applications software including electronic mail, project management, graphics, and other decision support software.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define MIS in terms of its historical perspective and its role in organisations today
  2. list core principles of MIS and comment critically on their implications in improving the competitive position of businesses
  3. apply principles of management thought and practice in a simulated, competitive business environment
  4. define components of competitive intelligence and practice competitor analysis
  5. develop critical thinking skills and experience business decision-making from a long-term, senior manager's perspective and improve team skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW3401 - Strategic management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erhan Atay

Coordinator(s)

Dr Erhan Atay

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGB1010 or MGF1010 or MGG1010 or MGP1010 or MGW1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3110, MGF3401, MGG3401

Synopsis

Business environments including markets, critical success factors, and strategies employed to gain a competitive advantage; the nature of strategic management; the analysis and interpretation of business environments; the nature of competition, relative position of firms, individual strategies and their relationship to critical success factors; strengths and weaknesses related to production, finance, research and development, marketing, administration; the role of structure, controls, rewards, culture and leadership in implementation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify factors that help companies to survive and prosper
  2. compare various business models and the actual processes of managing strategies
  3. evaluate various techniques of analysing situations that require a strategic response
  4. debate the factors that lead to strategy success and failure
  5. apply strategic management concepts in particular cases.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGW3681 - International management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erhan Atay

Coordinator(s)

Ms Tan Seow Kian

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGF2351 or MGW2351 or MGS2351

Prohibitions

MGC3120, MGF3681, MGG3681, MGP2278

Synopsis

A study of management theory related to varying cultures, the multinational business enterprise and the significance of cross-cultural variables in the business environment. Topics include ethics and social responsibilities; communication; leadership; motivation, control and conflict; human resource management and industrial relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. relate management theory to various and different cultures
  2. appreciate the complex challenges of the multinational business enterprise at the interpersonal and operational levels
  3. compare and contrast a range of cross-cultural variables in the business environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX2700 - Project management for small to medium enterprises

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Elsa Phung

Coordinator(s)

Ms Elsa Phung

Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

MGG2700, MGW2700

Synopsis

Project management for small to medium enterprises introduces the essential concepts, tools and techniques relevant to project management. The unit content covers the broad perspectives of managerial skills and knowledge required to initiate, implement, and evaluate successful projects. These perspectives include strategic planning, financial control, human resource management, and project evaluation. Throughout the unit, the application of relevant information technology and the pursuit of quality outcomes underpin and reinforce these perspectives.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the key concepts in project initiation including selection, feasibility, and planning
  2. identify and demonstrate, with examples, the implementation tasks including the preparation of cost estimates, tasks scheduling and project team leadership and coordination
  3. demonstrate methods to control projects and determine the criteria to evaluate projects
  4. describe the project completion process
  5. apply tools and principles to project management through use of information technology, setting quality standards, risk analysis, and identifying obstacles to project success.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX3100 - Corporate social responsibility and business ethics

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Elizabeth Prior Jonson

Coordinator(s)

Dr Elizabeth Prior Jonson (Caulfield and Prato)
Ms Priya Sharma (Malaysia)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prato

  • Winter semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Completion of 12 units (72 points) of study

Synopsis

Do corporations have any responsibilities beyond profit maximisation? To what extent should business activities be left to the operation of the free market and to what extent should they be regulated through internal and external mechanisms? This unit examines the theoretical foundations of the different answers that have been given to these two fundamental questions. More specifically it examines the topics of ethical issues in marketing and advertising, climate change and environmental protection regulation and corporate governance, human resource management and social accounting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify important ethical issues that arise in various business contexts
  2. explain the implications of adopting different approaches to Corporate Social Responsibility
  3. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of the different approaches to Corporate Social Responsibility
  4. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of different mechanisms for regulating business behaviour
  5. apply different approaches to Corporate Social Responsibility and different approaches to regulation to issues specific to marketing, HRM, environment and social accounting.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX3121 - International business strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glen Croy (Caulfield)
Ms Adlina Ahmad (Malaysia)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Glen Croy (Caulfield)
Ms Adlina Ahmad (Malaysia)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGF2351 or MGW2351 or MGS2351

Prohibitions

MGG3121, MGW3121

Synopsis

This unit will concentrate on the nature and need for international strategy; the internationalisation process; the context of international strategy; regional strategy; the dynamics of international competition; role of culture in international strategy; corporate control of global corporations and strategic forms of multinational corporations (MNCs); international strategy in services; modes and patterns of international expansion and the management of international strategic cooperation; international strategy and learning; MNCs political strategies; international strategy process and success of international strategies; managing supply chain in the international arena.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use basic tools for competitive analysis and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. identify strategies for SMEs and multinational organisations to operate in a global setting
  3. analyse the opportunities and risks involved in international strategic management and evaluate the impact different modes of foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation
  4. describe the influence of various stakeholders on the internationalising firm
  5. identify how internal operations impact on the internationalisation process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX3441 - Human resource strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Cathy Sheehan

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Cathy Sheehan

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MGB2430, MGC2430, MGG2430, MGF2661 or MGW2430

Synopsis

This unit identifies and develops the thinking skills that enable the formulation of innovative HR strategies that advance organisational needs and objectives to achieve sustainable competitive advantage by critically examining the relationship between HRM and organisational strategies. Topics typically include: the external and global environment for HRM, the dynamics of industry-based competition, strategic flexibility, and characteristics of innovative and value-adding HR practices and systems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically examine the theoretical links between strategy and HRM
  2. critically analyse how HRM can be used as a strategic tool to gain competitive advantage with respect to the global context
  3. formulate, evaluate and recommend solutions to strategic HRM problems
  4. critically analyse strategic HRM theories and practices and their applications to organisational realities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX3650 - Integrated business management simulation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Frances Scholtz

Coordinator(s)

Ms Frances Scholtz

Quota applies

This unit has a quota of 128.

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MGW3401 and AFW1000

Synopsis

This unit, as a final semester unit, integrates the business management knowledge, skills and attitudes students acquired throughout their bachelor study. The unit teaches students all the essential elements of running a business including strategic planning, leadership, teamwork, cause and effect relationships between functional areas (research and development, marketing, production and finance), satisfying customer demands, and competitive analysis in a simulated learning environment. More specifically students will learn to:

  • understand the value of 'focusing' in the strategic implementation process
  • understand how decisions in one part of the business impacts other parts of the business
  • practice decision-making as a team across all key areas of a business
  • use the information from balance sheets, income statements and cash flow statements to improve business decision making
  • analyse competitors' performance and market positioning
  • build core competencies within the business to take a differentiation or low cost position in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the elements of strategic business planning
  2. study and understand the external factors that affect business
  3. study and apply business terminology
  4. identify and analyse the internal functional areas of business
  5. study and understand the basic principles of business finance
  6. understand and conduct analysis of competitors
  7. experience the effects of business decision making through simulation
  8. develop skills to work effectively in teams.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX3651 - Entrepreneurship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mazanai Musara

Coordinator(s)

Mr Mazanai Musara

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGP1010 or MGF1010 or MGW1010 or MKB1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3250

Synopsis

The unit provides an overall introduction to entrepreneurship, from a theoretical to a process application of its principles. Topics include: definitions of entrepreneurship, nature and importance of entrepreneurs, the advantages and disadvantages of being an entrepreneur, types of entrepreneurs, the new venture creation process, developing a business plan, legal issues for entrepreneurs, sources of capital, legal forms of ownership, the role of government in developing and enabling the small business environment, and sources of information, funding, advice, business tools and other aids for entrepreneurs. The unit also applies this knowledge to the emerging markets of developing countries.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to

  1. understand the fundamentals, concepts and processes of entrepreneurship
  2. appreciate and understand the entrepreneurial perspective
  3. gain an understanding of the role of entrepreneurs and small business in the South African economy and describe the benefits and potential drawbacks of owning a small business
  4. understand the role of government in developing and enabling the small business environment
  5. identify and validate business ideas
  6. research and develop a business plan
  7. understand the funding and finance implications
  8. evaluate the different forms of small business ownership
  9. explore and understand the contemporary challenges for entrepreneurship
  10. demonstrate an understanding of the role played by entrepreneurs and small businesses in regional economic development and in developing nations
  11. understand the major differences between the African and western model of entrepreneurship
  12. demonstrate a knowledge of how these differences are manifested and how they may be managed successfully.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX3771 - Operations management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Daniel Prajogo

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Daniel Prajogo

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

12 units (72 points)

Synopsis

Unit covers the major activities within the operations function of businesses, both manufacturing and service. The essential role of operations is to deliver value to customers by providing the right products, at the right quality standard, in the right quantities, at the right times, and doing so at the right cost (efficiently). The key operations activities included in this unit starts from pre-production tasks (designing products and processes), resource and capacity planning, sequencing and scheduling of the operations, supply chain and inventory management, quality control, and improvement methods whereby the system and its procedures are modified in the light of learning process.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and describe the components of the operations management function in different types of organisations
  2. explain operations process planning and control including capacity, scheduling, inventory and materials requirements planning
  3. examine the concepts of managing people and processes as part of a manufacturing system
  4. analyse decision problems in operations and the relationship of operations decisions to other business decisions
  5. communicate in writing the results of analysis of operations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX3991 - Leadership principles and practices

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Nathan Eva (Clayton and Prato)
Mr Jeff Shao (Caulfield)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Nathan Eva (Clayton and Prato)
Mr Jeff Shao (Caulfield)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prato

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

This interactive unit examines principles and practices of leadership which are vital for aspiring leaders of the future. Through a personal portfolio of leadership concepts, character, and competencies, students develop their potential for growth as strategic leaders of the 21st century organisations. Inspiring stories of leadership successes and failures from exemplary leaders in the past and present will guide students' leadership journey to find their own authentic voice. A plethora of cutting-edge leadership materials (research articles, movies and videos, case studies, role-plays, games, self-assessments) will also be featured weekly to enhance students' learning experience.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of major theories of organisational leadership
  2. formulate a framework of leadership that would help students make sense of their current and future leadership experiences and discern critical lessons drawn
  3. develop a higher self awareness of students' own personality, values, attitudes, and styles as well as strengths and weaknesses pertinent to their leadership aspirations
  4. construct a personal leadership philosophy outlining students' convictions on ethical and compassionate leadership and its impacts in real-world organisational contexts
  5. analyse and synthesise crucial roles and positive impacts that managers and leaders can make to organisations and their stakeholders.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX4000 - Introductory management research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6006, B6007, B6009 or B6012.

Prohibitions

BEW4000, MGX5000

Synopsis

Basic introduction to research design in management; types of research designs; qualitative and quantitative data collection and measurement techniques; coding data; reliability and validity; qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis; interpreting and discussing results; structuring and writing the research report; integrating individual research into overall management literature.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse and interpret basic research designs in the management discipline
  2. construct research questions grounded in a theoretical and conceptual framework
  3. assess the appropriateness, types, and use of qualitative and quantitative data collection and analysis techniques as a means of investigating and answering research questions in the management discipline
  4. identify, search for, and locate secondary data and knowledge relevant to management research, as well as understanding the process of generating or collecting primary data
  5. develop academic writing skills appropriate to the discipline for reporting on business management research projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX4100 - Perspectives and paradigms in management theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Michelle Greenwood

Coordinator(s)

Dr Michelle Greenwood

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Synopsis

This unit analyses different ways in which management has been represented in management theory, and how these have affected judgements about the rationality and legitimacy of management practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the different perspectives from which a particular event or process may be viewed
  2. demonstrate a sound understanding of a selection of paradigms that are relevant for solving contemporary management problems
  3. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of competing paradigms
  4. select a particular area of interest and appropriate paradigms for paradigm comparison.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX4200 - Data analysis for organisational research

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Prohibitions

BEW4010

Synopsis

Graphical and multivariate data analysis techniques to communicate information derived from large scale survey data. Desktop and mainframe information technology is integrated to analyse data from various surveys. Teaching strategies include weekly workshop sessions dealing with the principles of data analysis; practical computer laboratory sessions; individual and team-based exercises.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. select and conduct preliminary analyses of data in order to assess their suitability for further analysis
  2. demonstrate proficiency in the use of data analytic software such as SPSS
  3. analyse data using qualitative techniques (eg: content, thematic analysis) in order to answer research questions and/or test hypotheses
  4. analyse data using quantitative techniques (univariate, bivariate, multivariate) in order to answer research questions and/or test hypotheses
  5. interpret and report the results/findings obtained from qualitative and quantitative data analytic techniques.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX4300 - Contemporary issues in management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Gavin Jack

Coordinator(s)

Professor Gavin Jack

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Synopsis

Topics selected for emphasis will alter as contemporary issues change. The study of great ideas in management on motivation, job design, human resource management, ethics, social responsibility, leadership, production/operations management, business policy, strategy, and the management process are explored through the study of the works of major management scholars.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and critically examine a range of contemporary issues in management from a variety of theoretical and practical perspectives
  2. demonstrate a range of relevant scholarship/research skills in acquiring, integrating, interpreting, synthesising, utilising and communicating information about the contemporary issues examined
  3. summarise the major implications of the issues examined as they relate to their own lives and their careers in organisations, the theory and practice of managers and management, and the broader societal and environmental implications of the issues, both now and into the future
  4. demonstrate skills in written and inter-personal communication including creating effective learning environments for themselves and others.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MGX4400 - Honours research thesis

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Management

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 to First semester 2019 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • Full year 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Prohibitions

BEW4100

Synopsis

Students work under the guidance of a supervisor to carry out research that addresses: a classic or contemporary disciplinary debate; a current policy issue; or a generic issue within management practice.

Outcomes

The learning goal associated with this unit is to design and execute an independent research project over the course of two semesters, under the guidance of a staff supervisor. Projects may be based in qualitative or quantitative methodologies, or may include a mixed methods approach. For example, a quantitative project based on surveys will typically require: elucidation of the research question, conduct of a critical review of the relevant literature in relation to the chosen topic area, deriving hypotheses, identifying a target population, gaining ethics approval, designing a questionnaire, gathering the data, analysing the data using appropriate techniques, drawing conclusions and producing a major analytical thesis of up to 20,000 words on the project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information


MKB1700 - Fundamentals of marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Jane Carroll

Coordinator(s)

Ms Jane Carroll

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MKB1200, MKC1200, MKF1120, MKG1120, MKP1120 and MKW1120.

Synopsis

Creating value for organisations, stakeholders, consumers, and even society as a whole, is a central theme in marketing.

In this unit you will be introduced to the marketing discipline and its role within an organisation. You will gain an understanding of key frameworks, concepts, and strategies used by marketers to address specific challenges and opportunities. Throughout this unit you will learn how to apply your newly-acquired knowledge to solve a range of marketing problems.

Given the importance of marketing in contemporary society, this unit is suitable for students seeking a career in marketing or wanting a basic understanding of the functions of marketing in an organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe fundamental marketing frameworks and concepts
  2. explain the role and influence of marketing in an organisational environment
  3. discuss how marketing concepts are used in the marketplace and everyday life
  4. apply key marketing concepts, tools, and techniques to a range of marketing problems
  5. discuss the role of marketing in creating value for an organisation and its stakeholders.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKB2500 - Retail management principles

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fiona Newton

Coordinator(s)

Dr Fiona Newton

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKB1700 or equivalent.

Synopsis

This unit introduces the students to retailing from a management perspective. This includes the evolution of retailing; retail organisations and their structure; retail environment and the challenges; formulating and implementing retail strategy; merchandise management; retail pricing and communication mix; transportation and logistics; customer service; store location, layout and presentation; retail performance measurement.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and understand the theories, concepts, processes and procedures of retail management
  2. demonstrate how retail theory and concepts are applied in the retail sector
  3. develop the ability to integrate and apply various theories and concepts to critically evaluate a retail business
  4. develop the ability to design and implement strategies for a retail business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKB2600 - Tourism marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Maureen Griffiths

Coordinator(s)

Ms Maureen Griffiths

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKB1700 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MKP2600, MKW2600

Synopsis

Tourism marketing provides students with a broad understanding of how key marketing concepts and theories can be applied to the tourism sector.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the importance of marketing for the tourism sector
  2. identify the marketing methods employed by the tourism sector
  3. apply marketing concepts and theories to the tourism sector
  4. analyse different marketing strategies within the tourism sector.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKB2703 - Consumer psychology

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fiona Newton

Coordinator(s)

Dr Fiona Newton

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MKC2110, MKF2111, MKB2402, MKG2402, MKW2402, MKP2700 and MKP2701.

Synopsis

A key role of consumer psychology is to provide organisations with insights into how consumers think, feel, and act.

In this unit, you will explore the psychology behind consumer decision making and behaviour. You will examine ways in which marketers leverage consumer needs, motivations, and perceptions to configure product and service offerings. Using this knowledge, you will gain practical experience in developing consumer profiles as well as positioning and strategies for various products and services. This unit of study is also designed to strengthen students' skills in identifying consumer insights.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain how psychological characteristics of consumers can influence consumer decision making
  2. discuss how external factors can influence consumer decision making
  3. discuss core theoretical explanations of consumer decision making
  4. apply acquired knowledge of consumer psychology to segment markets and develop appropriate marketing strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKB2704 - Consumer orientated marketing communications

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Elizabeth Snuggs

Coordinator(s)

Dr Elizabeth Snuggs

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKB2703 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MKG2460, MKW2460, MKC3460, MKF3461 and MKP2702.

Synopsis

This unit explores the development of marketing communication strategies to meet organisational objectives.

In this unit you explore the principles and practices of marketing communication and learn how to apply a range of marketing communication functions and tools to address different marketing problems and opportunities. Given the applied nature of this unit, you will also have the opportunity to develop an IMC plan that uses campaign messages and creative strategies in existing and emerging communication channels to engage consumers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the role of consumer integrated marketing communication in achieving organisational objectives
  2. identify and justify appropriate communication channels to reach different consumer audiences
  3. develop recommendations around appropriate media mixes to achieve campaign objectives for a specific target audience
  4. develop an appropriate consumer-focused integrated marketing communication plan for a specified audience
  5. develop recommendations around evaluating an IMC plan.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKB2705 - Research methods and analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Stephen Saunders

Coordinator(s)

Dr Stephen Saunders

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKB1700 or MGB1010 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MKF2121, MKB2420, MKG2420, MKW2420, MKC2500 and MKP2720.

Synopsis

Research and research reporting helps businesses to make informed decisions about business strategy. Students taking this unit will gain a working knowledge of research methods and data analysis, which includes problem identification, hypothesis formulation and statistical testing. Students will also be provided with practical training in survey design and research report writing. The ability to analyse and synthesise research data is highly valued by industry.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the research process
  2. identify a business research problem
  3. plan a research proposal
  4. design a survey
  5. analyse and interpret data
  6. prepare a research report.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKB2706 - Brand and product management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mustabshira Rushdi

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mustabshira Rushdi

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKB1700

Prohibitions

MKB2521, MKF2521

Synopsis

Developing and managing products and brands is important to firms and organisations seeking to gain and maintain competitive advantage.

Undertaking this unit will build your knowledge and skills in developing new products and brands. You will also gain a deeper understanding of different methods, frameworks, and theories used by organisations to build and maintain an appropriate portfolio of products and brands.

Particular emphasis is given to exploring contemporary issues and challenges facing firms and organisations in managing their brand equity in dynamic environments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the function of products and brands in firms and organisations.
  2. explain the models, concepts, and tools for new product development.
  3. evaluate the application of branding theories, concepts, and tactics across different firm and organisational contexts.
  4. apply acquired unit knowledge to develop appropriate strategies for building and managing brand equity

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKB3301 - Services marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Maureen Griffiths

Coordinator(s)

Ms Maureen Griffiths

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKB1200

Synopsis

Services marketing provides students with a broad understanding of the application of marketing concepts and theories to the services sector. This includes understanding service design and delivery, customer service, service quality measurement and internal marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the key services marketing concepts and theories
  2. examine the unique challenges inherent in marketing and managing services
  3. apply strategies, tools and approaches to the unique challenges of service marketing and management
  4. propose key services marketing concepts that can be applied to a range of services marketing problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKB3531 - International marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Manir Zaman

Coordinator(s)

Mr Manir Zaman

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKB1700 or equivalent.

Synopsis

International marketing explores the application of marketing concepts and theories to the international environment. It also provides a broad understanding of how economic, political, geographic, demographic, cultural and other international factors influence marketing strategy. The concepts covered in this unit offer insight into the relative value of alternative marketing strategies in different international markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how economic, political, demographic, cultural and other international factors influence marketing strategy
  2. apply marketing concepts and theories to the international environment
  3. critically assess alternative marketing strategies in different international markets
  4. prepare an international marketing plan

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKB3881 - Digital marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Manir Zaman

Coordinator(s)

Mr Manir Zaman

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKB1700 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MKF3881

Synopsis

Digital marketing explores different aspects of the digital landscape and how to integrate digital technologies into the marketing mix. It also provides a broad understanding of the various digital marketing tools, and the application of these tools in the rapidly changing digital environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and investigate emerging digital marketing technologies and trends
  2. explain how marketing can leverage these technologies and trends
  3. understand the fundamentals of a digital marketing strategy, and how digital marketing can be integrated into the marketing mix
  4. critically evaluate a digital marketing campaign.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC1200 - Principles of marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Maureen Griffiths (First semester)
Dr Pingping Qiu (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Ms Maureen Griffiths (First semester)
Dr Pingping Qiu (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Student must be enrolled in one of the following courses to undertake this unit: 0023, 0032, 0169, 0170, 0179, 0542, 0546, 0548, 1185, 1319, 1320, 1469, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2026, 2630, 3050, 3176, 3178, 3275, 3280, 3804, 3805, 3823, 3830, 3834, 4097, 4403, 4410, 4417, 4419, 4425, 4428 or 4615.

Prohibitions

MKB1200, MKF1120, MKG1120, MKW1120

Synopsis

Have you ever wondered what marketing is all about? This unit is designed to introduce students to the essential elements of marketing. It encompasses marketing's role in a dynamic business environment and leads students to understand how organisations use the principles of marketing to meet the needs of their customers and achieve their objectives. This unit provides a foundation for those students seeking to pursue further study of specialist marketing units; however it covers the broad scope of marketing sufficient for those students undertaking only one marketing unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe key marketing concepts
  2. recognise the applications of these key marketing concepts in real-life situations
  3. discuss how these key marketing concepts can be used in analysing a range of marketing problems
  4. demonstrate how marketing helps organisations to satisfy their customers' needs and wants.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC2110 - Buyer behaviour in marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Dewi Tojib

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Dewi Tojib

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKC1200

Prohibitions

MKB2402, MKF2111, MKG2402, MKP2700, MKP2701, MKW2111, MKW2402

Synopsis

Throughout their lives, consumers make both simple and complex decisions about acquiring, using, or disposing of offerings. Understanding how and why these decisions are made is of great interest to marketers. Marketers can use such knowledge to understand what is valued by consumers. Students taking this unit will explore both the internal and external influences on the consumer decision-making process. Students will also examine how marketers can make use of these consumer behaviour insights to better predict consumer behaviour, influence consumer decisions and develop consumer-orientated marketing strategies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. illustrate the application of consumer behaviour concepts, theories, and models that are relevant to the practice of marketing
  2. describe the different paths that consumers can engage in making decisions about acquiring, using, or disposing of offerings
  3. analyse both internal and external influences that impact upon the consumer decision-making process
  4. evaluate marketers' use of consumer behaviour insights in the development and implementation of consumer-oriented marketing strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC2130 - Marketing decision analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Satheesh Seenivasan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Satheesh Seenivasan

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKC1200 and ETC1000 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKF2131, MKW2131

Synopsis

In the current information age, the value of marketing analytics in decision making is enormous. The Marketing Decision Analysis unit aims to provide students with the analytical knowledge and reasoning skills to analyse data, evaluate strategies and develop optimal decisions for a range of marketing issues. Students will be exposed to metrics and models that will assist them in making sound decisions and developing effective and efficient marketing programs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. equip students with the knowledge of a range of marketing metrics and models and an ability to apply them to analyse marketing scenarios, phenomenon, issues and problems
  2. develop a capability to interpret metrics and model outcomes, evaluate strategies and develop managerial recommendation
  3. recognise the strengths and limitations of various metrics and models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC2500 - Marketing research analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Luke Greenacre

Coordinator(s)

Dr Luke Greenacre

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

ETC1000 and MKC1200

Prohibitions

ETC2500, MKB2420, MKF2121, MKG2420, MKW2420

Synopsis

This unit introduces sample survey methods, statistical techniques for the analysis of survey data and also introduces qualitative research techniques. It provides students with the knowledge and skills required to understand the role research methods play in problem identification, decision making, strategy development, marketing planning and the evaluation of marketing performance.

Outcomes

The learning objectives of this unit are to:

  1. describe the steps in planning and implementing marketing research projects
  2. demonstrate the skills and competencies required to conduct both qualitative and quantitative marketing research
  3. demonstrate the skills required to analyse and interpret sample data
  4. understand the role and importance of marketing research within organisations
  5. communicate the results of marketing research projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC2610 - Strategic retailing in the global market

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yongfu He

Coordinator(s)

Dr Yongfu He

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKC1200

Prohibitions

MKB2500, MKB2521, MKB3531, MKX1500, MKF2521, MKG3444, MKF3531, MKF2540, MKC3220Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Strategic retail marketing is critical to maintain a company's competitive advantage and to manage retail operations effectively and efficiently. This unit aims to assist students to acquire a deeper understanding of the current retail environment in Australia and overseas. Students will study the global forces and local marketing trends that affect retailing strategies in both domestic and international markets. The issues to be considered when exporting or importing both product and retail brands will be studied. In addition to acknowledging the importance of brands in retail, this unit highlights various functions of brand management for developing successful retail strategies in the rapidly changing retail market.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the operations, strategies, and performance of leading local and global retailers
  2. examine the key issues and challenges driving the nature and direction of change in the local and global retail markets
  3. distinguish various functions of brand management strategies and apply them to both the Australian and international retailing context
  4. integrate retail marketing and brand management strategies to maximise the effectiveness of retailing practice

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC3110 - Market analysis and strategy development

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Pingping Qiu

Coordinator(s)

Dr Pingping Qiu

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKC1200 and any two marketing units

Prohibitions

MKC2210, MKC3130Not offered in 2018, MKF3131, MKF3121, MKF3151, MKG3440, MKW3131, MKG3121, MKW3121Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit applies a market focus to the process of analysis and strategy development. Using marketing planning as a framework, the contribution of marketing strategies to the attainment of firm goals is explored.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. distinguish the nature of marketing decisions that a firm makes according to the hierarchy of strategy
  2. explain the contribution that marketing makes to the value of the firm
  3. conduct analysis of the internal and external environments of an organisation that informs marketing strategy development
  4. formulate and recommend marketing strategies that add measurable value to the organisation
  5. develop the written and oral communication skills required to justify a strategic recommendation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC3130 - Strategic issues in marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Phyra Sok

Coordinator(s)

Dr Phyra Sok

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MKC2210

Prohibitions

MKF3131, MKG3440, MKW3131, MKW3440Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This subject integrates the conceptual knowledge and skills developed in earlier marketing subjects and sharpens students' abilities to analyse, evaluate and implement marketing strategies. The subject emphasises strategic analysis and the process of decision making in a marketing management context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate the theoretical and functional aspects of marketing (and other business disciplines) into a practical problem-solving framework
  2. analyse a marketing problem based on supplied information
  3. design and recommend marketing strategies within a given context
  4. source and select relevant marketing theories to support analysis and recommendations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC3140 - Marketing strategy implementation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Felix Mavondo

Coordinator(s)

Professor Felix Mavondo

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKC3110

Prohibitions

MKC3120, MKF3121

Synopsis

This unit forms the capstone of the marketing major and integrates the conceptual knowledge and skills developed in earlier marketing units and sharpens students' abilities to evaluate and implement marketing strategies. Particular emphasis is placed on implementing marketing, from action plans at the functional level through to creating a market oriented organisational culture.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the issues associated with implementing marketing and marketing strategies within an organisation
  2. advocate the role of marketing and a marketing orientation within organisations
  3. identify, analyse and apply appropriate measurement criteria to assess the implementation and effectiveness of marketing strategies
  4. recommend appropriate implementation, monitoring and control plans for functional level marketing strategies
  5. evaluate and demonstrate the contribution marketing makes within the organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC3220 - International marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yongfu He

Coordinator(s)

Dr Yongfu He

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MKC1200

Prohibitions

MKB3531, MKF3531, MKF3761, MKG3444, MKW3444

Synopsis

In a largely deregulated economy companies which retain a domestic focus have found themselves facing increasing international competition and declining market opportunities. Thus, no market can exist without acknowledging international forces, trends and pressures. International trade, investment and service markets have been the fastest growing sectors of the world economy since the end of WWII. The dynamic growth of international markets and global marketing has evolved in a context of fundamental underlying forces and concepts. Electronic marketing; globalisation; standardisation; customisation; and horizontal management structures are some of those influences.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and evaluate how a range of international marketing criteria (culture and so on) impact on a chosen and specific foreign market
  2. develop, analyse, justify and evaluate market entry and longer term foreign marketing plans for a specific market
  3. understand how current issues, trends and research in international marketing impact on designated foreign market segments
  4. identify and evaluate how a range of specialised, localised and specific issues might impact upon business activity within a designated foreign market segment
  5. utilise independent critical thinking and applied learning skills to develop an international marketing orientation in terms of a chosen market context.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC3300 - Marketing law

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Paul Sugden

Coordinator(s)

Mr Paul Sugden

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

BTC1110 and MKC1200

Prohibitions

BTB3281, BTC3300, BTF3181, BTW3281

Synopsis

The legal framework which operates in relation to marketing decisions and practice. The impact of common law, legislation and self-regulating codes of practice in the market place. Particular topics include intellectual property rights, product development and promotion, product safety and quality, the regulation of unfair and anti-competitive conduct, franchising and electronic marketing and the law.

Outcomes

The learning goal associated with this unit is to be able to apply the main principles of law affecting the development of new products, the promotion of products, the pricing of products and the distribution process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30% + Examination: 70%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC3460 - Integrated marketing communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter Thompson

Coordinator(s)

Dr Peter Thompson

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKC2110

Prohibitions

MKG2460, MKF3461, MKW3461, MKW2460, MKW2211

Synopsis

This unit builds on MKC1200 by extending the issues relating to communication. Conceptual framework for the planning, integration and control of the communication process; determining the communication options available to organisations; developing realistic communication objectives for different types of marketing communication; budgeting and allocating resources to the communication elements within the budget. Evaluating the effectiveness of the marketing communication plan and the strategic use of the techniques of advertising, sales promotion, publicity/PR and personal selling, sponsorship, direct marketing and the use of communication in electronic commerce.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the role of Integrated Marketing Communication in building brand equity
  2. employ a conceptual framework for the planning, integrating and control of the marketing communication process
  3. demonstrate the strategic use of each of the communication elements -- advertising, direct marketing, sales promotion and PR/publicity
  4. formulate relevant ideas on campaign message and creative strategies and discuss them
  5. recommend appropriate ways to evaluate a marketing communication campaign.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKC3500 - Survey data analysis

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Peter Danaher

Coordinator(s)

Professor Peter Danaher

Unit guides

Offered

Clayton

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

At least one of ETC2400, ETC2410, ETC2430, ETC2450Not offered in 2018, ETC2500/MKC2500

Prohibitions

ETC3500, ETC4350, ETF3500, MKF3500Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

In today's dynamic business environment, organisations are eager to work with people who have strong problem-solving skills based on sound research practices. Building on prior knowledge of marketing research, this unit will enable students to strengthen their research and critical thinking skills using advanced statistical techniques. Students will use statistical software packages to apply these techniques to survey data, interpret the output, and discuss the results of their analysis. Students will learn how to follow the research process, confidently formulating research questions and hypotheses, right through to communicating research findings and making recommendations that can influence business practice. This unit is for students who want to know how using research is often a key point-of-difference for successful organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. state clearly the research problem and associated research questions
  2. design comprehensive survey instruments
  3. demonstrate a logical argument in hypotheses development, analysis and data interpretation on the basis of scientific reasoning
  4. have a knowledge and understanding of relevant quantitative techniques used in marketing research
  5. communicate and present research findings in oral and written form with clarity and conciseness.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF1120 - Marketing theory and practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Angela Cruz (First semester)
Mr Peter Wagstaff (Second semester, Trimester A)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Angela Cruz (First semester)
Mr Peter Wagstaff (Second semester)
Dr Tiffany Winchester (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MKB1200, MKC1200, MKG1120, MKP1120, MKW1120

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an introduction to the discipline of marketing. It encompasses marketing's role in a dynamic organisational environment and introduces students to the concepts and strategies employed by marketers to create value for organisations and their stakeholders. The unit provides a foundation for those students seeking to pursue further study in marketing, however it also provides an insight into the interrelationship between marketing and other disciplines.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the theories and frameworks that form the basis of marketing
  2. recognise these theories and frameworks as they are applied by organisations
  3. explain how marketing creates value for an organisation and its stakeholders
  4. propose appropriate marketing actions in a range of scenarios.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF2111 - Buyer behaviour

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gerri Spassova (First semester and Trimester A)
Dr Eugene Chan (Second semester)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Trimester B)
Professor Mark Crosby (Trimester C)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gerri Spassova (First semester)
Dr Eugene Chan (Second semester)
Dr Tiffany Winchester (City)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

City (Melbourne)

  • Trimester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester B 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester C 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF1120, MKW1120 or MKP1120

Prohibitions

MKC2110, MKG2402, MKP2700, MKP2701, MKW2111, MKW2402

Synopsis

This unit draws upon the concepts and theories developed in the social sciences to provide students with insight into the drivers of consumer behaviour. The knowledge obtained in this unit can be of significant benefit to both individual consumers, who can use it to make better consumption decisions, and to organisations who can apply it to develop more effective marketing strategies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the consumer decision making process and the main factors that influence consumer behaviour
  2. use consumer behaviour concepts to evaluate and enhance the effectiveness of marketing strategies
  3. explain how this knowledge can be used to help consumers make better and more informed decisions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF2121 - Marketing research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Junzhao Ma

Coordinator(s)

Dr Junzhao Ma

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF1120

Prohibitions

ETC2500, MKB2420, MKW2420, MKC2500, MKG2420

Synopsis

The process of marketing research. Role of research in the marketing decision process. Developing key outputs -- brief, proposal, report. Planning and managing a research project. Qualitative and quantitative research techniques. Statistical analysis, marketing interpretation and reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide a working knowledge of key concepts and methods used in marketing research
  2. develop a capability in formulating a theoretical framework for a marketing problem/opportunity
  3. provide an understanding of how to formulate a research design
  4. develop an ability to apply SPSS statistical software
  5. develop an ability to interpret statistical output from a marketing perspective.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF2131 - Marketing decision analysis

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Satheesh Seenivasan (First semester)
Dr Nukhet Gur (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Satheesh Seenivasan (First semester)
Dr Nukhet Gur (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF2121 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MKC2130, MKW2131

Synopsis

With increasing availability of data and computing power, more and more companies are using data driven decision making, and data is becoming the heart of the corporate decision making process. In this unit, you will learn the power of marketing analytics and its effectiveness in making better decisions. Working with multiple marketing metrics and models, you will develop skills to identify problems, analyse data and develop optimal decisions for various marketing issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate and use a range of marketing metrics and models, and apply them to analyse business problems
  2. develop a capability to interpret metrics and model outcomes, evaluate strategies and develop managerial recommendations
  3. recognise the strengths and limitations of various metrics and models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF2401 - Marketing issues in packaging design

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Wagstaff

Coordinator(s)

Ms Narelle Pittard

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or equivalent.

Synopsis

Is there anyone who doesn't interact with packaging? What is the right kind of package? Packaging is part of doing business. It's part of marketing strategy. With more than thirty-five thousand different products lining the shelves and aisles of our stores, it's important for marketers to understand the role of packaging as it supports products in the marketplace. This unit introduces students to the importance of packaging and the social, economic, environmental and sustainable components that are driving packaging decisions. Through a focused studio component, students design and create their own packages.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the importance of packaging as an element of product design
  2. analyse the economic, environmental, legal and social factors associated with packaging and the broader packaging context
  3. examine the relationship between packaging and branding
  4. develop, document and evaluate packaging strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF2521 - Brand management

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mustabshira Rushdi (First semester)
Dr Jasmina Ilicic (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jasmina Ilicic (First semester)
Dr Mustabshira Rushdi (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or MKP1120

Prohibitions

MKB2521

Synopsis

A brand is much more than a logo, a symbol, a sign or device, or simply the result of clever advertising. It helps to communicate value and create and deliver that value. Branding is a promise of value for customers. It helps to attract and, if it is true and accurate, keep customers. It provides an extra element of understanding or meaning, for customers as they form opinions and make purchase decisions from a variety of competing offerings. There is strong industry demand for graduates with a thorough understanding of branding. While this unit is primarily for students undertaking a major in marketing it is offered to any student with a prerequisite of an introductory marketing unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the brand and the various functions of brand management
  2. describe the various components of a brand and how they interact
  3. analyse branding techniques and apply them to a variety of different issues
  4. generalise and hypothesise from branding theory into branding practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF2540 - Retail management principles

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Wagstaff

Coordinator(s)

Ms Karen Lurati

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF1120

Synopsis

An overview of retailing from a management perspective. The development of retailing; the Australian retail industry and its environment; merchandising planning, control and distribution; pricing merchandise; selling and sales promotion; store location, layout and presentation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the retail industry and identify the different retail formats in Australia and abroad
  2. identify the processes and procedures involved in retail planning and management
  3. develop skills for analysing a retail business
  4. identify and analyse retail trends and their implications
  5. create a retail store strategy while utilising various theoretical and practical tools.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 55% + Examination: 45%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF2801 - Marketing insights

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Paul Murphy (First semester)
Mr David Toleman (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Paul Murphy (First semester)
Mr David Toleman (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF1120

Synopsis

This unit bridges the market research process and strategy development by introducing students to industry and competitor analysis, as well as trend and consumer insight techniques, through the synthesis of secondary data. Understanding these macro insights is a fundamental part of the marketing landscape. By forecasting trends, managers can better understand what drives and motivates consumers. The synthesis of such secondary data can greatly assist in the development of successful marketing strategies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the skills required to conduct, analyse, and interpret secondary data
  2. track and analyse trends and use them to inform strategy
  3. use secondary research to draw strategic implications and form recommendations
  4. appraise the role and importance of trends analysis and consumer insight techniques within organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3001 - Special studies unit

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gerri Spassova

Coordinator(s)

Dr Gerri Spassova

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Permission required

Synopsis

Proposals to undertake a special studies subject should be prepared before the start of the semester, in order for the student to arrange a supervisor and finalise a viable study program (with a written contract detailing performance requirements and assessment methods).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. design an individual project to meet specific needs
  2. formulate a number of questions to be answered by the project
  3. identify and critically analyse data relevant to the project
  4. recommend an outcome based on the project findings.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3121 - Marketing planning and implementation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Coordinator(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

For students in B2003, B20033, B2012, B2013, B2018 must have passed MKF1120 and MKF2111 and MKF2801 and one more (any) Marketing unit.

For students in any other courses (pre 2016) must have passed MKF1120, MKF2111 and any two other Marketing units.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B20033 or associated double degree program.

Prohibitions

MKG3121, MKW3121Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The development of corporate marketing strategies; marketing planning procedure; evaluation and control in marketing planning; Australian case studies in corporate marketing planning and strategy. Concepts of product management; designing a product strategy; monitoring planning/marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the relationship between corporate planning and marketing planning in a business environment
  2. demonstrate the relationship between corporate objective setting and marketing objective setting
  3. construct or prepare a marketing plan, which incorporates the specific elements of the marketing mix to achieve specific marketing objectives
  4. develop and enhance appropriate written and oral communications and analytical skills required for the effective presentation of a marketing plan
  5. understand how a marketing plan is implemented in practice

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3131 - Strategic marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Paul Murphy

Coordinator(s)

Mr Paul Murphy

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF2111 and MKF3121

Prohibitions

MKC3130Not offered in 2018, MKG3440, MKW3131, MKW3440Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Using the case study method this unit provides an analytical framework from which students can explore how marketing strategy is applied throughout a variety of industries. Students will be taught how to analyse, evaluate and implement marketing strategy. A theoretical grounding in introductory marketing, marketing research, buyer behaviour and communications is essential to students undertaking this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate the theoretical and functional aspects of marketing (and other business disciplines) into a practical problem-solving framework
  2. analyse information supplied from a case and identify the core marketing problem
  3. design, evaluate and recommend marketing strategies that solve the identified core marketing problem
  4. source and select relevant marketing theories and marketing tools to support analysis and recommendations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 75% + Examination: 25%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3141 - Issues in competitive advantage

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gerri Spassova

Coordinator(s)

Ms Jane Carroll

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MKF1120 and any four second level units from Faculty of Business and Economics.

Synopsis

The unit is designed to sensitise students to the issues which affect a firm's ability to compete effectively, and from which competitive advantage is derived.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and interpret the trends and challenges created by an increasingly competitive and dynamic business/organisational environment
  2. analyse an organisation, taking account of its external environs and identify activities from which competitive advantage may originate
  3. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of the main competitive advantage theoretical perspectives and make recommendations how an organisation may develop its competitive advantage
  4. create and design strategies for specific organisations to build sustainable competitive advantage using a range of current issues that take into account the dynamic external environment and the organisations skills and resources.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3151 - Marketing planning and strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Phyra Sok

Coordinator(s)

Dr Phyra Sok

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF2111 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MKC3131, MKC3140, MKC3110, MKF3121, MKF3131. Students enrolled in courses B2003, B2013, B2012, B2018, 0314, 1337 and 0556.

Synopsis

This unit emphasises the role of marketing decision making in contemporary organisations, with particular focus on the marketing planning role and the formulation of marketing strategies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the scope of the marketing management function and its role within organisations
  2. develop marketing mix strategies that are based on an analysis of an organisation's situation
  3. demonstrate an understanding of the implementation issues associated with recommended strategies
  4. develop and enhance appropriate analytic, written and oral communications skills required for the effective presentation of marketing strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70% + Examination: 30%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3301 - Services marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Hean Tat Keh

Coordinator(s)

Professor Hean Tat Keh

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Prerequisites

MKF1120

Synopsis

An in-depth analysis of the marketing techniques that apply to service organisations and industries including service design and delivery, customer service, service quality measurement and internal marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define a service and understand the implications of this on marketing research, buyer behaviour, classification of services and internationalising services
  2. design a service using blueprinting and the servuction model
  3. develop and implement promotional, pricing, product, distribution strategies for a service giving consideration to the demand management implications
  4. explain the importance of the measurement of service quality, giving consideration to relationship marketing theory.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3461 - Marketing communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jiemiao Chen

Coordinator(s)

Dr Jiemiao Chen

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF2111 or MKP2700.

Prohibitions

MKC3460, MKG2460, MKP2702, MKW2211, MKW2460

Synopsis

The primary aim of this unit is to explore the use of marketing communication to build and sustain brands, based on knowledge of how communication works, the institutions which participate in the process and the practical business processes necessary to achieve and measure defined communication goals. In particular, students will be able to understand the integrated nature of communication and develop a full appreciation of advertising, sales promotion, public relations, publicity and direct marketing in a digital and contemporary environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and describe communication theories, processes and models
  2. construct an integrated marketing communication plan, including situation analysis, target audience analysis, communication objectives, communication strategy, creative strategy, media strategy, scheduling, budgeting, and monitoring and evaluation procedures
  3. discuss, present, and critically evaluate practical issues in marketing communication using appropriate theories and terminologies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3471 - Sales management and negotiation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Wagstaff

Coordinator(s)

Mr Kimble Montagu

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or MKW1120

Prohibitions

MKG3442, MKW3442

Synopsis

Customer contact and relations. A broad overview of the sales area focusing on business to business and person to person activities. Issues include interpersonal persuasion and influence. In addition to these knowledge-based topics, the unit exposes students to practical interpersonal skills involving persuasive group presentations, negotiations and sales. It covers areas of management, which focus on buying-centre/selling team relationships. There is a focus on the relationship between the functions of marketing and sales within organisations and the effect on corporate performance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate different selling situations and select appropriate selling approaches to implement
  2. demonstrate an ability to communicate and negotiate persuasively and professionally in a sales setting
  3. apply the key elements of sales management, personal selling and negotiation theory, specific to business relationships
  4. recommend appropriate sales management strategies for recruitment, selection, development, supervision, motivation and evaluation of salespeople.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3500 - Survey data analysis

6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Coordinator(s)

Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

ETX2111, ETX2121Not offered in 2018 or MKF2121

Prohibitions

ETC3500, ETF3500, MKC3500

Synopsis

Introduction to multivariate statistical techniques for the analysis of survey data and models to analyse the discrete choice behaviour of individuals. Topics include multivariate analysis of variance, principal components analysis, factor analysis, correspondence analysis and models of discrete choice behaviour. Statistical software and case studies will be utilised during this unit and students will apply the techniques to a variety of practical problems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the role that multivariate statistical techniques such as factor analysis, structural equation modelling, logistic regression, categorical data analysis, cluster analysis, multidimensional scaling and correspondence analysis, play in uncovering relationships and patterns in survey data
  2. appraise the strengths and limitations of these techniques
  3. apply tools in SPSS to generate solutions for the appropriate statistical techniques
  4. demonstrate skills in using the appropriate statistical techniques from a user and provider perspective
  5. demonstrate skills in communicating the results of the analysis so that decision making can be implemented.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40% + Examination: 60%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3531 - International marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yongfu He

Coordinator(s)

Dr Yongfu He

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or MKW1120

Prohibitions

MKB3531, MKC3220Not offered in 2018, MKW3444, MKG3444

Synopsis

Contemporary issues in international trade and their potential to impact on the marketing initiative of companies; the economic, political, geographic, demographic and cultural issues which influence national business environments; the conduct and outcome of market research in other countries.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the issues facing the global marketplace and their influence on strategic marketing decision-making especially in the functional areas of marketing
  2. critically analyse the volatile and changeable nature of international markets and be able to apply marketing theories and knowledge accordingly
  3. evaluate the issues associated with market entry and the impact on long term survival in a target international market
  4. critically assess alternative market entry strategies and their relative value in different markets
  5. formulate marketing plans for international operations especially in the Asia-Pacific region.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3621 - Advertising management and campaigns

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Elizabeth Snuggs

Coordinator(s)

Dr Elizabeth Snuggs

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF3461

Prohibitions

MKX3621, MKX3671

Synopsis

Do you want to understand the strategic and creative thinking needed to develop successful advertising like the memorable 'Happy Little Vegemite' campaign and Metro's viral sensation, 'Dumb Ways to Die'? If so, this unit is for you! In Advertising Management and Campaigns, students will utilise concepts of synergy and integration to design and execute a real world strategic advertising campaign, putting theory into practice. Students also walk away with in-depth knowledge of the advertising industry and the relationships that exist within. With a priority on industry engagement, students will gain the skills and knowledge to confidently begin a career in the advertising industry.

Outcomes

The learning objectives of this unit are to:

  1. investigate the importance of synergy and integration within the advertising industry, in particular, the process and relationships between the client and its various agencies
  2. analyse the effectiveness of strategic advertising campaigns to determine industry best practice
  3. design and execute a strategic advertising campaign, integrating market research, media planning, and creative resources based on a brief from industry
  4. apply the pitch process to present a persuasive advertising campaign to a professional client

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3710 - Specialised applications in marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MKF2111 and MKF2801.

Synopsis

This unit will introduce students to the unique features of marketing in specialised contexts. Students will explore the similarities and differences across diverse sectors, using global examples. The unit helps students develop skills for addressing the unique challenges faced by marketers in specialised contexts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast marketing in different contexts
  2. appraise the unique challenges faced by marketers in specific contexts
  3. develop skills for addressing the above challenges
  4. create a framework for sustainable, equitable and ethical marketing practices.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKF3881 - Digital marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Wagstaff (First semester)
Mr Joris Demmers (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Mr Peter Wagstaff (First semester)
Mr Joris Demmers (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF1120

Prohibitions

MKW3881Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Traditional business disciplines are starting to appreciate the fundamental challenges presented by the application of technology to their knowledge base. In marketing the most visible agent of change has been www and online transacting which has already revolutionised a number of sectors of the world economy. This subject takes marketing and traditional views of marketing and exposes them to critical analysis in the light of technological change. It explores how marketers can utilise different ways of understanding, creating, communicating and delivering customer value in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically reflect how traditional marketing structures and concepts, techniques and activities translate into the digital marketing medium
  2. advocate an integrated perspective of how digital marketing contributes to value creation for all stakeholders
  3. critically review markets, and create and develop innovative digital solutions to fulfil identifiable needs
  4. adapt and implement theory and practice to the rapidly evolving digital marketing environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKP3200 - Sports marketing and sponsorship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fiona Newton

Coordinator(s)

TBA

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

A minimum of 6 credit points of marketing units

Prohibitions

MKX3200 and MKG3200

Synopsis

The unit considers the role of sport in contemporary society and the interconnectedness of sport and business, particularly marketing. The unit draws on academic and practitioner literature to provide students with a sound understanding of how marketing concepts can be effectively applied to sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will develop an appreciation of sport sponsorship as a co-marketing alliance and be given opportunities to work collaboratively on a project to reinforce their understanding of the dynamics involved in sport marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the various elements of sports products
  2. understand how cultural and market forces can influence the marketing strategies used in the sport industry
  3. appreciate the central role of market research and segmentation principles in understanding participants and spectators as consumers
  4. understand and employ appropriate conceptual frameworks to strategically direct sports marketing efforts
  5. demonstrate the strategic use of the sports marketing mix (especially sponsorship) across a range of sports products.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKP3800 - Social marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fiona Newton

Coordinator(s)

Dr Fiona Newton

Unit guides

Offered

Peninsula

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKP2701 or MKP2700 or MKB2402 or MKF2111

Synopsis

Social marketing draws upon concepts and tools that have traditionally been used for commercial purposes in order to bring about beneficial behaviour change in a range of health, environmental, and community engagement contexts. Students will explore contemporary theoretical constructs used in social marketing and develop skills in applying procedural frameworks to formulate, manage, and evaluate social marketing campaigns. Emphasis will be given to understanding the importance of appropriately leveraging the marketing mix variables to bring about sustained behaviour change in both developed and developing world contexts. This unit will draw upon both quantitative and qualitative research methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the historical development of social marketing and its role in contemporary society
  2. demonstrate a sound understanding of the key theories and principles used in social marketing
  3. explain and apply the steps involved in the strategic development, management, and evaluation of social marketing campaigns
  4. understand the issues associated with leveraging the 5 Ps (Product, Price, Place, Promotion, and Policy) in social marketing campaigns
  5. demonstrate ability to develop and present a social marketing campaign plan.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS1120 - Marketing theory and practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)
  • Term 2 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MKB1200, MKC1200, MKF1120, MKG1120, MKP1120, MKW1120.

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to marketing activities undertaken by business, government, profit and non profit organisations. It explores marketing theory, the marketing concept and its evolution from a strategic and applied perspective, development of corporate and marketing strategic plans, analysis of an organisation and marketing's role, value-exchange processes, buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis, the marketing environment, the use of marketing decision making tools, product concepts, strategies and development, distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies, services marketing, marketing management, and implementation and control processes and procedures.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the key concepts upon which the practice of marketing is based
  2. recognise these concepts in the marketplace and in everyday life
  3. discuss the role and influence of marketing in the organisational environment
  4. discuss how key marketing concepts can be used in analysing a range of marketing problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS2402 - Consumer behaviour

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Coordinator(s)

Mrs Melanie Klopper

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKS1120 or MKG1120 or MKW1120 or MKC1200 or MKP1120.

Prohibitions

MKW2402, MKB2402, MKW2111, MKC2110, MKF2111, MKG2402, MKP2700, MKP2701.

Synopsis

This unit explores behavioural concepts and theories relating to consumer behaviour and the consumer decision making process. It will include a study of consumer behaviour influenced by individual socio-cultural factors such as family, social groups and group processes, social class, culture and subculture and a consumers individual factors such as motivation and needs, perception, learning, personality and lifestyle attitudes. An overview of organisational buying will be provided.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the basic concepts of consumer behaviour and describe how this knowledge can be used by marketers
  2. demonstrate the ability to segment markets using consumer behaviour concepts/constructs
  3. identify and illustrate how these concepts can be used to explain the decisions buyers make in the marketplace
  4. analyse the behaviour profiles of specific market segments and understand the basic aspects of strategy development as it applies to specific target groups
  5. explain and apply marketing communication in relation to consumer behaviour.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS2420 - Marketing research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Coordinator(s)

Ms Cynthia Bedwei-Majdoub

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Co-requisites

MKW2402 or MKS2402 or MKW2111

Prohibitions

ETC2500, MKB2420, MKC2500, MKF2121, MKG2420, MKW2420

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to the process of marketing research and the role of research in the marketing decision process. Key outputs include: developing a brief, a proposal and a report, planning and managing a research project, qualitative and quantitative research techniques, statistical analysis, marketing interpretation and reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of marketing research methods
  2. illustrate the processes and techniques on quantitative and qualitative research
  3. demonstrate skills on writing a research proposal and the conduct of a research study by applying appropriate research design
  4. develop competencies to analyse and interpret data by applying basic statistical tools
  5. critically assess the relevance of information for marketing decision making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS2431 - Business marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKS1120 or MKG1120 or MKW1120 or MKP1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKG2431, MKW2431

Synopsis

Topics include the nature and environment of business marketing, buying process in business marketing, marketing intelligence and business market targeting, networking and relationship, planning a business marketing mix strategy, and ethical issues in business marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and explain the dynamic nature of business marketing
  2. illustrate the organisational buying decision process and the role of buying centre in buying decisions
  3. develop competencies in business marketing strategy components
  4. demonstrate application of marketing theories and concepts in the management of business marketing functions
  5. critically evaluate the techniques that can be used to assess market opportunities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS2460 - Integrated marketing communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: MKG1120 or MKW1120 or MKS1120 and MKG2402 or MKW2402 or MKS2402, before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKC3460, MKF3461, MKW2211, MKG2460, MKW2460, MKB3461.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with a theoretical and practical appreciation of the central role marketing communication plays in the general business environment. The unit provides a framework for examining, analysing and evaluating various aspects of the marketing communications process and the relevant marketing communications tools most commonly used. It is further designed to assist business managers to make choices regarding which marketing tools to use under a variety of dynamic environments. Topics covered include: advertising, PR, personal selling, direct selling, Internet marketing, sponsorship, sales promotion and emerging technologies and their potential.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the marketing communication strategies used to build brands
  2. understand and apply marketing communication functions
  3. analyse and apply the marketing communication processes as they apply to specific targets
  4. analyse the social, legal and ethical issues associated with marketing communication from both a national and international perspective
  5. determine and apply the processes associated with evaluating the effectiveness of marketing communications across a range of media vehicles.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS3121 - Marketing planning and implementation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Coordinator(s)

Mrs Melanie Klopper

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester B 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: MKG2402 or MKW2402 or MKS2402 and MKG2420 or MKW2420 or MKS2420 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKF3121, MKG3121, MKW3121Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The development of corporate marketing strategies; marketing planning procedure; evaluation and control in marketing planning; international case studies in corporate marketing planning and strategy; concepts of product management; designing a product strategy; monitoring planning/marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the relationship between corporate planning and marketing planning in a business environment
  2. demonstrate the relationship between corporate objective setting and marketing objective setting
  3. construct or prepare a marketing plan, which incorporates the specific elements of the marketing mix to achieve specific marketing objectives
  4. develop and enhance appropriate written and oral communications and analytical skills required for the effective presentation of a marketing plan
  5. understand how a marketing plan is implemented in practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS3440 - Marketing strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG2420 or MKS2420 or MKW2420 or MKB2420 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKC3130Not offered in 2018, MKF3131, MKG3440, MKW3440Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

This unit explores corporate strategy and marketing strategy, strategic perspectives on buyer behaviour, strategic use of marketing mix variables such as communication, pricing, distribution, product, external and internal decision environments, market position and analysis, corporate and marketing strategic direction, managing marketing strategy planning and control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the effectiveness of marketing strategy at different levels of the organisation using case studies
  2. apply marketing theories and model to analysing and formulating marketing strategy analysis and formulation processes
  3. assess the role of segmentation, targeting and positioning strategy and the marketing mix elements in the strategy making process
  4. formulate and recommend strategic solutions that add measurable value to the organisations used in case studies
  5. examine the feasibility of implementing and controlling chosen marketing strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS3444 - International marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Coordinator(s)

Ms Cynthia Bedwei-Majdoub

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG1120 or MKW1120 or MKS1120 or MKB1200 or MKP1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKB3531, MKC3220Not offered in 2018, MKC3224, MKF3531, MKG3444, MKW3444.

Synopsis

The unit covers environmental factors affecting international marketing, the field of international business, international marketing research and marketing decisions, entry strategies, marketing planning, controlling and strategy for international business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and evaluate how a range of international marketing criteria impact on a chosen and specific foreign market
  2. develop, analyse, justify and evaluate market entry and longer term foreign marketing plans for a specific market
  3. understand how current issues, trends and research in international marketing impact on designated foreign market segments
  4. identify and evaluate how a range of specialised, localised and specific issues might impact upon business activity within a designated foreign market segment
  5. utilise independent critical thinking and applied learning skills to develop an international marketing orientation in terms of a chosen market context.

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS3631 - Marketing internship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Approval to enrol in this unit will only be given after consultation with the unit leader. Normally students will be required to be in the final year of their degree, and preferably in their final semester.

Prohibitions

MKX3631

Synopsis

This unit aims to give students first-hand experience of working in an industry in which they would like to be employed on graduation. Internships are designed to provide students with an opportunity to integrate marketing theory with business practice. Separate internship programs are drawn up for each student.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse a marketing activity
  2. evaluate the impact of a specific marketing theory within a business context
  3. evaluate the experience of working within an organisation
  4. communicate clearly and effectively with both business and academic stakeholders.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKS3881 - Electronic marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Marlene Bogaards

Unit guides

Offered

South Africa

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG1120, MKS1120, MKW1120 or MKW1601 and MKS2460, MKW2460 or MKG2460 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKW3881Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

Traditional business disciplines are starting to appreciate the fundamental challenges presented by the application of technology to their knowledge base. In marketing, the most visible agent of change has been WWW and online transacting which has already revolutionised a number of sectors of the world economy. This subject takes marketing and traditional views of marketing, and exposes them to critical analysis in the light of technological change. It explores how marketers can utilise different ways of understanding, creating, communicating and delivering customer value in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. illustrate insight into how traditional marketing structures and concepts, techniques and activities translate into the electronic marketing medium
  2. demonstrate an integrated perspective of how electronic marketing contributes to value creation for all stakeholders
  3. illustrate an ability to analyse the market and to create and develop innovative electronic solutions to fulfil identifiable needs
  4. combine theory with the pragmatism required to effectively traverse the divide between marketing and delivering an electronic solution to market needs.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW1120 - Marketing theory and practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Low Koon Huat (First and Second semester)
Mr Yoga Sembada (October intake)

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Low Koon Huat (First and Second semester)
Mr Yoga Sembada (October intake)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • October intake 2018 (On-campus)

Prohibitions

MKB1200, MKC1200, MKF1120, MKG1120, MKP1120

Synopsis

Introduction to marketing activities undertaken by business, government, profit, non profit organisations. Marketing theory, the marketing concept and its evolution from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation and marketing's role, value-exchange processes, buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis, the marketing environment, the use of marketing decision making tools; product concepts, strategies and development; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the key concepts upon which the practice of marketing is based
  2. recognise these concepts in the marketplace and in everyday life
  3. discuss the role and influence of marketing in the organisational environment
  4. discuss how key marketing concepts can be used in analysing a range of marketing problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW1300 - Introduction to social commerce

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Yeow

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to provide e-business students with basic knowledge of how e-commerce activities are handled using online social media. Students will learn about concepts that include theories in social commerce, social commerce strategy, benefits and limitations of social commerce, Facebook commerce, social media marketing, performance management and metrics of social commerce, customer relationship management in social media, issues in social commerce implementation and qualitative and quantitative social media analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the various tools of social media and describe how those tools are used to engage customers
  2. identify, analyse and critically assess the suitability of various social commerce models and strategies for various e-businesses
  3. explain the various principles and theories of social commerce
  4. describe, explain and propose the appropriate marketing communication that could be conducted in various social commerce models
  5. describe how social commerce aids customer relationship management
  6. explain and understand the implementation issues in social commerce.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW2402 - Consumer behaviour

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vimala Kunchamboo

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vimala Kunchamboo

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKW1120 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

MKB2402, MKW2111, MKC2110, MKF2111, MKG2402, MKP2700, MKP2701

Synopsis

Behavioural concepts and theories relating to consumer behaviour and consumer decision making process. Study of consumer behaviour influenced by individuals' socio-cultural factors such as family, social groups and group processes, social class, culture and subculture and consumers' individual factors such as motivation and needs, perception, learning, personality and lifestyle attitudes. Overview of organisational buying.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the basic concepts of consumer behaviour describe how this knowledge can be used by marketers
  2. demonstrate ability to segment markets using consumer behaviour concepts/constructs
  3. identify and illustrate how these concepts can be used to explain the decisions buyers make in the marketplace
  4. analyse the behaviour profiles of specific market segments and understand the basic aspects of strategy development as it applies to specific target groups
  5. explain and apply marketing communication in relation to consumer behaviour.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW2420 - Marketing research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fandy Tjiptono (First semester)
Dr Ewe Soo Yeong (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Fandy Tjiptono (First semester)
Dr Ewe Soo Yeong (Second semester)

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

MKW2402 or MKW2111

Prohibitions

ETC2500, MKB2420, MKC2500, MKF2121, MKG2420

Synopsis

The process of marketing research. Role of research in the marketing decision process. Developing key outputs -- brief, proposal, report. Planning and managing a research project. Qualitative and quantitative research techniques. Statistical analysis, marketing interpretation and reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of marketing research methods
  2. illustrate the processes and techniques on quantitative and qualitative research
  3. demonstrate skills on writing a research proposal and the conduct of a research study by applying appropriate research design
  4. develop competencies to analyse and interpret data by applying basic statistical tools
  5. critically assess the relevance of information for marketing decision making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW2431 - Business marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Low Koon Huat

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Low Koon Huat

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKG2431

Synopsis

Topics include the nature and environment of business marketing, buying process in business marketing, marketing intelligence and business market targeting, networking and relationship, planning a business marketing mix strategy, ethical issues in business marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and explain the dynamic nature of business marketing
  2. illustrate the organisational buying decision process and the role of buying centre in buying decisions
  3. develop competencies in business marketing strategy components
  4. demonstrate application of marketing theories and concepts in the management of business marketing functions
  5. critically evaluate the techniques that can be used to assess market opportunities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW2460 - Integrated marketing communication

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ghazala Khan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ghazala Khan

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: MKG1120 or MKW1120 and MKG2402 or MKW2402 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKC3460, MKF3461, MKW2211, MKG2460

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with a theoretical and practical appreciation of the central role marketing communication plays in the general business environment. The unit provides a framework for examining, analysing and evaluation various aspects of the marketing communications process and the relevant marketing communications tools most commonly used. It is further designed to assist business managers to make choices regarding which marketing tools to use under a variety of dynamic environments. Topics covered include: advertising, PR, personal selling, direct selling, Internet marketing, sponsorship, sales promotion, emerging technologies and their potential.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the marketing communication strategies used to build brands
  2. understand and apply marketing communication functions
  3. analyse and apply the marketing communication processes as they apply to specific targets
  4. analyse the social, legal, and ethical issues associated with marketing communication from both a national and international perspective
  5. determine and apply the processes associated with evaluating the effectiveness of marketing communications across a range of media vehicles.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW3121 - Marketing planning and implementation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Nicholas Grigoriou

Coordinator(s)

Mr Nicholas Grigoriou

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: MKG2402 or MKW2402 and MKG2420 or MKW2420 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKF3121, MKG3121

Synopsis

The development of corporate marketing strategies; marketing planning procedure; evaluation and control in marketing planning; international case studies in corporate marketing planning and strategy; concepts of product management; designing a product strategy; monitoring planning/marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the relationship between corporate planning and marketing planning in a business environment
  2. demonstrate the relationship between corporate objective setting and marketing objective setting
  3. construct or prepare a marketing plan, which incorporates the specific elements of the marketing mix to achieve specific marketing objectives
  4. develop and enhance appropriate written and oral communications and analytical skills required for the effective presentation of a marketing plan
  5. understand how a marketing plan is implemented in practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW3301 - Services marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Juliana French

Coordinator(s)

Ms Juliana French

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKW1120

Synopsis

An in-depth analysis of the marketing techniques that apply to service organisations and industries including service design and delivery, customer service, service quality measurement and internal marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and explain service and understand the implications of this on marketing, buyer behaviour, classification of services and internationalising services
  2. design a service using blueprinting and the servuction model, including managing service encounters and building loyalty
  3. develop and implement promotional, pricing, product, distribution strategies for a service giving consideration to the demand management and service positioning implications
  4. explain the importance of the measurement of service quality, giving consideration to relationship marketing theory, complaint handling and service recovery.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW3440 - Marketing strategy

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fandy Tjiptono

Coordinator(s)

Dr Fandy Tjiptono

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG2420 or MKW2420 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKC3130Not offered in 2018, MKF3131, MKG3440

Synopsis

Corporate strategy and marketing strategy, strategic perspectives on buyer behaviour, strategic use of marketing mix variables such as communication, pricing, distribution, product, external and internal decision environments, market position and analysis, corporate and marketing strategic direction, managing marketing strategy -- planning and control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the effectiveness of marketing strategy at different levels of the organisation using case studies
  2. apply marketing theories and model to analysing and formulating marketing strategy analysis and formulation processes
  3. assess the role of segmentation, targeting and positioning strategy and the marketing mix elements in the strategy making process
  4. formulate and recommend strategic solutions that add measurable value to the organisations used in case studies
  5. examine the feasibility of implementing and controlling chosen marketing strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW3444 - International marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fandy Tjiptono

Coordinator(s)

Dr Fandy Tjiptono

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKB3531, MKC3220Not offered in 2018, MKC3224, MKF3531, MKG3444

Synopsis

The unit covers environmental factors affecting international marketing, the field of international business, international marketing research and marketing decisions, entry strategies, marketing planning, controlling and strategy for international business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and evaluate how a range of international marketing environmental factors impact on selection of a foreign market
  2. develop, analyse, justify and evaluate market entry and longer term foreign marketing operation plans for a chosen market
  3. understand how current issues, trends and contingencies in global environment impact on marketing programs
  4. identify and evaluate how a range of specialised, localised and specific issues might impact upon business activity in a foreign market segment
  5. utilise critical thinking and applied learning skills to develop an international marketing orientation in a chosen market context.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW3610 - Marketing strategy and implementation

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vicki Janine Little

Coordinator(s)

Dr Vicki Janine Little

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units: MKW1120, MKP1120, MKG1120, MKS1120, MKW2402, MKB2402, MKS2402, MKG2402, MKW2420, MKG2420, MKB2420, MKS2420.

Prohibitions

MKC3130Not offered in 2018, MKC3140, MKC3110, MKF3151, MKF3131, MKF3121, MKW3440Not offered in 2018, MKW3121Not offered in 2018, MKG3121, MKG3440

Synopsis

The development and implementation of effective marketing strategies is one of the key success factors for marketers in competitive markets. This unit provides an integrated perspective of the planning, implementation, evaluation, and control of marketing strategies. In doing so, the unit focuses on the practical application of marketing and other strategy-related concepts, techniques and analytical tools in marketing decision-making processes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse and evaluate the effectiveness of marketing strategy at different levels of the organisation
  2. analyse the role of segmentation, targeting and positioning strategy and the marketing mix elements in the strategic making process
  3. develop a marketing plan, which incorporates the specific elements of the marketing mix to achieve specific marketing objectives
  4. develop and enhance appropriate written and oral communications and analytical skills required for the effective presentation of marketing strategies
  5. evaluate the feasibility of implementing and controlling chosen marketing strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW3701 - Neuroscience of decision-making: An introduction

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Motoki Watabe

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Alexandre Schaefer

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MKW2402 or PSY1011

Synopsis

The main objective of this unit is to introduce a novel interdisciplinary field characterised by the utilisation of neuroscientific and behavioural methods to understand and predict economic behaviours, including consumer behaviour. A major emphasis will be given to the fields of neuromarketing and neuroeconomics, and to their applications.

This unit will be relevant for business students without any background in neuroscience, yet interested in cutting-edge approaches that integrate knowledge from several scientific fields. This unit may also appeal to students from biomedical disciplines, in particular psychology and neuroscience, and also to social sciences students.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand basic fundamentals of neuroanatomy and neuroimaging methods necessary to understand most published studies in the fields of neuroeconomics and neuromarketing
  2. understand basic principles of neural and cognitive processes underlying economic, financial and social decision-making processes
  3. understand the main results obtained in the field of consumer neuroscience
  4. understand issues related to how brain sciences can realistically contribute to business practices
  5. develop important ethical values: how can neuroscience be used for marketing purposes without harming consumer's interests and rights? Are neuromarketing consultancy companies truly able to help businesses, or are they misleading business practitioners?
  6. develop skills in innovation and application of research skills in the professional world: how to use the knowledge and methods of cognitive psychology and neuroscience in the field of economics and business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW3841 - E-business performance measurement

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Yeow

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Paul Yeow

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

MKW2841, or MKW1601 or MKW3881Not offered in 2018

Prohibitions

BEW2620

Synopsis

This unit is about measure and metrics used in assessing whether an e-business is achieving its goals. The unit links online business models, business environment, and change to business performance to performance measures. It also links performance measures with strategy, value, and business environment. It provides alternative performance measures and metrics as feedback mechanisms in an online performance measurement environment and establishes benchmarks. These include performance measures for external and internal operations, transactions with customers and suppliers, e-business and e-commerce activities, e-business security, general business health, website activities, etc. Explicitly, it includes measurement principles, measurement interactions, and measurement impact on performance assessment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. to develop a clear understanding of the concept of performance measurement in the e-business environment
  2. to provide students with theoretical knowledge and practical skills on how to develop appropriate e-business performance measures and metrics to monitor and control company's e-business and e-commerce initiatives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKW3881 - Electronic marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Yeow (First semester)
Ms Marlene Bogaards (Second semester)

Coordinator(s)

Dr Tan Choon Ling (First semester)
Ms Marlene Bogaards (Second semester)

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG1120, MKW1120 or MKW1601 before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

Traditional business disciplines are starting to appreciate the fundamental challenges presented by the application of technology to their knowledge base. In marketing the most visible agent of change has been WWW and online transacting which has already revolutionised a number of sectors of the world economy. This subject takes marketing and traditional views of marketing and exposes them to critical analysis in the light of technological change. It explores how marketers can utilise different ways of understanding, creating, communication and delivering customer value in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. illustrate insight into how traditional marketing structures and concepts, techniques and activities translate into the electronic marketing medium
  2. demonstrate an integrated perspective of how electronic marketing contributes to value creation for all stakeholders
  3. illustrate an ability to analyse the market and to create and develop innovative electronic solutions to fulfil identifiable needs
  4. combine theory with the pragmatism required to effectively traverse the divide between marketing and delivering an electronic solution to market needs.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX1500 - Retail management principles

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ghazala Khan

Coordinator(s)

Dr Ghazala Khan

Unit guides

Offered

Malaysia

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Synopsis

An overview of retailing from a management perspective. The development of retailing; the Australian retail industry and its environment; merchandising planning, control and distribution; pricing merchandise; selling and sales promotion; store location, layout and presentation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide students with a broad appreciation of the business of retail now and in the future
  2. provide students with a working knowledge of retail processes and procedures
  3. develop in students an understanding of how the industry is structured
  4. equip students with the skills necessary to analyse a retail business
  5. provide students with an understanding of the various retail formats in Australia and internationally.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 55% + Examination: 45%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX2531 - Not for profit marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Wagstaff

Coordinator(s)

Dr Itir Binay

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKC1200, MKF1120, MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

This unit will introduce students to the unique features of Not for Profit Marketing. In this very diverse sector, commercially derived marketing concepts have played an important role, but also face some special challenges. The aim is to explore the similarities, differences and challenges for marketing in social and political marketing, government and education marketing, arts and culture marketing using examples from Australia and around the world.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the importance of marketing in the not for profit organisation
  2. compare and contrast marketing in not for profit and for profit organisations
  3. describe the adjustments marketing must address in not for profit organisations
  4. illustrate appropriate marketing from the not for profit sector
  5. practice communication skills for marketing in not for profit organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX3002 - Enhanced research skills

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mauricio Palmeira

Coordinator(s)

Dr Mauricio Palmeira

Not offered in 2018

Prerequisites

Students of honours standard will be invited to enrol in this unit.

Synopsis

The purpose of this unit is to offer a broad appreciation of academic marketing research and to provide an understanding of the Honours year. The unit offers the opportunity to read widely in marketing theory with the intention of identifying a potential research project. The unit is taught through the seminar method and students will read from leading marketing journals and the business press. Seminars will be offered by staff members or visiting academics. The unit will introduce students to critical analysis of marketing theory with a view to assessing research topics and encourage/facilitate the development of independent research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop and enhance appropriate research reading and analytical skills in marketing theory
  2. develop critical reading skills
  3. develop an understanding of the Honours year
  4. provide opportunity for highly able students to spend time with research active staff.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX3200 - Sport marketing and sponsorship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Wagstaff

Coordinator(s)

Mr Kevin Argus

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

MKF1120, MKG1120, MKW1120 or MKC1200 and MKF2111, MKC2110, MKG2402 or MKW2402 or equivalent in undergraduate degree program

Prohibitions

MKG3200

Synopsis

The unit introduces the omnipresence of sport in Australian society, the interconnectedness of sport and business, particularly marketing, and those factors that differentiate sport marketing from mainstream marketing. The unit will draw on the rapidly expanding body of literature on sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will also be introduced to the most current marketing concepts and their relevance to sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will develop an appreciation of sport sponsorship as a co-marketing alliance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discriminate between the marketing of sport properties, and the marketing through sport properties in the form of sponsorship and the implications for strategy development
  2. critically assess the relevance of the contingency marketing planning framework for sport marketing
  3. develop a fan profile based on level of team identification as an indication of fan loyalty
  4. determine the role of sponsorship in marketing and in particular in marketing communication and branding strategy
  5. critically analyse effective methods for evaluating sponsorship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX3481 - Marketing channels

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sophie Feng

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sophie Feng

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Clayton

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKC1200, MKF1120, MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.

Synopsis

The marketing task is not complete until customers receive their goods. Distribution is the process that makes that happen. The primary aim of this unit is the development and management of distribution channels in order to meet your marketing objectives. The unit is designed to help you systematically analyse the various channel functions and strategies. Mastering the principles that will be discussed in this unit will also help you in understanding Supply Chain issues. It is important to note however, that this unit is NOT about supply chain management but rather about the role of channels as a marketing strategic element. Some topics of supply chain management of course will be discussed from a marketing perspective. In order to better understand the theory in the context of the business world actual business cases are used throughout the lectures and tutorials.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise the importance of marketing channels, as a strategic element of marketing
  2. understand the elements and work flows in marketing channels
  3. appreciate the issues involved in designing and coordinating marketing channels from a channel manager's perspective
  4. explain how effective marketing channels contribute to customer value and assess the performance of channel management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50% + Examination: 50%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX3521 - Global study programs in marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Mr David Toleman

Coordinator(s)

Mr David Toleman

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)
  • Trimester 2 2018 (On-campus)

Shanghai

  • Trimester 2 2018 (On-campus block of classes)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed 48 points including at least 12 points from the Department of Marketing.

Synopsis

This unit is designed to expose students to the thinking of some of the world's leading marketers. Building on previous knowledge gained in earlier marketing units students will analyse the critical factors associated with marketing in a global arena. Students gain a practical understanding of these issues in a global context through the visitation program which forms an integral part of this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appraise global marketing and the nature of the forces impacting marketing at a global level
  2. evaluate basic theories and concepts relevant to global marketing and analyse how these theories and concepts can provide insight into, and an understanding of marketing in a global context
  3. compare and analyse a number of senior marketing managers perspectives and marketing strategies
  4. evaluate the importance of cross cultural issues on marketing and their impact on global marketing strategy
  5. develop excellent oral and written communication skills to be able to interact in a professional environment with senior managers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX3631 - Marketing internship

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Jane Carroll

Coordinator(s)

Ms Jane Carroll

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)
  • Summer semester A 2018 (On-campus)

Prerequisites

Approval to enrol in this unit will only be given after consultation with the unit leader. Students must have completed 24 credit points of marketing units.

Synopsis

This unit aims to give students first-hand experience of working in an industry in which they would like to be employed on graduation. Internships are designed to provide students with an opportunity to integrate marketing theory with business practice. Separate internship programs are drawn up for each student

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse a marketing activity
  2. evaluate the impact of a specific marketing theory within a business context
  3. evaluate the experience of working within an organisation
  4. communicate clearly and effectively with both business and academic stakeholders.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX4050 - Marketing theory

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Coordinator(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B6010, 0181, 2276 or 4431.

Synopsis

Theory in marketing covers three broad levels; consumer, firm, and society. It also incorporates a number of different schools of thought developed over various eras. This unit is designed to give you an integrative introduction to marketing theory that spans these levels of analysis and streams of thought. The unit will also provide an introduction to the tools of constructing theory, and equip students with theory-building skills to conduct scholarly research that will legitimately advance the boundaries of marketing knowledge.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire basic historical understanding of the development of marketing theory
  2. understand the major streams of thought in marketing and appreciate the differences in philosophy and method between these perspectives
  3. be able to begin developing research ideas that make a theoretical contribution to existing literature
  4. apply critical thinking in marketing theory to interpret and integrate disparate findings into a broader theoretical framework
  5. apply marketing theory developments to practical marketing problems (most readily through the Honours thesis but more broadly if necessary).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX4060 - Marketing research practice

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sean Sands

Coordinator(s)

Dr Sean Sands

Not offered in 2018

Synopsis

The unit provides practical training in the analysis of data. The unit will also illustrate how research methods are used in academic research and compare this to marketing industry research. Through workshops, exercises and presentations students will gain practical skills in data analysis. Review of the research process provides insight into variations in problem definition, theory development or application, and reporting across different research perspectives.

Outcomes

The aim of this unit to provide students with knowledge regarding practical and professional issues surrounding the conduct of academic research in Marketing. This unit is designed to fill the gaps between theoretical knowledge and practice and provide for skills in identifying and formalising research problems, preparing literature based arguments, understanding philosophical stances in marketing research, as well as issues surrounding data management, dissemination, project specification and ethics.

Upon successful completion of this unit students will:

  1. have an understanding of the different philosophies that inform approaches to marketing research appreciate their methodological imperatives
  2. be able to identify, specify and formalise research opportunities
  3. understand the requirements of generating a literature review and a theoretical frame of reference
  4. have an ability to record, track, analyse and manage literature sources
  5. appreciate the practical problems in undertaking fieldwork including data management, security and ethics
  6. be able to prepare a rigorous proposal for an academic research project in Marketing
  7. be able to address research to different target audiences, through writing style, argument structure and dissemination plans
  8. appreciate the processes involved in delivering different research outputs

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX4070 - Qualitative research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Jan Brace-Govan

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Jan Brace-Govan

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6010.

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to introduce students with limited experience in qualitative research, to some of its methods for data gathering, data analysis and some means to ensure reliability and validity, with particular reference to marketing. Topics include field work, interviewing, and data analysis. It provides the opportunity to explore qualitative research and practice in the field of marketing with emphasis on scholarly practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe different qualitative methods, assess reported qualitative research results
  2. develop a research problem that would be best addressed through qualitative approaches
  3. gather and analyse qualitative data, present an argument based on qualitative methods that demonstrates validity and reliability
  4. explain ethical issues relevant to qualitative methods.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX4080 - Advanced business research methods

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Yelena Tsarenko

Coordinator(s)

Associate Professor Yelena Tsarenko

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (On-campus split block of classes)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701 or B6010.

Synopsis

An in-depth introduction to the critical thinking and planning required in the initial stages of a thesis or research project. This unit will focus on the development of research proposal, research model, data analysis and interpretation of results.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of how to formulate a theoretical framework for a marketing problem/opportunity
  2. provide an understanding and appreciation of quantitative research techniques
  3. provide an understanding of how to conduct data analysis
  4. develop a comprehensive research report
  5. develop a capability of communicating research findings.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX4461 - Contemporary issues in marketing

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Undergraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas

Coordinator(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • First semester 2018 (Evening)

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in course B6010, 0181, 2276 or 4431.

Prohibitions

MKF5461

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an in-depth exposure to contemporary issues in marketing and in particular to the relationship between observed marketing practice and extant marketing theory. Taught in seminar format, the unit requires significant interaction between students and presenters.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise and evaluate some of the contemporary issues facing organisations and particularly marketers and marketing in today's dynamic marketplace
  2. examine how traditional marketing theory, structures, concepts, techniques and practices may become emerging issues, transformed by new knowledge or impacted by alternative perspectives
  3. explain a number of contemporary issues and their impact in detail
  4. analyse existing literature to gain insight into selected current and future issues that will impact business and marketing in particular
  5. recommend and compose responses to existing or potential marketing issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60% + Examination: 40%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload to achieve the learning outcomes for this unit is 144 hours per semester typically comprising a mixture of scheduled learning activities and independent study. Independent study may include associated readings, assessment and preparation for scheduled activities. The unit requires on average three/four hours of scheduled activities per week. Scheduled activities may include a combination of teacher directed learning, peer directed learning and online engagement.

See also Unit timetable information


MKX4900 - Honours research thesis

24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Undergraduate, Postgraduate - Unit

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered.

Faculty

Business and Economics

Organisational Unit

Department of Marketing

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Junzhao Ma

Coordinator(s)

Dr Junzhao Ma

Unit guides

Offered

Caulfield

  • Second semester 2018 (On-campus)

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course B3701.

Synopsis

A major research project applying the procedures and techniques learned in MKF4030. Students prepare and write a report in such a way to pave the way for a higher academic degree in marketing or management or a career in business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a marketing or business issue in the research literature which has either not been adequately researched previously or which requires replication
  2. critically review relevant academic and business research which relates to this issue
  3. develop a model or conceptualisation of the proposed research and an appreciation of the relevance of such studies to the business community
  4. develop a set of hypotheses to be tested, propose research into these hypotheses, by means of a specific research proposal
  5. conduct, analyse and report findings of the research so that all main issues are identified, limitations of the research are identified and the research findings are linked back to earlier studies in the literature.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Workload requirements

Minimum total expected workload equals 576 hours per semester

See also Unit timetable information